Trimble Access software User Manual

Trimble Trimble VX Spatial Station

•

Trimble TSC3

•

•

An Trimble S Series total station with Trimble VISION technology

Images can also be captured using a digital camera including the:

•

Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W via BlueTooth

•

Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W via Wi-Fi

•

SDHC compatible digital camera via Wi-Fi

Using the Trimble GeoXR to capture images

1. Press the camera button

2. Tap [Menu] and configure the various camera settings, if required. The zoom factor values that appear depend on the selected resolution. For further information, refer to the Trimble GeoXR controller documentation.

3. Position the controller to capture the required image and then press the camera button to focus and then release to capture the image.

4. To close the camera, tap [OK] and then [X].

Tip - Media files (images) captured using a Trimble GeoXR controller can be linked to an attribute, the job, or a point in a job. See

job, or a point in a job. See Linking Media Files.

Using the Trimble Slate Controller to capture images

1. Press the Windows button to access the [Start] menu.

2. Tap [Pictures &Videos] and then [Camera].

3. Tap the screen and then the up arrow to configure the various camera settings, if required. For further information, refer to the Trimble Slate Controller documentation.

4. Position the controller to capture the required image and then tap the camera button to capture the image.

5. To close the camera, tap the screen and then [X].

Tip - Media files (images) captured using a Trimble Slate Controller can be linked to an attribute, the

Using the TSC3 controller to capture images

1. Press (Fn + 1).

3. Tap [Camera].

4. Position the controller to capture the required image and then press the trigger key (the Enter key on the controller's navigation pad) lightly to focus and then complete the press to capture the image.

5. To close the camera, tap [OK] twice.

Tip - Media files (images) captured using a TSC3 controller can be linked to an attribute, the job, or

a point in a job. See Linking Media Files.

Using an instrument with Trimble VISION technology to capture images

1. Connect to the instrument.

2. To access the Video option do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, tap Instrument / Video.

♦

Tap the Instrument functions icon and then tap Video in the Instrument functions screen.

3. Tap the snapshot options button details on image properties.

to set the image properties, if required. See

Video for further

4. Tap the camera softkey to capture the image.

Note - The camera softkey image varies depending on the zoom setting. See

Video for further details

5. Tap Store to store the image.

Tip - Media files (images) captured using an instrument with Trimble VISION technology can be linked to an attribute, the job, or a point in a job. See

See

for a description of Trimble VISION technology.

Using an Trimble VX Spatial Station to capture images using the panorama function

1. Connect to the instrument.

2. From the Measure menu, select Scanning.

3. Define the area for the scan. See

Scanning

for further details.

4. Tap the Panorama button to:

♦

Set the Image Size

♦

Set the Compression

♦

Select Fixed exposure

♦

Specify the Image overlap

5. Tap Start to begin taking the images.

6. Tap Finish when all images have been captured.

Tip - Media files (images) captured using an instrument with Trimble VISION technology can be linked to an attribute, the job, or a point in a job. See

See

technology can be linked to an attribute, the job, or a point in a job. See Linking Media Files.

for a description of Trimble VISION technology.

Using an Trimble S Series total station with Trimble VISION technology to capture images using the panorama function

1. Connect to the instrument.

2. From the Instrument menu, select Panorama.

3. Define the area for the panorama. See

Scanning

for further details.

4. Tap Start to:

♦

Set the Image Size

♦

Set the Compression

♦

Select Fixed exposure

♦

Specify the Image overlap

5. Tap Start to begin taking the images.

6. Tap Finish when all images have been captured.

Tip - Media files (images) captured using an Trimble S Series total station with Trimble VISION

See

for a description of Trimble VISION technology.

Capturing an image using a digital camera

With some brands of digital camera, you can take images and then wirelessly transfer them to the controller.

Note - You can connect a Trimble GeoXR, Trimble Slate Controller, TSC3/TSC2, or Trimble CU controller to a Bluetooth capable digital camera, or connect a Trimble GeoXR, Trimble Slate Controller, or TSC3/TSC2 to a Wi-Fi capable digital camera.

Tip - Media files (images) captured using a digital camera can be linked to an attribute, the job, or a point in a job. See

Supported Wireless Cameras

You can use Bluetooth or Wi-Fi technology for wireless transfer of images. A Wi-Fi connection can be more difficult to set up but offers faster file transfer. A Bluetooth connection is generally easier to set up but file transfer is slower.

Camera

Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W

Wireless Technology Protocol

Wi-Fi FTP

Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W Bluetooth

SDHC compatible digital camera Wi-Fi

Bluetooth

Eye-Fi

Notes

•

To communicate with an SDHC-compatible digital camera, you must select Wi-Fi image transfer when installing the Trimble Access software using the Trimble Access Installation Manager. As the

Wi-Fi image transfer software and license are installed, a configuration wizard configures and pairs

• the Eye-Fi card to the controller.

To use a Wi-Fi connection to a camera and an Internet connection via Bluetooth to an external phone at the same time, you must first create the Internet connection (using Internet Setup) and then create

• the connection to the camera

The Trimble CU controller does not support Wi-Fi technology; for wireless connection to a camera use a Bluetooth connection to the Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W. The TSC2 controller supports both

Bluetooth and Wi-Fi connections and supports all cameras in the above table.

100

•

Wi-Fi image transfer using an Eye-Fi SDHC card is available for the following controllers:

♦

TSC3

♦

TSC2 with a serial number higher than SS23

♦

Trimble Slate Controller

♦

Trimble GeoXR

•

If the image does not transfer within a few minutes, turn off the camera and then turn it on again. This will cause the Eye-Fi SDHC card to restart the transfer process.

Setting up the Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W using a Bluetooth connection

For optimal file transfer through a Bluetooth connection, make sure that the correct settings are configured on the camera:

1. Press [Menu/OK] while in shooting mode to view the shooting settings [SHTG STGS] menu.

2. Press the right arrow to select the expanded settings [EXP SET] menu.

3. Press the up or down arrows to ensure that the menu items are configured as follows:

Menu item

BT Auto Conn

Setting

Off

Master/Slave

Image File Size

Master

160

Auto Del Off

Quick Send Mode 2 Touch

Change COM BT

Tip - Transferring large images through a Bluetooth wireless connection can be slow. For faster file transfer from the camera to the controller, set the [Image File Size] to the smallest value. This transfers a small image with the same name as the original file to the controller, enabling you to link the image correctly to your job.

When in the office, copy the files from the camera into your data folder, overwriting the images that were transferred from the controller. Do not change the image names on the controller. If you set [Quick Send

Mode] to [1Touch], the [Image File Size] setting does not apply and the full-sized image is transferred, making the transfer slower.

Setting up a Wi-Fi connection between the controller and camera

•

For more information, refer to the support note Trimble Handhelds Running Windows Mobile Version

5.0 Software: Connecting a Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W Camera.

Configuring a controller to work with a SDHC compatible digital camera

For Trimble tablet controllers, the configuration wizard configures the controller to work with the camera.

However, as your Wi-Fi connection may be used for Internet access, you must manually configure the Wi-Fi setting each time you switch between transferring images and Internet use. To manually switch to the Wi-Fi image transfer network:

1. Tap Settings / Connect / Wi-Fi image transfer.

101

2. If the [User Account Control] dialog appears, tap [Yes].

3. From the Wi-Fi image transfer screen, select the Settings tab.

4. Tap Wi-Fi networks to open the Network and Sharing Center dialog.

5. Tap Connect or disconnect or Connect to a network (if no connection has been established). From the pop-up list of wireless network connections, select the serial number of your Trimble tablet.

6. Tap [Connect] to switch to the Wi-Fi image transfer network.

7. Close the Network and Sharing Center dialog.

8. From the Wi-Fi adaptor mode drop down list, select Connect to ad-hoc network.

9. Close Wi-Fi image transfer. When the [Set network location] dialog appears, select [Public].

You are now configured to capture and wirelessly transfer images.

To return to the previous network:

1. Tap Settings / Connect / Wi-Fi image transfer.

2. If the [User Account Control] dialog appears, tap [Yes].

3. From the Wi-Fi image transfer screen, select the Settings tab.

4. Tap Wi-Fi networks to open the Network and Sharing Center dialog.

5. Tap Connect or disconnect or Connect to a network (if no connection has been established). From the pop-up list of wireless network connections, select the previous network.

6. To return to the previous network, tap [Connect].

7. Close the Network and Sharing Center dialog.

8. From the Wi-Fi adaptor mode drop down list, select Connect to infrastructure network.

9. Close Wi-Fi image transfer.

For the Trimble GeoXR, Trimble Slate Controller, TSC2, and TSC3 controllers, the configuration wizard configures the controller to work with the camera.

Linking Media Files

Media files can be linked to:

•

An attribute

•

job

•

point in a job

Linking media files to an attribute

Use the File name attribute field to link a file name to an attribute. You can use file name attributes for any type of file, but typically when linking .jpg/.jpeg images.

The File name attribute field includes a Browse button that enables you to:

•

Find and select a file name as an attribute.

•

Review a .jpg/.jpeg file that was entered into the attribute field.

102

The File name attribute field detects when an image has been captured using:

•

The in-built camera in the following controllers:

♦

Trimble GeoXR

♦

An instrument with Trimble VISION technology

♦

Trimble TSC3

•

•

digital camera including the:

♦

Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W via Wi-Fi

♦

Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W via BlueTooth

♦

SDHC compatible digital camera via Wi-Fi

•

Or when a .jpg/.jpeg image is added to [\My Documents] on the controller.

If an image is detected, the file name is automatically entered into the File name attribute field.

If there are multiple File name attribute fields, the filename will be entered into the highlighted field.

Alternatively, tap Browse to open a dialog and then do one of the following to select the required file:

•

Tap the file.

•

Use the arrow key to highlight the file and then tap OK.

•

If selecting a .jpg/.jpeg file, tap and hold with the stylus on the file and then select Preview. Tap

Select to select the current file, or tap Prev or Next to preview another file.

If you select a .jpg/.jpeg file, an option to Review the selected file becomes available from the Browse button.

To change your selection, tap and then tap Select file.

Once you select an image from a folder, it becomes the default folder the next time you select an image.

When selecting the file, the available "tap and hold" options are: Select, Preview, Cut, Copy, Paste, Rename,

Delete, Create folder, and Properties.

Note - You should not rename a file after attaching it to an observation. Files rename after attaching will not be downloaded with the job.

Tips

•

To sort a column in ascending or descending order, tap the column header.

•

An arrow beside the column title indicates the sort order.

•

To quickly select the latest file, sort on Modified date and time. If the oldest files appear at the top of the list, click Modified again to reverse the sort order.

Notes

•

Feature codes created using the General Survey software do not have attributes associated with them.

Using the Trimble GeoXR to capture images from the attribute form

103

1. Enter a feature code with a file attribute and then tap Attrib.

2. Press the camera button

3. Tap [Menu] and then configure the various camera settings, if required. The zoom factor values that appear depend on the selected resolution. For further information, refer to the Trimble GeoXR documentation.

4. Position the controller to capture the required image and then press the camera button to focus and then release to capture the image.

5. To close the camera, tap [OK] and then [X].

6. The image name is automatically entered into the file attribute field. If required, review the image; tap

Browse and then select Review. To save the attributes, tap Store.

Note - In order for the image names to be automatically entered, the images must be stored in the default folder location [MyPictures].

Using the Trimble Slate Controller to capture images

1. Enter a feature code with a file attribute and then tap Attrib.

1. Press the Windows button to access the [Start] menu.

2. Tap [Pictures &Videos] and then [Camera].

3. Tap the screen and then the up arrow to configure the various camera settings, if required. For further information, refer to the Trimble Slate Controller documentation.

4. Position the controller to capture the required image and then press the camera button to capture the image.

5. To close the camera, tap the screen and then [X].

6. The image name is automatically entered into the file attribute field. If required, review the image; tap

Browse and then select Review. To save the attributes, tap Store.

Using the TSC3 controller to capture images from the attributes form

1. Enter a feature code with a file attribute and then tap Attrib.

2. Tap the File name attribute field to highlight the field.

3. Tap to capture an image using the internal camera.

4. Tap [Menu] and configure the various camera settings, if required. The zoom factor values that appear depend on the selected resolution. For further information, refer to the TSC3 controller documentation.

5. Position the controller to capture the required image and then press the trigger key (the Enter key on the controller's navigation pad) lightly to focus and then complete the press to capture the image.

6. To close the camera, tap [OK] twice.

7. The image name is automatically entered into the file attribute field. If required, review the image; tap

Browse and then select Review. To save the attributes, tap Store.

Using an instrument with Trimble VISION technology to capture images

Use the instrument to capture images and automatically link them to a File name attribute field. You can do this from the attributes form or from the video screen.

•

You can use the Capture softkey to capture images.

104

•

You can use the Snapshot on measure option in the video screen to measure points and automatically add the image name to the File name attribute field.

Using an instrument with Trimble VISION technology to capture images from the attributes form

1. Connect to the instrument.

2. Enter a feature code with a file attribute and then tap Attrib.

3. Tap the File name attribute field to highlight the field.

4. Tap to capture an image:

♦

If the video screen is not already open, it opens now. Set the appropriate image quality and zoom settings and then capture the image. When the image is captured, tap Store. To return to

♦ the attribute form, tap Esc or Switch to.

If the video screen is open in the background, an image is automatically captured using the current video settings. When the image is captured, tap Store.

5. The image name is automatically entered into the file attribute field. If required, review the image; tap

Browse and then select Review. To save the attributes, tap Store.

Using an instrument with Trimble VISION technology to capture images from the video screen

1. Connect to the instrument.

2. Tap the snapshot options button to set the image properties, if required.

3. Tap Options and make sure that Snapshot on measure is enabled. Set the other options as required and then tap Accept.

4. In the video screen, aim to the target and then tap Measure. Set the feature code and then tap Attrib.

The attributes form appears and the image is automatically captured with the file name entered into the file attribute field.

♦

If there are multiple File name attribute fields, the file name is entered into the highlighted

♦ field.

If there are multiple codes entered for a point, an attribute form will appear for each code with attributes. The image will be captured when the first file attribute field appears.

5. Tap Store to save the attributes and return to the video screen.

Setting the default attributes option

You can configure the General Survey software to use Last used attributes, by default. To do this, tap Options

(available when the attributes appear) and then set the Default attributes field to Last used.

You can configure the General Survey software to use attributes from the Feature library, by default. To do this, tap Options (available when the attributes appear) and then set the Default attributes field to From library.

Note - You must first define the default attributes in the Feature library, or default values will be null.

Using a digital camera to capture images

With some brands of digital camera, you can take images and then wirelessly transfer them to the controller.

When using a feature library with file name attributes you can preview and associate the image files as attributes of a feature code.

105

Sending files from the Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W camera through Bluetooth

The first time you transfer files to a particular controller:

1. Capture the image to be transferred.

2. Press [Playback] to review the image.

3. Press [MENU/OK] to view the Playback Settings Menu [PLBK STGS].

4. Press the down-arrow to access the [FILE SEND] menu.

5. Press the right arrow to view a list of Bluetooth devices available to send the image to. If there are no devices stored on the camera, the following message appears, [ The destination not registered. Search

Destination? ] Select [Yes].

6. Select the controller you want to send the file to and then press [OK].

7. Select [SEND ONE] and then press [OK] to send the image.

8. The file is sent to the controller. If prompted, accept the file on the controller. Files are stored in the

[\My Device\My Documents] folder.

9. The file name is automatically entered into the File name attribute field (if the attribute field has focus when the image appears). If there are multiple File name attribute fields, the file name is entered into the highlighted field. Alternatively, tap Browse and then tap Select file.

After you transfer one file to a controller through the Bluetooth connection, you can use the [Quick Send

Mode] to send files to the same controller.

For optimal file transfer, use the [2 Touch Quick Send Mode]:

1. Capture the image to be transferred.

2. Press [Quick Review].

3. Press [OK] to send the image. The camera connects to the last used Bluetooth device and then sends the image.

4. The file name is automatically entered into the File name attribute field (if the attribute field has focus when the image appears). If there are multiple File name attribute fields, the file name is entered into the highlighted field. Alternatively, tap Browse and then tap Select file.

Note - When [Quick Send Mode] is set to [1Touch], the [Image File Size] setting does not apply and the full-sized image is transferred, making the transfer slower.

Setting up a Wi-Fi connection between the controller and camera

•

For more information, refer to the support note Trimble Handhelds Running Windows Mobile Version

5.0 Software: Connecting a Ricoh Caplio 500SE-W Camera.

Linking media files to a job or a point

To capture an image using a Trimble controller and then link it to the job or point in a job, do the following:

1. Use the controller to capture the image.

106

♦

On a Trimble Slate Controller press the Windows button to access the [Start] menu and then

♦ tap [Pictures &Videos] and then [Camera]

On a Trimble GeoXR, press the camera button

♦

On a TSC3 controller, press (Fn + 1).

Tip - See

Cameras for details on configuring the camera for each controller.

If, when the Media file was configured, you selected the Show with new media file option, the media file screen appears showing a thumbnail of the image. This enables the Link to method to be changed

and, if linking by point name, the point name.

Note: If the Show with new media file option was not selected, the image will be automatically linked.

3. Use the Geotag images option to override, for this image only, the

Media file

configuration for geotagging images.

4. Tap Accept to link the image.

5. The image is now linked according to the setting in the

Link to

option.

Media file configuration

To configure how a media file is linked to the job or point in a job, do the following:

1. From the main menu, select Jobs / Properties of job.

2. Tap the Media file button.

3. From the Link to option, select how the images will be linked. Choose from:

♦

Job - linked to the job

♦

Previous point - linked to the latest point stored

♦

Next point - linked to the next point to be stored

♦

Point name - linked to the point entered in the Point name field

♦

None - the image is saved to the username folder but is not linked to the job or a point

Note - For all options, the media file is always saved to the username folder.

4. Select the Show with new media file option to show the media file screen immediately after capturing an image. This enables the Link to method to be changed and, if linking by point name, the point name.

5. If the Link to option was set to Previous point, Next point, or Point name. you can select Geotag

images. See

Geotagging for further details.

6. Tap Accept.

Copy Between Jobs

You can copy the following items from one job to another job on the controller:

•

Calibration

•

All control points

•

Calibration and control

•

Local transformations

107

•

Points

To do this:

1. Select Jobs / Copy between jobs.

2. Select each of these items:

♦ a job name in the Job to copy from field.

♦ a job name in the Job to copy to field.

♦ the items to be copied in the Copy field.

If you select the Copy duplicate points check box, the option to Overwrite appears.

3. If you want to copy duplicate points, and overwrite and delete the duplicate points in the job you are copying to, select the appropriate check boxes.

4. When the Copy field is set to Points, various point selection options become available in the Select

Point menu. Select the appropriate option.

When copying points between jobs, make sure that the points you are copying use the same coordinate system as the job that the files are being brought into.

When copying Local transformations between jobs, all transformations are copied, and the copied transformations are not editable. To modify or update a copied transformation, update the original transformation and then copy it again.

Note - You can only copy information between jobs that are in the current project folder. If the file(s) you want to copy data between are not available, use Job open to change the current project folder, or use Explorer to copy the file(s) to the current project folder.

To create a new job with all the defaults (including Coordinate System settings) from another job, see Job operations.

108

Key In

Key in Menu

This menu lets you enter data into the General Survey software from the keypad.

You can key in:

(polylines)

Key in - Points

With this function, you can enter coordinates to define a new point:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Points.

2. Enter the point name.

3. Enter the values.

4. Tap Store to calculate or store the point.

To key in the point using a variety of different methods, configure Coordinate view from the Options menu.

When the coordinate view is set to Station and offset or

Grid (local),

additional information is required.

To understand assigning attributes to a point see Using Feature Codes with Predefined Attributes.

To define a new point as a Grid (local):

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Points.

2. Enter the point name.

3. If the Coordinate view is already set to Grid (local) the Transformation field is displayed.

If the Transformation field is not displayed. Tap Options and set the Coordinate view to Grid (local).

4. Select an existing transformation, create a New transformation, or select None to define the transformation later.

5. Enter the values.

6. Tap Store to calculate or store the point.

To enter a point from the map:

109

1. Make sure the current selection is cleared.

2. Tap and hold on the area of the map to which you want to add the point.

3. From the shortcut menu, select Key in point. The Key in / Point screen appears.

4. Complete the fields as required.

Key in - Lines

Use this function to define a new line by one of the following methods:

Two points

Brng-dist from a point

To define a new line by the Two points method:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the Start point (1) and the End point (2). (See the diagram below.) Tap

♦ and hold on the map and select Key in line from the shortcut menu.

Select Key in / Line from the main menu. In the Method field, select Two points. Enter the names of the Start point and the End point.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the line.

4. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

To define a new line by the Brng-dist from a point method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Line.

2. Use

Intersect point and tangents

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the line.

4. In the Method field, select Brng-dist from a point.

5. Enter the name of the Start point (1), the azimuth (2), and the length of line (3). See the diagram below.

6. Specify the Grade between the start and end points.

7. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

110

Key in - Arcs

Use this function to define a new arc by one of the following methods:

Two points and radius

Arc length and radius

Delta angle and radius

Two points and center point

Three points

The following diagram and table explains the terms used to define features of an arc.

1 Center point 6 Back tangent

2 Delta angle 7 Intersection point

3 Radius 8 Tangent length

4 Chord length 9 Forward tangent

5 From point 10 To point

The back tangent value (6) is related to the direction (right in the above diagram) in which the station or chainage increases. For example, when you stand at the intersection point (7) looking in the direction of increasing station or chainage, the forward tangent (9) is in front of you and the back tangent (6) is behind you.

111

The direction field defines whether the arc turns to the left (counterclockwise) or right (clockwise) from the start point (1) to the end point (2). The following diagram shows both a left (3) and right (4) arc.

To define an arc using the Two points and radius method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arcs.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Two points and radius.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the start point (1), the name of the end point (2), and the radius (3) of the arc.

6. Specify the direction of the arc.

7. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

8. If required, select the Store center point check box and then enter a point name for the centre point.

To define an arc using the Arc length and radius method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

softkey to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances and the grade entry method.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Arc length and radius.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the start point (1), the back tangent (2), the radius

(3)and the length of the arc.

6. Specify the direction of the arc and the grade between the start and end points.

7. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

8. If required, select the Store center point check box and then enter a point name for the centre point.

112

To define an arc using the Delta angle and radius method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances and the grade entry method.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Delta angle and radius.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the start point (1), the back tangent (2), the radius

(3) and the turned angle (4) of the arc.

6. Specify the direction of the arc and the grade between the start and end points.

7. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

8. If required, select the Store center point check box and then enter a point name for the centre point.

To define an arc using the Intersect point and tangents method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Intersect point and tangents.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the intersection point (1), the back tangent (2), the forward tangent (3) and the radius (4) of the arc.

6. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

7. If required, select the Store center point check box and then enter a point name for the centre point.

113

To define an arc using the Two points and center point method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Two points and center point.

5. Specify the direction of the arc.

6. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the End point (2), and the

Center point (3) of the arc.

7. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

To define an arc using the Three points method:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Arc.

2. Use

Using the map for common tasks for further details.

to specify ground, grid or sea level distances.

3. Enter the name of the arc.

4. In the Method field, select Three points.

5. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the Point on arc (2), and the

End point (3) of the arc.

6. Enter values for the Start station and the Station interval.

7. If required, select the Store center point check box and then enter a point name for the centre point.

The grade of the arc is determined by the elevations of the arc start and end points.

114

Key in - Alignments

To key in an alignment by a point name range:

1. From the main menu, select Key in / Alignments.

2. To key in a new alignment, enter the point names that define the alignment (if the Key in alignment screen is displayed). If the Select an alignment screen is displayed, tap New to enter the point range.

The following name range techniques are supported:

Enter

1,3,5

1-10

1,3,5-10

1(2)3

1(2,L)3

1(100,L,S)3

Result

Creates a line between points 1 to 3 to 5

Creates lines between all points from 1 through 10

Creates a line between points 1 to 3, to 5, and 5 through 10

Creates an arc between points 1 and 3, through point 2

2 (Radius point), L (left) or R (right)

Creates a Left hand arc between points 1 and 3, with point 2 as the radius point

1 to 3, radius=100, L (left) or R (right), L (large) or S (small)

Creates a Left hand Small arc between points 1 and 3 with a radius of 100

3. To store the alignment, select the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a Code

(if required) and a Start station and Station interval and then tap Store.

Alignments are stored as RXL files. If you save the alignment, you can easily stake it again, view it in the map, and share it with other jobs and with other controllers.

Alignments always have a horizontal component; the vertical component is optional. If an alignment is created using entities that have elevations, the alignment will have a vertical component.

4. To offset an alignment, tap Offset.

5. Enter the offset distance.

To offset to the left, enter a negative value.

6. To store the offset alignment, enable the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a

Code, if required, and then tap Store. The alignment is stored as an RXL file.

7. To store node points at the vertices of the offset alignment, enable the Store points at nodes check box, enter a Start point name, enter a Code, if required, and then tap Store.

An offset alignment will have a vertical component if the vertical geometry of the original alignment is coincident with the horizontal geometry and the vertical geometry consists only of points. The offset vertical geometry cannot include curves. If the vertical geometry of an alignment cannot be offset, only the horizontal component will exist in the offset alignment. You cannot offset an alignment that includes transitions.

Tip - You can also define the horizontal component (and vertical component if the line work has elevations), from features (points, lines, and arcs), in a file. To do this:

115

1. From the map, tap the Layers softkey, select the file and then make active the appropriate layer(s) that will be used to define the horizontal component.

2. Select the feature. See

3. From the tap and hold menu, select Key in alignment.

4. Select Store alignment and then enter a name, start station, and station interval.

5. Tap Store.

For more information, see:

•

Stakeout - alignments (polylines)

Key in - Notes

You can enter a note in the General Survey database at any time. To do this:

1. To access the Key in note screen, do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Key in / Notes.

♦

Tap Favorites / Key in note.

♦

On the controller keyboard, press CTRL + N.

2. Type in the details to be recorded. Alternatively tap T/Stamp to generate a record of the current time.

3. To store the note do one of the following:

♦

Tap Store to store the note in the database.

♦

Tap to attach the note to the previous observation.

♦

Tap to attach the note to the next observation to be stored.

Note - When you use , the note is only stored with the next observation if another observation is stored during the current survey. If the survey is ended without storing another observation the note is discarded.

4. To exit Key in notes, tap Esc. Alternatively, if the Note form is empty, tap Store.

In Review, tap Note to add a note to the current record.

In Point manager, scroll to the right and tap in the Note field to add a note to the point record.

116

Cogo

Cogo Menu

This menu lets you carry out Coordinate Geometry (Cogo) functions. You can use the menu options to calculate distances, azimuths, and point positions by various methods.

For some calculations, you must define a projection, or select a Scale factor-only coordinate system.

You can display ellipsoid, grid, or ground distances by changing the Distances field in the

Cogo settings

screen.

To perform Cogo calculations in a No projection / No datum coordinate system, set the Distances field to

For more information, see:

117

Cogo - Compute Inverse

To calculate the azimuth, horizontal, vertical, and slope distances between two existing points:

1. From the map, select the From point (1) and To point (2), as shown in the diagram below.

2. Tap and hold on the map and select Compute inverse from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, select

Cogo / Compute inverse from the main menu.

3. The azimuth (3), horizontal distance (4), change in elevation, slope distance and grade are shown.

Cogo - Compute Point

Use this Cogo function to calculate the coordinates of an intersection point from one or more points, a line, or an arc. You can store the results in the database.

Use Options to specify ground, grid, or sea level distances.

Warning - In general, do not compute points and then change the coordinate system or perform a calibration.

If you do, these points will be inconsistent with the new coordinate system. An exception to this is points computed using the Brng-dist from a point method.

Calculate coordinates using one of the following methods:

Brng-dist from a point

Turned angle and distance

Brng-dist intersect

Brng-brng intersect

Dist-dist intersect

118

Four point intersection

From a baseline

Vertical plane and angle

Project point to line

Project point to arc

Notes

•

When entering an existing point name you can select from the list, perform a fast fix or measure a

• point. Fast fix stores an automatic rapid point with a temporary point name.

If the measured points were measured using GNSS, the coordinates of the point can only be displayed

• as grid values if a projection and a datum transformation are defined.

For all methods when the point is stored use the Store as field to specify if the calculated point is to be

• stored as WGS84, Local or Grid coordinates values.

You can compute an azimuth from two points in the database directly in an azimuth field. To do this, enter the point names in the Azimuth field, separated by a hyphen. For example, to compute the azimuth from point 2 to point 3, enter "2-3". This method works with most alphanumeric point

• names, but it does not support point names that already contain a hyphen.

If you use the Four point intersection method or the From a baseline method and then change the antenna height record for one of the source points, the coordinates of the point will not be updated.

Tip - You can compute a distance between two points in the database directly in a distance field. To do this, enter the point names in the distance field, separated by a hyphen. For example, to compute the distance between points 2 and 3, enter "2-3". This method works with most alphanumeric point names, but it does not support point names that already contain a hyphen.

Brng-dist from a point

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Brng-dist from a point method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Bearing and distance.

4. In the Start point field, use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) to select either a Radial or Sequential measurement method. When Sequential is selected the Start point field is automatically updated to the last stored intersection point (see diagrams below).

5. Set the Azimuth origin to either Grid 0°, True, Magnetic, or Sun (GNSS only).

6. As shown in the diagrams below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the azimuth (2) and the horizontal distance (3).

7. Tap Calc to calculate the intersection point (4).

8. Store the point in the database.

119

To compute the misclosure of a loop of points:

1. Give the last point the same name as the first start point.

2. Tap Calc for the point coordinates.

When you tap Store, the loop misclosure appears on the screen. Store the last point as a check to avoid overwriting the first point.

Turned angle and distance

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the turned angle and distance method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Turned angle and distance.

4. In the Start point field, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ), then select either a Radial or Sequential measurement method. When Sequential is selected, the Start point name automatically updates to the last stored intersection point (see diagrams below).

5. In the End point field, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ), then select either an Azimuth or End

point to define a reference orientation.

When using the sequential method, the reference orientation for new points moving forward is the computed reverse azimuth from the previous turned angle.

6. As shown in the diagrams below, enter the name of the Start point (1), the azimuth (2) and the horizontal distance (3).

7. Tap Calc to calculate the intersection point (4).

8. Store the point in the database.

120

Brng-dist intersect

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Brng-dist intersect method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Brng-dist intersection.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of Point 1 (1), the azimuth (2), the name of Point 2

(3) and the horizontal distance (4).

5. Tap Calc.

6. There are two solutions (5,6) for this calculation; tap Other to see the second solution.

7. Store the point in the database.

Brng-brng intersect

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Brng-brng intersect method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Brng-brng intersect.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of Point 1 (1), the azimuth from point one (2), the name of Point 2 (3), and the azimuth from point two (4).

5. Tap Calc to calculate the intersection point (5).

121

6. Store the point in the database

Dist-dist intersect

To calculate the coordinates of an intersection using the Dist-dist intersect method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Dist-dist intersect.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of Point 1 (1), the horizontal distance (2), the name of

Point 2 (3) and the horizontal distance (4).

5. Tap Calc.

6. There are two solutions (5,6) for this calculation; tap Other to see the second solution.

7. Store the point in the database.

To create a point using the Four point intersection method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Four point intersection.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the start point of line 1 (1), the end point of line 1

(2), the start point of line 2 (3) and the end point of line 2 (4).

5. Enter any change in the vertical position as a vertical distance from the end of line 2.

6. To calculate the offset point (5), tap Calc.

122

Note - The two lines do not have to intersect, but they must converge at some point, as shown below.

To create a point using the From a baseline method:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select From a baseline.

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the start point (1) and the end point (2) of the baseline.

5. Enter a Distance and select the Distance direction method (5, 6, 7, or 8).

6. Enter the offset distance and select the Offset direction (3 or 4).

7. Enter the vertical distance.

Note - The vertical distance is dependent on the Distance direction. If the direction is relative to the start point, the elevation of the computed point is the elevation of the start point plus the vertical distance. Similarly, if the direction is relative to the end point, the elevation of the computed point is the elevation of the end point plus the vertical distance.

8. To calculate the offset point (9), tap Calc.

To calculate the coordinates of a point using the Vertical plane and angle method:

This method is available only after you carry out a station setup,

station setup plus, a

resection, or a

refline.

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Vertical plane and angle.

123

4. As shown in the diagram below, enter the names of the points (1) and (2) that define the vertical plane, for example, the side of a building. Name and measure new points, or enter the names of existing points.

5. Tap Meas HA VA to measure the angle from the instrument (3) to the required point (4).

The intersection of the vertical plane and the measured angle is used to calculate coordinates for the required point.

6. Tap Store to store the point in the database.

Project point to line

To compute a point at a position along a line that is perpendicular to another point:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Project point to line.

4. Enter the Point to project (1).

5. Enter the Line name (2) or enter the Start point and End point to define the line.

6. Tap Calc.

The following details appear: The coordinates of the point (5), the horizontal distance along the line

(3), and the horizontal distance from the line (4).

7. Tap Store to store the point in the database.

Project point to arc

To compute a point at a position along an arc that is perpendicular to another point:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute point.

2. Enter a Point name.

3. In the Method field, select Project point to arc.

4. Enter the Point to project (1).

5. Enter the Arc name or key in a new arc.

124

6. Tap Calc.

The following details appear: The coordinates of the point (5), the horizontal distance along the arc

(3), and horizontal distance from the arc (4).

7. Tap Store to store the point in the database.

Cogo - Area calculations

Area calculations is a graphical utility that enables you to compute an area and then to subdivide that computed area. When subdividing areas, new intersection point(s) are computed and stored.

The following methods can be used to subdivide the area:

•

Parallel line

•

Hinge point

The easiest way to define the area to be computed and subdivided is to tap and hold the Area calculations option from the Map. You can then use the following entities:

• points, lines, and arcs from the current job

• points, lines, arcs, and polylines from active map files

• points from a linked job, CSV and TXT files

• a combination of the above

Note - You can also start Area calculations from the Cogo menu. However, you can then only use points to define the area.

When you select entities to define the area, you must select them in the correct order.

When you select lines, arcs, or polylines, you must select them in the correct direction.

To compute and then subdivide an area enclosed by points displayed in the map:

1. From the map, select the points on the perimeter of the area to be calculated. Use the order that they occur on the perimeter.

2. Tap and hold on the map and then select Area calculations from the menu.

The computed area and the perimeter appear. The arrows on the lines indicate the order in which the points were selected.

Note - The computed area varies according to the

Distance display setting.

125

3. Do one of the following:

♦

To store the area, enter a name, if required, and then tap Store. The area is saved and you exit

♦

Area calculations.

To subdivide the area: a. Tap the subdivide method - Parallel or Hinge. b. Enter the New area to subdivide from the total area.

c. If you use the Parallel method, tap the line that defines the parallel line.

If you use the Hinge method, tap the point that defines the hinge point.

The New area that you entered is shaded blue. New points are displayed with a red circle, and labeled Pt1, Pt2, and so on.

d. If the subdivided area you require is the complement of the area displayed, tap the

Swap area button to switch areas.

e. Tap Continue. f. To store the intersection point(s), enter their name(s) and then tap Save.

If you do not want to save the intersection point(s), do not name them.

g. Tap Close.

To see details about the original area and perimeter, new area and perimeter, new intersection points, and an image of the area, go to Review job.

The following figure shows an example of a subdivided area using the Hinge method.

Notes

•

In area calculations, you can use polylines from a DXF file, but you cannot use General Survey

• alignments or roads.

If lines intersect or cross over, the General Survey software attempts to compute the correct area and subdivide the area, but in some cases may give the wrong results.

Make sure that the graphical image looks correct and then double-check the results if you have

• concerns that they may not be correct.

For details on how the area is computed, see

Area Calculations.

Cogo - Compute Volume

You can use Compute Volume to calculate volumes from surfaces stored in Triangulated Terrain Model

(*.ttm) files. Import the *.ttm files from your office software or generate them using the

Create surface

option

126

from the map in General Survey. The following volume calculation methods are available:

Above an elevation

Calculates the volume of a single surface above the specified elevation. Only the cut volume is computed.

Haul bulkage can be applied if necessary.

Void volume

Calculates the volume of material needed to fill a surface up to a specified elevation. Shrinkage can be applied if necessary.

Surface to elevation

Calculates the cut and fill volumes between a single surface and a specified elevation. Where the surface is below the elevation, fill will be computed; where the surface is above the elevation, cut will be computed.

Haul bulkage and/or shrinkage can be applied if necessary.

Surface to surface

Calculates the cut and fill volumes between two surfaces. The Initial surface, is the original surface and Final

surface is the design surface or surface after excavation. Where the Initial surface is above the Final surface cut will be computed; where the Initial surface is below the Final surface, fill will be computed. Haul bulkage and/or shrinkage can be applied if necessary.

Note - Volumes will be computed only in areas where the initial and final surfaces overlap.

Stockpile/depression

This works in a similar way to Surface to surface except with only one surface. The selected surface is treated as the final surface and the initial surface is defined from the perimeter points of the selected surface. Where the surface is above the perimeter surface, cut will be computed (stockpile); where the surface falls below the perimeter surface, fill will be computed (depression). Haul bulkage and/or shrinkage can be applied if necessary.

Surface area

127

Calculates a volume defined by a single surface and a specified material depth.

Tip - The surface area is also displayed.

Haul Bulkage

A haul bulkage factor allows for the expansion of cut material as it is excavated. Haul bulkage is defined as a percentage. The Adjusted cut volume is the cut volume with the haul bulkage factor applied to it.

Shrinkage

A shrinkage factor allows for compaction in fill material. Shrinkage is defined as a percentage. The Adjusted fill volume is the fill volume with the shrinkage factor applied to it.

Cogo - Compute Azimuth

You can use keyed-in data, and points stored in the database, to calculate an azimuth by various methods.

You can also store the results in the database. For some methods, you have to tap Calc to display the results.

The data that you enter can have different units. For example, you can add an angle in degrees to an angle in radians - the answer is returned in whatever format you specified in the job configuration.

Calculate an azimuth using one of the following methods:

Azimuth to line offset

Between two points

To calculate the azimuth between two points:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Between two points.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the name of the From point (1) and the To point (2).

4. The azimuth between them (3) is calculated.

128

Tip - You can compute an azimuth from two points in the database directly in an azimuth field. To do this, enter the point names in the Azimuth field, separated by a hyphen. For example, to compute the azimuth from point 2 to point 3, enter "2-3". This method works with most alphanumeric point names, but it does not support point names that already contain a hyphen.

Bisected azimuths

To calculate bisected azimuths:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Bisected azimuths.

3. As shown below, enter values for Azimuth 1 (1), and Azimuth 2 (2).

The following calculations appear: The computed azimuth halfway between them (3), and the computed angle, measured clockwise between azimuth 1, and azimuth 2.

Bisected corner

To calculate a bisected corner azimuth:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Bisected corner.

3. As shown below, enter the names of the Side point 1 (1), the Corner point (2), and Side point 2 (3).

The following calculations appear: The computed azimuth (4), halfway between Side point 1 and Side point 2, from the Corner point, and the computed angle, measured clockwise between points 1, 2, and

129

Azimuth plus angle

To calculate the azimuth plus angle:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Azimuth plus angle.

3. As shown in the diagram below, enter the Azimuth (1) and the Turned angle (2).

4. The sum of the two (3) is calculated.

Azimuth to line offset

To calculate the azimuth to line offset:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Compute azimuth.

2. In the Method field, select Azimuth to line offset.

3. As shown below, enter the name of the line (1), the station (2) and the horizontal offset (3).

The following calculations appear: The computed azimuth (4), from the start point of the line to the offset point, and the computed angle, measured clockwise between the line (1), and the Azimuth (4).

Tip - If the line does not already exist, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then select Two points.

You can then enter the start point and end point to define the line.

130

Cogo - Compute Average

Use the Compute average option to compute and store the average position for a point that has been measured more than once.

Two or more angles only observations from two different known points can be 'averaged' to compute the coordinates of the intersection point. To 'average' the observations they must be stored with the same point name.

Enter the name of the point to compute the average position for into the Point name field. You can select the point name from a list using the

pop-up menu for the field.

If the point you entered has only one position fix, or has been stored as a control point, then an error message appears to tell you that an average position cannot be computed.

Once you enter a point name for which an average position can be computed, General Survey searches the database to find all the positions for that point. Once computed, the average point grid position appears, along with the standard errors for each ordinate.

If there are more than two positions for the point, a Details softkey appears. Tap Details to view the residuals from the average position to each individual position. You can use this residuals form to include or exclude specific positions from the average computation.

Tap Options to select the averaging method. Two methods are supported:

•

Weighted

•

Unweighted

Tip - General Survey averages all positions in the current job database with the same name (except Control points). Tap Details to ensure that only the required positions are averaged.

To store the computed average position for the point, tap Store. If an averaged position for the point already exists in the database, the existing point is automatically deleted when the new average position is stored.

Notes

•

An averaged position is not automatically updated if the positions used to compute the average are changed. For example, if the calibration is updated, if observations are transformed or deleted, or if

• new observations of the same name are added, re-compute the averaged position.

Averaging uses Least squares to average points/observations in the current job that have the same name.

♦

If the average includes anything other than ECEF or WGS84 positions, the average is stored

♦ as a grid.

GNSS observations and conventional observations that include a measured slope distance are resolved to grid and then averaged using Least squares. The intersections of angles only

♦ conventional observations are averaged using Least squares.

Conventional angle-only observations are only added to the solution if there are no other

131

♦ positions or observations.

When the average includes only ECEF or WGS84 positions, the averaged grid position is converted back to WGS84 and stored as a WGS84. When the average contains only grid positions and conventional observations, or a mixture of position types, then the averaged grid position is stored as a grid.

•

Any Mean Turned Angle (MTA) observed to the point is ignored and the original observations are

• used to compute the average position.

If Weighted is selected, points in an average are weighted as follows:

♦

GNSS positions use the horizontal and vertical precisions of the observations. Observations that do not have precisions, and keyed-in points, use 10 mm for horizontal and 20 mm for

♦ vertical.

For conventional observations that include a measured slope distance, horizontal and vertical standard errors are computed based on the standard errors of the components of the observation.

The standard error used for weighting the horizontal position is a combination of those used for the horizontal direction and horizontal distance weights from the resection calculation. For more information, see [Resection Computations] at www.trimble.com.

•

To automatically average duplicate points, enable Auto average in the

Duplicate point tolerance

section of the survey style.

Arc Solutions

Use arc solutions to:

•

Calculate

arc solutions when two parts of the arc are known, and to view the results as both text and

• graphics.

Compute

points on the arc.

•

Add

the arc, and the points defining the arc, to the database.

Calculate arc solutions

Use the two Method fields to set the entry type for the arc values you have.

The first known part of the arc is defined by one of the following:

•

Radius - is the radius of the arc.

•

Delta - is the delta or deflection angle.

•

Degree arc - is the deflection angle (delta) that results in an arc length of 100 units.

•

Degree chord - is the deflection angle (delta) that results in a chord length of 100 units.

The second known part of the arc is defined by one of the following:

•

Delta - is the delta or deflection angle.

•

Length - is the arc length.

•

Chord - is the chord length.

132

•

Tangent - is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

•

External - is the shortest distance between the Point of Intersection (PI) and the arc.

•

Mid ordinate - is the distance between the arc and the chord at the mid point of the arc.

Results

Tap Calc to view the results for the horizontal arc, and a graphical view of the arc.

Entered data appears as black text; computed data appears as red text.

See the following figure for details on the values that are computed for an arc.

•

Radius - is the radius of the arc.

•

Arc length - is the arc length.

•

Chord length - is the chord length.

•

Degree arc - is the deflection angle (delta) that results in an arc length of 100 units.

•

Degree chord - is the deflection angle (delta) that results in a chord length of 100 units.

•

Delta - is the delta or deflection angle.

•

Tangent - is the distance from the PC or PT to the PI.

•

External - is the minimum distance between the PI and the arc.

•

Mid ordinate - is the distance between the arc and the chord at the mid point of the arc.

•

Segment area - is the area between the arc and the chord.

•

Sector area - is the area between the arc and the two edge radii.

•

Fillet area - is the area between the arc and the tangents.

Compute points on the arc

133

Tap Layout to compute points on the arc at any station along the arc.

You can select from the following methods:

•

•

•

•

PC deflection

Provides the deflection angle and distance to each specified station on the arc as if you are occupying the PC point and backsighting the PI point.

Tap Calc to view the computed arc with these additional details:

♦

Station - is the specified station along the arc.

♦

Deflection - is the deflection angle from the tangent line (PC point to PI point) to the current

♦ station point on the arc.

Chord - is the distance to the current station point on the arc from the PC point.

♦

Previous station - is the previously specified PC deflection station.

This is available only if the immediately previous point was computed using the PC

♦ deflection method.

Short chord - is the chord distance from the current PC deflection point on the arc to the previous PC deflection point on the arc.

This is available only if the immediately previous point was computed using the PC deflection method.

PI deflection

Provides the deflection angle and distance to each specified station on the arc as if you are occupying

134

the PI point and backsighting the PC point.

Tap Calc to view the computed arc with these additional details:

♦

Station - is the specified station along the arc.

♦

Deflection - the deflection angle from the incoming tangent line to the current station point

♦ on the arc.

PI to station - the distance to the current station point on the arc from the PI point.

Tangent offset

Provides the perpendicular offset information from the tangent line (the line from the PC point to the

PI point) to each specified station on the arc.

Tap Calc to view the computed arc with these additional details:

♦

Station - is the specified station along the arc.

♦

Tangent dist (TD) - is the distance along the tangent line from the PC point toward the PI

♦ point where the perpendicular offset to the arc point occurs.

Tangent offset - is the perpendicular offset distance from the tangent line to the current

♦ station point on the arc.

Tangent - is the length of the tangent line (the distance from the PC point to the PI point).

♦

Tangent - TD - is the remainder distance along the tangent line (the distance from the point of the perpendicular offset to the PI point).

135

Chord offset

Provides the perpendicular offset information from the long chord (the line from the PC point to the

PT point) to each specified station on the arc. The PC deflection information is also provided.

Tap Calc to view the computed arc with these additional details:

♦

Station - is the specified station along the arc.

♦

Chord dist - is the distance along the long chord from the PC point (toward the PT point)

♦ where the perpendicular offset to the arc point occurs.

Chord offset - is the perpendicular offset distance from the long chord to the current station

♦ point on the arc.

PC Deflection - is the deflection angle from the tangent line (PC point to PI point) to the

♦ current station point on the arc.

Chord length - is the distance to the current station point on the arc from the PC point.

136

When viewing any of the arc or layout computation results, tap Store to save the results in the current job.

To remove the Layout fields from the screen, tap Arc.

Add the arc and the points defining the arc

Tap Add to add to the database the:

Note - Before you can add these to the database, you must select a start point for the arc, a back tangent, and the back tangent direction.

• calculated arc

• point defining the end point of the arc

• point defining the center point of the arc

Triangle Solutions

You can use keyed-in data to calculate a triangle by various methods. You can then view the results as both text and graphics, and store the results in the database.

Calculate a triangle using one of the following methods:

Side-Side-Side

137

Define a triangle by entering the distances for sides a, b, and c. Tap Calc to view the results.

Angle-Side-Angle

Define a triangle by entering angle A, the distance for side b, and angle C. Tap Calc to view the results.

Side-Angle-Angle

Define a triangle by entering the distance for side a, angle B, and angle A. Tap Calc to view the results.

Side-Angle-Side

Define a triangle by entering the distance for side a, angle B, and the distance for side c. Tap Calc to view the results.

Side-Side-Angle

Define a triangle by entering the distances for sides a and b, and angle A. Tap Calc to view the results.

Results

Tap Calc to view the results including the lengths of sides a, b, and c, the angles of A, B, and C, the area of the triangle, and a graphical view of the triangle.

Entered data appears as black text; computed data appears as red text.

In some situations, there may be two solutions to a triangle. When this occurs, an Other softkey is available in the result screen. Tap Other to toggle between the two possible solutions so that you can select the correct one. Tap Store to record the triangle results in the current job.

Cogo - Subdivide a line

Use this function to subdivide a line into segments. The points created are automatically stored in the database and the point names are automatically incremented from the Start point name.

You can predefine the code of a subdivided point. For more information, see

Subdivide Pts Code.

138

Subdivide a line using one of the following methods:

Fixed segment length

Fixed number of segments

Tip - If the line does not already exist, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then select Two points. You can then enter the start point and end point to define the line.

Fixed segment length

To subdivide a line into segments of fixed length:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be subdivided (1). Tap and hold on the screen and then select

♦ the Subdivide a line option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide a line. Enter the name of the defined line.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed segment length.

3. Enter the segment length (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the line.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

Fixed number of segments

To subdivide a line into a fixed number of segments:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the line to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and then select the

♦

Subdivide a line option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide a line. Enter the name of the defined line.

1. In the Method field, select Fixed number of segments.

2. Enter the number of segments, and any horizontal offset (2) and vertical offset from the line.

3. Enter the names of the Start at station (3), the End at station (4), and the Start point name.

4. Tap Start to calculate the new points (3, 5, 4, or 6, 7, 8).

139

Cogo - Subdivide an arc

Use this function to subdivide an arc using one of the following methods:

Fixed segment length

Fixed number of segments

Fixed chord length

Fixed angle subtended

The points created are automatically stored in the database and the point names are incremented from the Start point name.

You can predefine the code of a subdivided point. For more information, see

Subdivide Pts Code.

Fixed segment length

To subdivide an arc into segments of fixed length:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc . Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed number of segments.

3. Enter the segment length (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

140

Fixed number of segments

To subdivide an arc into a fixed number of segments:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc . Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed number of segments.

3. Enter the number of segments, and any horizontal offset (2) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (3), the End at station (4), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (3, 5, 4, or 6, 7, 8).

Fixed chord length

To subdivide an arc into segments of fixed chord length:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc . Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed chord length.

3. Enter the chord length (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

Fixed angle subtended

To subdivide an arc into fixed angle subtended segments:

1. Do one of the following:

141

♦

From the map, select the arc to be subdivided. Tap and hold on the screen and select the

♦

Subdivide an arc option from the shortcut menu.

From the main menu, select Cogo / Subdivide an arc. Enter the name of the defined arc.

2. In the Method field, select Fixed angle subtended.

3. Enter the Angle subtended (2), and any horizontal offset (3) and vertical offset from the arc.

4. Enter the names of the Start at station (4), the End at station (5), and the Start point name.

5. Tap Start to calculate the new points (4, 6, 7, or 8, 9, 10).

Cogo - Transformations

Use this Cogo function to do one of the following:

•

Transform a single point, or a selection of points, using one or a combination of Rotation ,

Scale,

•

Translations.

Create or edit a Local transformation

that can be applied to Grid (local) points to transform the Grid

(local) points to Grid points.

Note - Local transformation support is available only when the

Advanced geodetic option is enabled.

Rotate, Scale, and Translate points

Rotate, Scale, and Translate changes the stored coordinates of the points that are transformed. This method saves new transformed points and then deletes the original points.

When performing more than one transformation, the order is always Rotate, Scale, then Translate.

Rotate

To rotate a selection of points about a specified origin point:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Transformations.

2. Select Rotate / scale / translate points and then tap Next.

3. Set the Rotate check box, then tap Next.

4. Enter an Origin point.

5. Enter a Rotation.

6. Tap Next and then select the point(s) to rotate.

7. To store the transformed point(s) to the database, tap Accept.

142

A transformation deletes the original point(s) and stores new grid points of the same name.

Scale

To scale the distances between the origin point and the selected points:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Transformations.

2. Select Rotate / scale / translate points and then tap Next.

3. Set the Scale check box, then tap Next.

4. Enter an Origin point.

5. Enter a Scale factor.

6. Tap Next, then select the point(s) to scale.

7. To store the transformed point(s) to the database, tap Accept.

A transformation deletes the original point(s) and stores new grid points of the same name.

Translate

To move a selection of points on a grid surface:

1. From the main menu, select Cogo / Transformations.

2. Select Rotate / scale / translate points and then tap Next.

3. Set the Translate check box, then tap Next.

4. In the Method field, select either Deltas or Two points.

If you choose Deltas:

1. Enter a delta Northing, Easting, and/or Elevation. You can select a single delta, for example a

Northing, or any combination of deltas for the transformation.

If you choose Two points:

1. Select a From point.

2. Select a To point.

5. Tap Next, then select the point(s) to transform.

6. To store the transformed point(s) to the database, tap Accept.

A transformation deletes the original point(s) and stores new grid points of the same name.

Notes

•

Only points that can be displayed as grid coordinates can be transformed.

•

When transforming by both rotate and scale, the origin for the scale defaults to the origin for the

• rotate. You can change this.

When entering a point name, you can select from the list, key in a point, perform a fast fix, measure a point, or make a map selection. Fast fix stores an automatic rapid point with a temporary point name.

Warning - If you select a base point to be transformed, then vectors flowing from this base become null.

143

Local Transformations

There are often occasions in surveying where existing points to be tied into or staked out have grid coordinates defined in one or more coordinate or reference systems, which are different from the current job's coordinate system. These other coordinate or reference systems may be defined based on old base lines where the coordinates are effectively station and offset values from the base (reference) line. Or they may be referenced to a completely arbitrary reference system. For example, an architect may provide coordinates for a building foundation that needs to be positioned and transferred into a real coordinate system on site.

General Survey lets you compute and store one or more local transformations that will transform on-the-fly between the grid coordinates and sets of local grid coordinates.

Unlike Rotate, Scale, and Translate, the position of transformed points is not changed. Instead, points can be created as Grid (local), and a relationship to Grid is defined that provides the transformation to the local coordinate system.

Note - Grid (local) points cannot be displayed in the map if a transformation to grid has not been defined.

There are three types of local grid transformations that can be created and used throughout General Survey:

•

Line transformations

•

Helmert transformations

•

Seven parameter transformations

Note - Local transformation support is available only when the

Advanced geodetic option is enabled.

Line transformations

The Line transformation type is a 2D transformation that allows you to select or key in two database grid points and match them up with the local grid coordinates for the same positions.

To create a Line transformation:

1. From the main menu, tap Cogo / Transformations / Manage &define transformations and then tap Next.

2. Select Create new transformation, and then tap Next.

3. Set the Transformation type to Line and then enter the Transformation name.

4. In the Start point field, enter the name of the point and then enter the corresponding Grid

(local) coordinates in the North (local) and East (local) fields.

5. In the End point field, enter the name of the point and then enter the corresponding Grid

(local) coordinates in the North (local) and East (local) fields.

6. Tap Calc, check the computed transformation distances and then select a Scale factor type to fit the local grid positions to the database grid positions:

◊

Free - The computed scale factor is applied to the Grid (local) values in both local

◊ axes.

Fixed to 1.0 - No scaling is applied. (The Grid (local) values are used in the transformation with no scaling applied to them.)

The start point is the origin point of the transformation.

144

◊

Along the local northing axis only - The computed scale factor is applied to the Grid

(local) northing values only during the transformation.

7. Tap Store to store the transformation to the current job.

The line transformation appears in the map as a black dashed line between the start grid point and the end grid point.

Use

Filter to enable and disable the display of line transformations.

Notes

♦

'Grid points' do not have to be stored as grid points, but General Survey needs to be able to compute grid coordinates for the point.

Helmert transformations

The Helmert transformation type can be a 2D or 3D transformation that allows you to select up to 20 identical point pairs to compute a best fit transformation between the database grid points and the local grid coordinates for the same positions.

To create a Helmert transformation:

Notes

1. From the main menu, tap Cogo / Transformations / Manage &define transformations and then tap Next.

2. Select Create new transformation and then tap Next.

3. Set the Transformation type to Helmert and then enter the Transformation name.

4. Set the Scale factor type to one of the following:

◊

Free - The computed best fit scale factor is used in the transformation.

◊

Fixed, and then enter the Scale factor - Specify your own scale factor to be used in the transformation.

5. Set the Vertical adjustment to one of the following and then tap Next:

◊

None - No vertical adjustment is carried out.

◊

Constant adjustment only - The average vertical correction computed from the

◊ elevations of the point pairs is used for vertical adjustment in the transformation.

Inclined plane - A vertical correction plus a best fit correction plane is used for vertical adjustment in the transformation.

6. Tap Add to select the Grid point name and Local grid point name pairs of points and then set the Use field to one of the following:

◊

Off - Do not use this point pair in the computation of the transformation parameters.

◊

Vertical only - Use this point pair only in the computation of the vertical adjustment

◊ parameters.

Horizontal only - Use this point pair only in the computation of the horizontal

◊ adjustment parameters.

Horizontal &vertical - Use this point pair in the computation of both the horizontal and the vertical adjustment parameters.

7. Tap Accept to add the pair to the list and then tap Add again to add more pairs of points.

8. Tap Results to see the Helmert transformation results.

9. Tap Store to store the transformation to the current job.

145

♦

To edit a transformation, follow the steps to create a new transformation, but at step 2, select

Select transformation to edit, select the required transformation from the list, tap Next, update the transformation parameters as required, check the results and then tap Store to overwrite

♦ the previous transformation.

If you change a transformation, the position of all points using that transformation also

♦ changes.

If you change the coordinates of a point used to define a Helmert transformation, General

♦

Survey does not automatically recompute the transformation.

If you change the coordinates of a point, and then recompute the Helmert transformation the new transformation uses the new coordinates.

Seven parameter transformations

The Seven parameter transformation type is a 3D transformation that allows you to select up to 20 identical point pairs to compute a best fit transformation between the database grid points and the local grid coordinates for the same positions.

A seven parameter transformation will provide a better solution than a Helmert transformation if the two coordinate systems are not defined with respect to the same horizontal plane.

To create a seven parameter transformation:

1. From the main menu, tap Cogo / Transformations / Manage &define transformations and then tap Next.

2. Select Create new transformation and then tap Next.

3. Set the Transformation type to Seven parameter and then enter the Transformation name.

4. Tap Add to select the Grid point name and Local grid point name pairs of points and then set the Use field to one of the following:

◊

Off - Do not use this point pair in the computation of the transformation parameters.

◊

Horizontal &vertical - Use this point pair in the computation of the adjustment parameters.

5. Tap Accept to add the pair to the list and then tap Add again to add more pairs of points.

6. Residuals will only start to be displayed once 3 point pairs have been defined.

7. Tap Results to see the Seven parameter transformation results.

8. Tap Store to store the transformation to the current job.

Notes

♦

The Seven parameter transformation is a three dimensional transformation only. You cannot

♦ use 1D or 2D points in the point pairs used to compute the transformation parameters.

If a Seven parameter transformation is applied to 1D or 2D Grid, or Grid (local) point, the

♦ transformed position will have null coordinates.

To edit a transformation, follow the steps to create a new transformation, but at step 2, select

Select transformation to edit, select the required transformation from the list, tap Next, update the transformation parameters as required, check the results and then tap Store to overwrite

♦ the previous transformation.

If you change a transformation, the position of all points using that transformation also changes.

146

♦

If you change the coordinates of a point used to define a Seven parameter transformation,

♦

General Survey does not automatically recompute the transformation.

If you change the coordinates of a point, and then recompute the Seven parameter transformation the new transformation uses the new coordinates.

A point stored as a Grid (local) can only ever have one 'input' transformation that defines the relationship to database Grid positions. However, when viewing with Review job or Point manager, and when exporting as

Grid (local), you can select a different local transformation, which changes the displayed computed Grid

(local) coordinates.

This powerful function enables you to, for example, key in a Grid (local) point referenced to one baseline or reference system, and transform to the database grid, and then, if required, use another 'display' transformation to display the point with computed Grid (local) values referenced to a different baseline or reference system.

This is analogous to how any point can be displayed as station and offset to any line, arc, alignment, or road.

Notes

•

Use

Cogo / Transformations / Manage/define local transformations to create or edit transformations.

•

Use

Point manager

to select a different input transformation.

•

Use

Jobs / Copy between jobs to copy transformations to other jobs.

Transformations can be applied and used in a number of places throughout the General Survey software:

•

Key in points

•

Linked files

•

Stakeout points

from a linked CSV or TXT file

•

Review job

•

Point manager

•

Import fixed format files from a comma delimited file

•

Export Grid (local)

Cogo - Traverse

Use this function to calculate a traverse misclosure, and adjust a conventional traverse. The software helps you select the points to be used, calculates the misclosure, and then lets you compute either a Compass or

Transit adjustment.

Note - The Compass adjustment is sometimes known as the Bowditch adjustment.

You can calculate closed-loop traverses and closed traverses that start and end on pairs of known points.

To calculate a traverse:

1. Enter the Traverse name.

2. In the Start station field, tap List.

3. Select a point from the list of valid traverse points that can be used as the start station. Tap Enter.

147

A valid start station has one or more backsights and one or more observations to the next traverse station.

4. Tap Add to add the next point in the traverse.

5. Select the next station in the traverse.

A valid traverse station has one or more backsight observations to the previous traverse station, and one or more observations to the next traverse station. When there is only one valid traverse station, it is added automatically.

Note - To view the observed azimuth and distance between two points in the list, highlight the first point and tap the Info softkey.

6. Repeat steps 4 and 5 until all points in the traverse have been added.

A valid end station has one or more backsights, and one or more observations to the previous traverse station.

If you need to remove any points from the list, highlight the point and tap Delete. When you delete a point, all points after it are deleted as well.

7. Tap Close to compute the traverse misclosure.

Note - You cannot add more points after selecting a control point, or a station with more than one backsight.

Note - To compute a traverse closure, there must be at least one distance measurement between successive points in the traverse list.

Note - The Azimuth fields do not have to be completed.

If the backsight azimuth is null:

♦ the traverse cannot be oriented.

♦ adjusted coordinates cannot be stored.

♦ an angular adjustment cannot be computed on an open traverse. (A distance adjustment can be computed.)

If the foresight azimuth is null in a loop traverse, and if all angles have been observed, you can compute an angular and distance adjustment.

The backsight and foresight points that provide the orientation for the traverse are shown.

If necessary, tap Enter to edit the fields as follows:

1. Inspect the results of the traverse and do one of the following:

♦

To store the closure results, tap Store.

♦

To adjust the traverse, go to the next step.

148

2. Tap Options to check the traverse settings. Make any changes as required, then tap Enter.

3. Tap Adj. Ang. to adjust the angular misclosure. The angular misclosure is distributed according to the setting in the Options screen.

4. Inspect the results of the traverse, then do one of the following:

♦

To store the angular adjustment details, tap Store.

♦

To adjust the distance misclosure, tap Adj. dist. The distance misclosure is distributed according to the setting in the Options screen and the traverse is stored.

When the traverse is stored, each point used in the traverse is stored as an adjusted traverse point with a search classification of adjusted. If there are any previously adjusted traverse points of the same name, they are deleted.

Taped distances

Use this function to add points to your General Survey job. Use a graphical right angle and distance interface to define rectangular structures, such as a building or building foundations. Key in or measure two points to define the first side, orientation, and location of the object.

Tip - To select the elevation from the Start point or End point, use the pop-up menu in the Elevation field.

To select the direction for your next point graphically on the plan view, tap the screen or use the right and left arrow keys. The dashed red line shows the current direction for the next side. To create the next side, tap Add, and then enter the distance to the next point using the angle defined in the plan view.

Alternatively, select a point that already exists in your job and the software will calculate the distance to that point for you.

To measure a point using GNSS or Conventional, select Fastfix or Measure from the pop-up menu on the

Point name field.

Tip - If your style is configured for a laser rangefinder, Laser is available in the pop-up menu for Length and

H. Dist fields. Tap Laser to measure distances using the laser.

To close the object back onto the start point, tap Close. A horizontal distance will be computed and displayed.

Use this as a check against your plan or your taped distance. To complete the function, tap Store. To add further sides to the object, tap Add.

Tip - If you need more detailed information on the quality of the close, use a different point name for the end point, and store the object. Then compute an inverse between the start point and the end point.

To change a keyed in distance before the feature is stored, tap Edit, and then select the end point of the side to edit. When you adjust the distance, the plan view updates. You can then continue to add more sides.

Notes

•

Once the feature has been stored, you can no longer edit the lengths of the sides.

•

The orientation is defined by the first side. Only parallel or 90° angles can be added from this side. To use a different angle, store the object, and then create a new side.

149

•

Because new points are stored as polars, taped distances will not work without a Scale factor only or

• fully defined Projection in the coordinate system.

In addition to the new points that are created, lines are created automatically and stored to the General

Survey database. These are visible in the map and can be used to stake out lines.

Calculator

To use the calculator at any time, select Cogo / Calculator from the main General Survey menu.

Tap (Options) to set the angle method, calculator mode (Reverse Polish Notation (RPN) or Standard), and decimal place display.

Tap

Azimuth to compute an azimuth.

Tap

Distance to compute a distance.

The calculator functions are shown below.

Calculator symbol Function

Add

Subtract

Multiply

Divide

Change sign of number being entered

Equals

Enter

Show all values on the stack

Back space

Options

Raise Y to the power of X

Square

Square root

Raise 10 to the power of X

Enter exponent or change exponent sign

Reciprocal

Swap X with Y

150

Sine

Arc Sin

Cosine

Arc Cosine

Tangent

Arc Tangent

Log base 10

Switch SHIFT state

Open parenthesis

Close parenthesis

Clear all

Clear entry

Memory functions

Polar to rectangular coordinate conversion

Rectangular to polar coordinate conversion

Rotate stack down

Rotate stack up

Insert degrees, minutes, or seconds separator

Subtract angles of the form DD.MMSSsss

Add angles of the form DD.MMSSsss

Convert from DD°MM'SS.sss or DD.MMSSsss to angle units

Convert from current angle units to DD°MM'SS.sss

Tip - You can access the calculator from the pop-up arrow on most distance fields.

1. Select Calculator from the pop-up menu.

2. Enter the numbers and functions.

3. Tap = to calculate the result.

4. Tap Accept to return the result to the field.

Cogo - Compute Distance

To access Compute distance, tap Distance in the Calculator.

151

Between two points

Between point and line

Between point and arc

You can use keyed-in data, and points stored in the database, to calculate a distance by various methods. You can also store the results in the database.

Note - You can enter data in different units. For example, if you add a distance in meters to a distance in feet, the answer is returned in whatever format you specified in the job configuration.

Between two points

To compute the distance between two points:

1. In the Method field, select Between two points.

2. Enter the From point and the To point.

3. The distance between the two points is calculated.

Between point and line

To compute the distance between a point and a line:

1. In the Method field, select Between point and line.

2. As shown in the diagram below, enter the Point name (1) and the Line name (2).

Tip - If the line does not already exist, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and select Two points. You can then enter the start point and end point to define the line.

3. The distance along the line (3) and the perpendicular distance (4) to the line is calculated. The distance along the line is from the point specified (5).

Between point and arc

152

To compute the distance between a point and an arc:

1. In the Method field, select Between point and arc.

2. As shown in the diagram below, enter the Point name (1) and the Arc name (2).

3. The distance along the arc (3) and the perpendicular distance (4) to the arc is calculated. The distance along the arc is from the point specified (5).

Pop-Up Menu Controls

To insert a feature name into a field, enter the name or tap the pop-up menu button and select one of the following options from the list that appears:

List

Key in

Measure

Fast fix select features from the database key in details measure a point automatically measure a construction class point

Map selections select from a list of the features currently selected in the map

Calculator

Units shortcut to the Calculator select units for the field

To change the method of data entry, tap the advanced pop-up menu button . The first two or three fields change.

153

Survey - General

Measure and Stakeout Menus

Use these menus to measure and stake out points using the

Survey Styles

defined in the General Survey software.

For more information, see:

RTK and Infill Surveys

Getting Started

All surveys in General Survey are controlled by a Survey Style. Survey Styles define the parameters for configuring and communicating with your instruments, and for measuring and storing points. This whole set of information is stored as a template and used each time you start a survey.

If the defaults do not suit your needs, modify the style. To do this, tap Settings from the Trimble Access menu and then tap Survey styles.

To measure or stake out, the General Survey software needs to start a survey, at which time you are prompted to select the appropriate survey style.

Note - If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected when you start a survey. Otherwise, select a style from the list that appears.

For details on how to set up these two types of surveys, see

Conventional Surveys,

or Real-Time Kinematic

Surveys.

For details on how to set up an Integrated survey, see Integrated_Surveys.

For more information on other types of GNSS surveys, see

GNSS Surveys.

154

Getting Connected

The General Survey software can automatically connect to Trimble GNSS and conventional instruments.

To auto-connect to a Trimble instrument, the software cycles through a set of connection protocols for each type of instrument. It can take up to 15 seconds to complete the cycle, which means it can take up to 15 seconds to automatically connect to a Trimble instrument, depending on where the software is in the auto-connect cycle when the instrument is connected.

There are three main groups of Trimble instruments that can be automatically connected: Trimble GNSS receivers, Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, Trimble 5600/3600 total stations.

If you connect to only one of these types of instrument, you can speed up the automatic connection time by clearing the check box for the instrument type(s) you do not connect to.

To set the auto-connect options, tap the auto-connect icon in the status bar before you connect to an instrument.

You can also configure auto-connect from Settings. Tap Settings from the Trimble Access menu and then select Connect / Auto connect.

When the software is trying to automatically connect to an instrument, the auto-connect icon flashes. There is a different icon for each type of instrument. For example, if you select only Trimble GNSS receivers, then only a Trimble GNSS receiver icon flashes.

The software will only attempt to auto-connect to the currently configured receiver for the current mode:

Rover mode or Base mode (see

GNSS functions).

•

If the software is in Rover mode, it will attempt to connect to the receiver configured in the Connect to

•

GNSS rover field in the Bluetooth settings screen.

If the software is in Base mode, it will attempt to connect to the receiver configured in the Connect to

•

GNSS base field in the Bluetooth settings screen.

If there is no receiver configured in the appropriate field in Bluetooth settings, then the software will attempt to auto-connect to a Trimble GNSS receiver on the serial port of the controller; and if a

• receiver is detected it will be treated as the receiver you wish to use in the current mode.

The flashing icon, or the yellow highlight on the GNSS Functions screen, shows the mode which the software is currently in.

Tap the Bluetooth button to go to the Bluetooth settings screen. You can also configure Bluetooth connections from Settings. Tap Settings from the Trimble Access menu and then select Connect/Bluetooth.

If the auto-connect icon displays all three icons, and is not flashing, then auto-connect has been disabled for all three groups of instruments.

When you use Instrument functions to disconnect from a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, auto-connect is temporarily disabled. To re-enable auto-connect tap the auto-connect icon.

Note - When auto-connect has been temporarily disabled, a single tap re-enables auto-connect, and a

155

second tap is required to display the Auto connect options screen.

You do not have to wait for auto-connect to connect to your instrument. To force a connection, select the survey style and start the survey at any time.

To connect to a non-Trimble instrument, you must force a connection by starting the survey.

Tip - When using non-Trimble instruments, disable auto-connect. Some commands used by auto-connect can interfere with the communication of non-Trimble instruments.

PIN lock security

PIN lock security can be enabled one of two ways depending on the instrument:

•

Using Trimble Access for the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station

•

Using the

instrument

for the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S8 total station

PIN lock using Trimble Access

To enable PIN lock security, tap Instrument / Instrument settings - PIN and then enter and confirm the PIN.

When this function is enabled, the Unlock instrument screen appears when connecting to the instrument. Enter the PIN and then tap Accept.

Notes

•

When the PIN has been set, tap PUK and record the number. Use this number if you have forgotten

• your PIN.

Ten incorrect attempts to unlock the instrument using a PIN results in the instrument being blocked. If

• this occurs, you are prompted for a PUK [Personal Unblocking Key] code to unblock the instrument.

If the instrument is locked and you don't know your PIN or PUK, contact your local Trimble dealer

• for help.

To change the PIN, tap Instrument / Instrument settings - PIN, enter the current PIN and then enter

• and confirm the new PIN.

To remove PIN lock security, tap Instrument / Instrument settings - PIN, enter the current PIN and

• then tap None.

The PIN must be a 4 digit numeric value.

PIN lock security using the instrument

PIN lock security can be enabled using the [Security] option on the Face 2 display on the Trimble VX Spatial

Station or Trimble S8 total station. To do this:

1. Select [Setup/Level / Setup / Security - Change PIN]

2. Enter the current PIN. Select [Done] if no PIN has been set.

3. Enter and confirm the new PIN.

When enabled, select the [Unlock Instrument] option on the Face 2 display and enter the PIN to establish a connection.

156

Notes

•

When the PIN has been set, select [Get PUK] and record the number. Use this number if you have

• forgotten your PIN.

Ten incorrect attempts to unlock the instrument using a PIN results in the instrument being blocked. If

• this occurs, you are prompted for a PUK [Personal Unblocking Key] code to unblock the instrument.

If the instrument is locked and you don't know your PIN or PUK, contact your local Trimble dealer

• for help.

To change the PIN, select [Setup/Level / Setup / Security - Change PIN], enter the current PIN and

• then enter and confirm the new PIN.

To remove PIN lock security, select [Setup/Level / Setup / Security - Change PIN] enter the current

•

PIN and then enter and confirm 0000 as the new PIN.

The PIN must be a 4 digit numeric value.

Integrated Surveying

The General Survey software can switch between a GNSS survey and a conventional survey, within the same job.

In an integrated survey, the controller is connected to both devices at the same time. This makes switching between instruments very quick.

For more information, see:

Integrated Surveys

GNSS Surveys

Note - If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected when you start a survey. Otherwise, select a style from the list that appears.

The General Survey software provides Survey Styles for the following GNSS survey types:

Real-Time Kinematic

To use one of the following survey types, you must create your own survey style.

FastStatic

Postprocessed Kinematic

Real-Time Kinematic and Infill

Real-Time Kinematic and Data Logging

157

Real-Time Differential Survey

For information on how to configure settings for GNSS surveys, see the following topics:

Start Base Receiver

Measure Points

Measure Codes

Continuous Topo Points

Swap Base Receiver

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Initialization

Conventional Surveys

Note - If there is only one survey style, it is automatically selected when you start a survey. Otherwise, select a style from the list that appears.

The General Survey software provides a default style for use with a conventional instrument. Configure this type of survey when you create or edit a survey style, then follow these steps to carry out a conventional survey.

Configure your survey style

Prepare for a robotic survey

Perform a station setup

Begin the survey

End the survey

Configure your survey style

General Survey automatically connects to Trimble instruments. Configure the style only if the defaults do not suit your needs.

To configure a survey style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Select each of the options in turn, and set them to suit your equipment and survey preferences.

3. Once you configure all the settings, tap Store to save them, and then tap Esc to return to the main menu.

158

For more information, see:

Instrument

Laser rangefinder

Duplicate point tolerance

Traverse options

Prepare for a robotic survey

To prepare a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station or 5600 instrument for a robotic survey, the instrument must be turned on, leveled, with the correct radio settings, and if required, a search window defined.

If the instrument is level, has the correct radio settings, and you are using the autocentered search window, press the trigger button to turn on the instrument for a robotic survey.

To configure the Radio channel and Network ID on a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station without using the General Survey software, select [Radio settings] on the instrument through the Face

2 menu display.

For more information, refer to the documentation for your instrument.

Note - General Survey cannot communicate with the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station when the onboard programs are in use. Once you finish using the instrument's onboard programs, select [Exit] from the [Setup] menu to return to the [Waiting for connection] menu.

The following section describes how to level the instrument, configure the radio settings, and set the search window on the instrument through the Trimble CU controller.

Preparing the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station for a Robotic survey

1. With the Trimble CU attached to the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, press the trigger button to turn on the instrument and controller.

2. Start the General Survey software, level the instrument and then tap Accept in the leveling screen.

Tap Esc to exit the Corrections screen and the Survey Basic screen if they appear.

3. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Radio settings.

4. Set the Radio channel and Network ID and then tap Accept.

5. Do one of the following:

•

To set a search window: a. From the main menu, select Measure / Start robotic. b. Select Define now and tap OK. c. Aim the instrument to the Top left corner of the search window and tap OK. d. Aim the instrument to the Bottom right corner of the search window and tap OK. e. Tap OK to suspend the controller ready for robotic operation.

159

•

If you plan to use an Autocentered search window, press the power key on the Trimble CU to suspend

the controller.

You do not need to define the search window now.

6. Remove the controller from the instrument and attach it to the robotic holder.

7. Press the power key on the Trimble CU. The General Survey software auto-connects to the instrument radio and displays the leveling screen. If required, level the instrument and tap Accept.

You are now ready to perform a station setup.

Preparing the Trimble 5600 instrument for a Robotic survey

1. With the Trimble CU attached to the Trimble 5600 instrument, press the trigger button to turn on the instrument and controller.

2. Start the General Survey software, level the instrument and then tap Accept in the leveling screen.

Tap Esc to exit the Corrections screen and the Survey Basic screen if they appear.

3. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Radio settings.

4. Set the Radio channel, Station address and Remote address and then tap Accept.

5. Do one of the following:

•

To set a search window: a. From the main menu, select Measure / Start robotic. b. Aim the instrument to the Top left corner of the search window and tap OK. c. Aim the instrument to the Bottom right corner of the search window and tap OK. d. Tap OK to suspend the controller ready for robotic operation.

•

If you plan to use an Autocentered search window, press the power key on the Trimble CU to suspend

the controller.

You do not need to define the search window now.

6. Remove the controller from the instrument and then attach the controller to the robotic holder: a. Connect the Trimble CU to Port A on the remote radio using the Trimble CU holder or a 0.4

m, 4-pin Hirose cable.

b. Turn on the active target or connect it to Port B on the remote radio.

7. Press the power key on the Trimble CU. The General Survey software auto-connects to the instrument radio and displays the leveling screen. If required, level the instrument and then tap

Accept.

You are now ready to perform a station setup.

Note - The 5600 is re-initialized to compensate for the earlier removal of the controller.

When the instrument is suspended ready for robotic operation, it switches off to conserve power. The internal radio remains switched on so that the rover radio can communicate with the instrument when you start the rover survey.

160

Note - The internal radio settings are set when the General Survey software connects to the instrument. The remote radio settings are set later when you start the rover survey.

For more information, see Radio settings.

Perform a station setup

To get the most out of the Station setup routine, tap Options to configure Station setup to match the way that you prefer to work.

You can configure the default point names, default heights, default instrument coordinates, and the default azimuth. Default instrument coordinates and default azimuth are used only if the instrument point is not already coordinated, and an azimuth to the backsight cannot be computed.

The Default point names option determines the default values for the instrument and the backsight point name fields each time you perform a station setup:

•

If you always use the same names for your instrument and backsight points, select Last used. Use this method if you always use the default instrument coordinates, or if you repeatedly set up on the same

• known point.

If you are performing a traverse type survey, select Traversing. When you start a new station setup, by default, the instrument uses the first foresight point observed from the last station setup for the

Instrument point name, and the instrument point name used in the last station setup for the Backsight

• point name.

If you want to key in or select the instrument and backsight point names each time you perform a station setup, select All null.

Note - These are only default values. You should select the option that matches your normal workflow. You can override the default values for any particular station setup.

Note - Do not confuse the Last used option with the Use last survey menu option.

The Last used option applies to a new station setup. The last values are used even across different jobs.

The Use last menu option reinstates the last station setup. No new station setup is performed.

The Default heights option determines the default values for the instrument and the backsight point height fields each time you perform a station setup.

•

If you always use the same heights for your instrument and backsight points, select Last used. This

• option is available only if you set the Default point names option to Last used.

If you are using the Trimble traverse kit (so that the last measured foresight and instrument heights can be used as the new instrument and backsight heights), select Move forward. This option is

• available only if you set the Default point names option to Traversing.

If you want to key in a new instrument and backsight height for each station setup, select All null.

If the instrument point does not exist, the default instrument coordinates are used. This is particularly useful if you work in a local coordinate system, and always set up your instrument on coordinate (0,0,0) or (1000N,

2000E, 100El), for example. If you leave the Default instrument coordinates set to null, you can key in coordinates for instrument points that do not exist when you perform a station setup.

161

If an azimuth cannot be computed between the instrument and backsight points, the Default azimuth is used.

Note - If you always set up your instrument on a known point, and use a known azimuth, then leave the

Default instrument coordinates and Default azimuth fields set to null. This ensures that you do not accidentally use default values if you incorrectly enter the name of the instrument and/or the backsight point names.

The General Survey software normally expects you to measure a backsight point to orient your survey. If your survey practice does not require you to measure to the backsight, clear the Measure backsight check box on the second page of options. The software automatically creates a virtual backsight, Backsightxxxx (where xxxx is a unique suffix, for example, Backsight0001), using the current instrument orientation as the azimuth.

Tip - If the instrument is correctly set up and oriented, you are satisfied that the last station setup is still valid, and you wish to continue observing points from this station, select Measure / Use last to use the last completed station setup.

Note - Before you can use the Turn to or Joystick functions to turn a servo or robotic instrument, you must have a current station setup.

To perform a station setup:

From the main menu, select Measure / Station setup

Station setup plus ,

Resection , or

Refline.

Note - If you have only one style, it is automatically selected.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, set the corrections by selecting Options from the Station

setup screen. To have the Corrections form display on startup, select the Show corrections on startup option.

For some instruments, the General Survey software automatically checks to see if various corrections

(PPM, prism constant, and curvature and refraction) are being applied correctly. When you select

Station setup, messages showing what has or has not been checked are displayed in the status line. If the General Survey software finds that the corrections are being applied twice, a warning message appears. When using the 5600 3600 instrument style, all corrections are applied in General Survey.

Note - When using a non-Trimble instrument, you must select the correct survey style before you connect the controller to the instrument. Otherwise, the instrument and controller may fail to connect.

2. Enter the instrument point name and the instrument height.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and then select Bottom notch. Enter the height measured to the top ridge of the bottom notch on the instrument.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518

sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

162

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

For details, see the following figure and table.

0.158m Offset from bottom notch to trunnion axis.

Hm Measured slope distance.

Hc Hm corrected from slope to true vertical.

HI Hc + 0.158m. True vertical instrument height.

Note - For a 2D or planimetric survey, leave the Instrument height field set to null (?). No elevations will be calculated. Unless you are using a Scale only projection, you must define a project height in the coordinate system definition. The General Survey software needs this information to reduce measured ground distances to ellipsoid distances, and to compute 2D coordinates.

3. Enter the backsight point name.

Tip - If the point is available from a linked file, select the linked file for the job and enter the point name in the Instrument point name or Backsight point name field. The point is automatically copied to the job.

4. Choose an option in the Method field. The options are:

♦

Angles and distance - measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance

♦

Averaged observations - measure horizontal and vertical angles, and slope distance for a

♦ predefined number of observations

Angles only - measure horizontal and vertical angles

♦

H. Angle only - measure horizontal angle only

♦

Angle offset - measure the slope distance first, the instrument can then be repointed and then

♦ measure the horizontal and vertical angles

H. Angle offset - measure the vertical angle and slope distance first, the instrument can then be repointed and then measure the horizontal angle

163

♦

V. Angle offset - measure the horizontal angle and slope distance first, the instrument can

♦ then be repointed and then measure the vertical angle

Distance offset - enter the left/right, in/out or V.Dist offset from the target to the object when a point is inaccessible and then measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance to the offset object

5. If necessary, enter the target height for the backsight.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

6. Sight the center of the backsight target and tap Measure.

Select the View before storage check box to view observations before they are stored.

7. If you are performing a

resection or

station setup plus

, you can add more backsight points/observations to the station setup.

8. If the residuals for the station setup are acceptable, tap Close and then tap Store.

Station Setup is complete.

Begin the survey

To begin surveying, select the required survey method from Measure

or Stakeout.

End the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / End conventional survey.

2. Tap Yes to confirm.

3. Turn off the controller.

Warning - The current station setup is lost when you select End conventional survey.

If a survey is running, end it before editing the current survey style or changing survey styles. You must also end the survey before accessing job functions such as copying. For more information, see

Job.

For more information, see:

Station Setup - Single backsights

164

Measure a point in two faces

Measure Rounds

Measure 3D Axes

Continuous topo from the Measure menu.

Roads

Tunnels

Mines

End Survey

Measure Points

The process of recording GNSS or conventional instrument data is known as measuring. To measure points, do one of the following:

•

From the Favorites menu, select Measure points.

•

From the Measure menu, select Measure points or Measure topo.

•

From the Map, select Measure (only available when nothing in the map is selected).

The types of points that you can measure depend on your survey style and the survey method used.

Conventional Surveys

In conventional surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

•

Measure topo

•

Check points

165

If you are measuring points with codes, you can use

Measure topo,

but you may find

Measure codes

more useful. Measure codes uses a 9-button pallet that makes measuring codes easier and faster.

To measure a line of points at a fixed interval, select

If a point is inaccessible, you can also measure horizontal angle

and distance

offsets to the point.

To measure a point that cannot be observed directly with a pole in a plumb position use the

Dual prism

measurement method.

To calculate a center point of a circular object such as a water tank or silo, use the

Circular object

option.

To measure multiple sets of observations, select

Measure rounds from the Measure menu.

To calculate the height of a remote object if the instrument does not support DR mode, or you cannot measure

a distance, use the Remote Object method.

To automatically store measurements along a remote surface that you have defined, use either the

Scanning

the Surface Scan method.

You can also Measure a point on two faces.

Tip - In Point name fields there is a Find softkey that lets you search for the next available point name. For example, if your job contains points numbered in the 1000s, 2000s and 3000s, and you want to find the next available point name after 1000:

1. In the Point name field, tap Find. The Find next free point name screen appears.

2. Enter the point name you want to start searching from (in this example, 1000) and tap Enter.

The General Survey software searches for the next available point name after 1000 and inserts it in the Point

name field.

GNSS Surveys

In real-time GNSS surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

•

Topo point

•

Observed control point

•

Calibration point

•

Rapid point

To measure a line of points at a fixed interval, select

Continuous topo from the Measure menu.

To measure points along with depths using an echo sounder, use

Continuous topo.

In postprocessed surveys, you can measure the following types of points:

•

Topo point

166

•

Observed control point

•

FastStatic points

Measure Codes

To measure and code Conventional or GNSS observations in one step, select the feature code you want to measure and store from a coding form containing nine buttons that you can define. You can define multiple groups or pages of codes, each consisting of up to nine codes.

In the Measure codes form, if you activate the Code button, it affects the behavior of the nine configurable code buttons. When you then tap one of the configurable code buttons, the code on that button is added to the code field at the bottom of the Measure codes form. Typically, you can use the Code button to combine codes from multiple code buttons where features combine, either from the current group, or a combination of groups. You can also use it to enter a new code.

If a code has attributes, the attribute values appear at the bottom of the Measure codes form. You cannot directly edit these attribute values in the form. To change the attribute values, do one of the following:

•

Tap Attrib in the Measure codes form.

•

Tap Attrib in the Measure topo/Measure points form.

•

If Prompt for attributes is enabled, enter the attributes when prompted.

♦

If you pre-entered attributes using the Attrib softkey, you are not prompted for attributes.

For more information, see Using Feature Codes with Predefined Attributes.

To add a feature code group and assign codes to the buttons:

1. Select Measure / Measure codes and then tap Add group.

2. Enter a Group name and then tap OK.

3. To add a code to a button:

♦

Tap and hold on the button. When the tooltip message appears, remove the stylus from the screen. In the dialog that appears, enter the code, or select a code from the feature code

♦ library.

Navigate to the button using the arrow keys, and then press the Space key, which emulates the

'tap and hold' action.

In the dialog that appears, enter the code, or select a code from the feature code library. Tap OK. The code you entered now appears on the button.

If required, you can also enter additional descriptions.

4. To add another code, or remove a code from a button, repeat Step 3.

5. To add more groups of feature code buttons, tap Add group.

To navigate to a particular group, select it from the drop down list in the top left of the form.

Alternatively, use A - Z to quickly switch to group pages 1 - 26. This method is not available if the

Code button in enabled.

167

New groups are added after the current group. To add a group to the end of existing groups, ensure you select the last group before selecting Add group.

To measure and code observations using Measure codes:

1. Select Measure / Measure codes.

2. To initiate a measurement, activate the button using one of the following methods:

♦

Tap the button.

♦

Press the numeric key on the controller keyboard corresponding to the button. Keys 7, 8, 9, activate the top row of buttons, keys 4, 5, 6 activate the middle row of buttons, keys 1, 2, 3

♦ activate the bottom row of buttons.

Use the arrows keys on the controller to navigate to the button and then press Enter.

If the code has attributes, the attribute values appear at the bottom of the Measure codes form.

3. To automatically start the measurement when the button is selected, tap Options and then select the

Auto measure check box.

Note - When the method is set to Distance offset, Angles only, and H Angle only, Automeasure is temporarily paused.

4. To configure the position of the highlight for the next code, tap Options and then configure the

Direction of the Template pickup.

5. The code field is set to the code on the button and the measurement is initiated. The measurement is automatically stored depending on the setting in Options:

♦

In a GNSS survey, set the Topo point options to Auto store point.

♦

In a Conventional survey, clear the View before storage check box in the Measure point

options form.

If descriptions were defined on the Measure codes button, the descriptions are also set to the descriptions on the button.

6. Once you store the measurement, the Measure codes form appears, ready for the next measurement.

Tap [Enter] to measure a point with the same code again, or use one of the methods described in step

2 above to measure with a different code.

The Measure topo/Measure points form, where the measurement was initiated, remains open in the background. If you need to change the point name or measurement method, tap Switch to to switch to this form, change the fields as required and then tap Switch to again to return to the Measure codes form.

Using Template pickup

Use the Template pickup feature to automatically move the highlight from the current button to the next button after storing a measurement. Template pickup is particularly useful when coding observations in a regular pattern, for example, across a road template.

To configure template pickup, tap Options and then configure:

168

•

The template pickup Direction:

♦

Left to right - The highlight starts at the top left of the grid and moves to the right until the end of the row. The highlight then moves back to top the left of the second row and sequence

♦ restarts.

Right to left - The highlight starts at the top right of the grid and moves to the left until the end of the row. The highlight then moves back to the top the right of the second row and

♦ sequence restarts.

Zig zag - The highlight starts at the top left of the grid and moves left to right until the end of the row. The highlight then moves to the top right of the second row and moves right to left to the end of that row, then the sequence restarts.

•

The Number of elements:

♦

The Number of elements configured should match the number of elements across the template, and the number of buttons configured in Measure codes.

To skip a code, tap a different button, or use the arrow keys to select an alternative code button.

Notes

•

The first time that you use Measure codes, the measurement may not begin automatically if you have not defined the point name and target height. If this occurs, complete these fields and then tap

•

Measure to begin the measurement.

To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

•

During a measurement, you can change the point name, and the target or antenna height and code.

However, you can do this only if you start editing before the observation is stored. Alternatively, tap

Esc as soon as the measurement begins, make the required changes, then tap Measure to restart the

• measurement.

To change the EDM or measurement method, tap Esc during the measurement, make the required

• changes, then tap Measure to restart the measurement.

To change the point name or measurement method before you start a measurement, tap Switch to to switch to the Measure topo/Measure points form, change the fields as required and then tap Switch to

• again to return to the Measure codes form.

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor where the point type has been configured to use

Tilt auto-measure, the point will not auto-measure until the pole is within the specified tilt

• tolerance.

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can configure the survey style to

•

prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance.

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

•

To measure a point with a null code, activate a blank code button. Alternatively, tap Code, ensure that

• the code field is empty and then tap Measure.

To store a

note with an observation, tap

•

To delete an entire group of codes, select the group and then tap Delete.

Template pickup with multiple groups

You can have up to 27 elements in a template. When there are more than 9 elements in a template:

•

2 or 3 groups are 'grouped' together with the highlight automatically moving between groups during template pickup.

169

•

You can only configure the template pickup from Options on the first group. The second and third

• groups indicate that the template pickup was defined by the previous group.

The up and down arrow on the keyboard moves through the current group only, but the left and right arrow on the keyboard can be used to move from the first/last button in one group to a button in the

• next group.

New groups are added after the current group. To add a group to the end of existing groups, ensure you select the last group before selecting Add group.

Stringing support

Measure codes has '+' and '-' softkeys that enable you to apply a suffix to the code on the button. This is useful when you use the stringing method for feature coding.

You can configure the suffix to 1, 01, 001, or 0001.

When the suffix is configured to 01, tap '+' to increase the code "Fence" to "Fence01". Tap '-' to decrease the code by 01.

Tap Find to find the next available string for the currently highlighted button.

Attributes and Base codes

You can configure the General Survey software to provide attributes for the complete code, or from a portion of the code - the "base code".

Typically, base codes are used when you use the '+' and '-' softkeys to "string" feature codes. For example, when you code a fence where all observations coded "Fence01" are joined together and all observations coded

"Fence02" are joined together, and so on, and they all have the same attributes. In this example, you can create feature code libraries that contain all the "Fence**" codes, or contain just the base code "Fence".

If you do not string codes, or if you do string codes but you include the entire code in the feature code library, then you are not using base codes. Disable Use attributes of base code (clear the check box).

If you do string codes, and the feature library includes only the base code, then enable Use attributes of base

code (select the check box).

In the General Survey software, you can use the extra power of Measure codes to create a button that contains a numeric or alpha-numeric code (the base code) and then append a numeric suffix using the ‘+’ or ‘-’ softkeys. For codes entered into any other code field in the General Survey software, you cannot use the ‘+’ or

‘-’ softkeys to append a suffix, so when you use base codes, the software can only attempt to determine the base code by stripping the numeric characters from the end of the codes.

The following rules help to explain the base code:

•

In Measure codes:

1. When Use attributes of base code is disabled, the code displayed on a button is the base code.

◊

Enter "Fence", string the code to become "Fence01", the attributes are derived from

"Fence01".

170

2. When Use attributes of base code is enabled, the code entered on a button is the base code.

◊

Enter "Fence", string the code to become "Fence01", the attributes are derived from

"Fence".

3. If you edit or change the code on a button, the base code resets, using rule 1 or rule 2 above.

4. If you change the configuration of the Use attributes of base code setting, the base code resets, using rule 1 or rule 2 above.

5. When Measure codes ‘passes’ the code to the Measure topo, or Measure points system, the base code from within Measure codes is retained.

•

In any other code field of the General Survey software:

1. When Use attributes of base code is disabled, the code entered is the base code.

2. When Use attributes of base code is enabled, the base code is determined by ‘internally’ stripping any numeric characters from the end of the code.

3. When Use attributes of base code is enabled, and you edit a code that is ‘passed’ from

Measure codes, the base code is re-derived by ‘internally’ stripping any numeric characters from the end of the code.

Notes

•

If you use attributes and numeric codes with a string suffix, you must use Measure codes to define the suffix and start the measurement. Measure codes understands where the code ends and the suffix starts. If you do not use Measure codes, the entire numeric code + suffix will be treated as the code,

• the suffix cannot be determined, and attributes for the base code will not be available.

To configure Use attributes of base code, from within Measure codes, use the up arrow softkey to

• select Options, and then select the check box as required.

The Use attributes of base code setting is configured within Measure codes, but is applied throughout

• the General Survey software.

If you edit the code on a button when Use attributes of base code is disabled, the entire code from the

• code button is displayed in the Edit field.

If you edit the code on a button when Use attributes of base code is enabled, the base code is displayed in the Edit field.

♦

The code on the button is "Fence01" and the base code is "Fence". If you edit this code, the base code "Fence" is displayed.

•

You can string alphanumeric codes when Use attributes of base code is disabled. The code displayed

• on the button is the base code.

You cannot string numeric only codes when Use attributes of base code disabled.

Tip - If you use multiple codes with attributes, enter all the codes before you enter the attributes.

Sharing Measure codes groups between controllers

The groups, and the codes within each group, are stored in a Measure Codes Database file (*.mcd).

If you use a feature library, the Measure Codes Database file (*.mcd) is tied to that feature library and has a matching name. If you use the same feature library on other controllers, you can copy the *.mcd file to use in the other controllers. To use the feature library *.mcd file, you must assign the feature library to the job.

If you do not use a feature library, a [Default.mcd] file is created. The [Default.mcd] file can also be copied to other controllers. When the General Survey software does not have a feature library assigned to a job, the

171

[Default.mcd] file is used in Measure codes.

Stakeout - Overview

In a real-time GNSS survey or a conventional survey, you can stake out points, lines, arcs, polylines, alignments, roads, and DTMs.

To stake out an item:

•

Define the item to be staked out.

•

From the map, or from Stakeout, select the item to be staked out.

•

Navigate to the point, or direct the person holding the rod to the point.

•

Mark the point.

•

Measure the point (optional).

You can define the item to be staked out in the Key in menu, or you can use a

linked file

to add the points to the stakeout list.

You can define the item to be staked out:

• in the Key in menu

• with a

linked CSV or job file

• from lines and arcs uploaded with the job file

• from an active map file

• from an alignment (.rxl) or road (.rxl, crd, .inp, .mos, or .xml)

To stake out a line between two points without keying the line into the job database, you can select two points from the map, tap and hold in the map to access the pop-up menu and then select Stake out line.

To use GNSS to stake out lines, arcs, Digital Terrain Models, and alignments, you must define a projection and datum transformation.

Warning - Do not change the coordinate system or calibration after you have staked out points.

For more information, see:

(polylines)

172

Stakeout - Display mode

Stakeout - Options

Using the Graphical display

Fast Fix

Tap Fast fix to quickly measure and automatically store a construction point. Alternatively, select Fast fix from the pop-up menu in the Point name field.

Note - In a real-time GNSS survey, Fast fix uses the Rapid point method. In a conventional survey, Fast fix uses the current measurement mode.

If you need more flexibility, select Measure from the pop-up menu in the Point name field.

Typically, a construction point is used in Cogo - compute points or Key in - lines and arcs.

Construction points are stored in the General Survey database with autopoint names that increment from

Temp0000. They are classified higher than check points and lower than normal points. For more information,

see Database Search Rules.

To view construction points in a map or list, tap Filter and select them from the Select filter list.

Topo Point

This is a previously configured method of measuring and storing a point. Configure this type of point when you create or edit a Survey Style.

Configure the survey style

To configure the survey style, from the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

Use the Auto point step size field to set the increment size for automatic point numbering. The default is 1, but you can use larger step sizes and negative steps.

You can store quality control information with each point measurement. Options may include QC1,

QC1 & QC2, and QC1 & QC3, depending on the type of survey.

Select the Auto store point check box to automatically store the point when the preset occupation time and precisions have been met.

The Occupation time and Number of measurements together define the time that the receiver is static while measuring a point. The criteria for both must be met before the point can be stored. The Occupation time defines the length of clock time for the occupation. The Number of measurements defines the number of valid sequential GNSS measurement epochs that meet the currently configured precision tolerance that must occur

173

during the period of the occupation time. When the Occupation time and Number of measurements criteria have been met, Store is available. Alternatively, if Auto store point is enabled, the point is stored automatically.

Notes

•

If a point is stored manually when the precision tolerances are not met, the number of measurements that meet the precision criteria will be zero, and this is what will appear in the point record in Review

• job.

The occupation epoch counter is reset when the precisions go outside tolerance.

The requirement for sequential epochs that meet the precision criteria means the occupation counters will be reset if the precision goes outside the tolerances at any time during the occupation.

During the occupation, the RTK engine in the GNSS receiver converges on a solution and it is this converged solution that is saved in the General Survey job file when the point is stored.

You can configure Occupation time and Number of measurements criteria in the Survey style or under

Options.

In an RTK survey, when you select the Auto tolerance check box, the software calculates horizontal and vertical precision tolerances that meet the GNSS receiver's RTK specifications for the baseline length you are measuring. If you want to enter your own precision tolerances, clear this check box.

When "Store RTK initialized only" is enabled, only Initialized RTK solutions that meet the precision tolerances can be stored. Uninitialized solutions that meet the precision tolerances cannot be stored.

When "Store RTK initialized only" is not enabled, both RTK Initialized and Uninitialized solutions that meet the precision tolerances can be stored.

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can select:

•

Tilt auto-measure to auto-measure points when the pole is within a specified Tilt tolerance

•

Tilt warnings to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance

Tip - To enable these options, select Survey Styles / Rover options and then select

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings

Select Auto abandon to abandon and restart the measurement process. When selected, points measured using a

GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor that experience excess tilt, or, for all receivers, excess movement, during the measurement process will be abandoned and the measurement process restarted.

Measuring a Topo Point in a GNSS Survey

You can measure a topo point in every type of survey except a FastStatic survey.

To measure a topo point:

1. Do one of the following:

174

♦

From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points

♦

From the Map, select Measure (only available when nothing in the map is selected).

To automatically start the measurement when you select Measure from the map, tap Options and then select the Auto measure check box.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and then select Topo

point from the Method field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

if you have not already done so.

5. When the antenna is vertical and stationary, tap Measure to start recording data. The static icon appears in the status bar.

Tip - You can tap Enter to accept the measurement before the occupation time or precisions have been satisfied.

6. When the preset occupation time and precisions have been reached, tap Store.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can configure the survey style

to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance.

When measuring a

♦ point, the eBubble appears. Store the point when the bubble is within the tilt tolerance.

Select the Auto store point check box to automatically store the point when the preset occupation time and precisions have been met.

Tilt auto-measuring a topo point in a GNSS Survey

To Tilt auto-measure a topo point you must use a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor and define a

suitable survey style. See

Configure the survey style.

You cannot Tilt auto-measure a topo point in a

FastStatic survey.

To Tilt auto-measure a topo point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points

♦

From the Map, select Measure (only available when nothing in the map is selected).

To automatically start the measurement when you select Measure from the map, tap Options and then select the Auto measure check box.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional) and then select Topo

point in the Method field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision and tilt settings.

175

5. Tap Start. The eBubble will automatically display and Waiting for level will display in the status line.

6. When the receiver is within the specified tilt tolerance, the position will auto-measure. The static icon appears in the status bar.

7. When the preset occupation time and precisions have been reached, tap Store.

8. The status line updates to display Waiting to move. You can now move to the next point to be measured. When movement of more than 5 degrees of tilt is detected the status line updates to display

Waiting for level. The system is now ready to measure the next point.

9. To exit the Tilt auto-measure process press End.

Occupation warnings

During a point measurement the General Survey warns you if there are adverse conditions that result in any of the tolerances being exceeded.

•

When you press Measure and the eBubble is outside the tilt tolerance (the bubble is red) a Receiver

•

not level, measure anyway? message appears. Tap Yes to continue measuring the position.

You can tap the button to accept the measurement before the occupation time or precisions have

• been satisfied or if there has been movement, tilt, or precision warnings during the occupation.

An Excess tilt detected when static message appears if you have had excess tilt at any time during the

• measurement process.

An Excess tilt message appears if you have excess tilt at the time of storage.

•

The warning message priority is as follows:

1. Excess movement

2. Excess tilt

3. Poor precisions

Note - Two behaviors are supported when measuring a position with excess tilt or excess movement.

♦

Automated behavior: Use the Auto abandon option for Topo point and Observed control

point. When selected, points measured using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor that experience excess tilt, or, for all receivers, excess movement, during the measurement process

♦ will be abandoned and the measurement process restarted.

Manual behavior: Use the Re measure option to discarded and remeasure points that experience excess tilt or excess movement during the measurement process. This option is available for all points measured using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor that experience excess tilt, or, for all receivers, excess movement during the measurement process.

The pole should be leveled again before tapping re-measure.

Check Point

GNSS

In a real-time GNSS survey, measure a point twice. Give the second point the same name as the first point. If the duplicate point tolerances are set to zero, the General Survey software warns that the point is a duplicate when you try to store it. Select Store as check to store the second point as a check class point. For more

information, see Duplicate point: Out of tolerance screen.

176

Conventional

In a conventional total station survey, tap Check to measure a check class point.

To measure a check point:

1. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point to check.

2. In the Method field, select a measurement method and enter the required information in the fields that appear.

3. In the Target height field, enter the height of the target and then tap Measure.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

If you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored with a classification of

Check. If you selected the View before storage check box, the check shot deltas appear on the Check

shot screen.

When you observe the point, if the station setup is the same as when you originally measured the point, the deltas are the difference in values between the original observation and the check observation. The deltas displayed are horizontal angle, vertical distance, horizontal distance, and slope distance.

If the station setup is different from when you originally measured the point, the deltas are in terms of the best coordinates from the original point to the check point. The deltas displayed are azimuth, vertical distance, horizontal distance, and slope distance.

4. Tap Enter to store the check point. Tap Esc to abandon the measurement.

Tap Chk BS to display the Check backsight screen. This is similar to the Check point screen, but the Point

name field shows the backsight of the current station setup. You cannot edit this field.

To observe a check shot to the backsight, use the same procedure as described above.

To return to the Check point screen, tap Chk topo.

Tip - During a conventional survey, you can use the tap and hold menu in the map to quickly measure a check point. If there are no points selected, Check backsight is available; if one point is selected Check shot is available.

Alternatively, to measure a check shot from any screen, press [CTRL + K] on the controller.

Using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor

A GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor has the following features:

•

Tilt auto-measure

177

•

Tilt warnings

Tilt auto-measure

Tilt auto-measure enables a Topo point or Rapid point to be auto measured when the pole is within a predefined

tilt tolerance.

When surveying using this measurement option an eBubble, (electronic bubble) is

displayed. A point will auto-measure when the bubble is green.

To enable Tilt auto-measure select:

1. Settings / Survey Styles - Rover options and select the

Tilt option.

2. Settings / Survey Styles and select the Tilt auto-measure option and enter a Tilt tolerance for topo and rapid point types.

Instrument / Receiver settings and configure the eBubble.

Notes

•

You can specify a Tilt tolerance and not select Tilt auto-measure. When you do this the eBubble

• indicates when the receiver is within the specified tolerance but the position is not auto-measured.

Tilt information is stored with every auto-measured point provided the eBubble was calibrated at the

• time the point was stored. No tilt information will be stored if the eBubble was not calibrated.

Tilt auto-measure does not operate in stakeout mode.

•

Tilt configuration is also available from Options during a survey.

•

Once the Tilt auto-measure sequence is started, no other survey measurement or stakeout process is permitted. Similarly, if you are doing another type of measurement or stakeout, you cannot start the

Tilt auto-measure sequence.

The following steps describe the Tilt auto-measure process.

1. From the Measure points screen tap Start to begin the auto measure process.

2. If the pole is tilted outside of the tilt tolerance the status line will display Waiting for level and the

eBubble will display red.

3. When the pole is within the tilt tolerance for more than half a second the eBubble will display green and the point will automatically begin measuring.

4. When the point is stored the status line will display Waiting to move. This means the system is waiting for you to tilt the pole by more than 5 degrees on your way to the next point to be measured.

5. Once the system has detected you have moved the pole the Status line will display Waiting for level and will automatically start another point measurement when you level the pole within the tilt tolerance.

6. To exit the Tilt auto-measure mode, press End when the status is Waiting for level or Waiting to move.

Note - The eBubble is aligned to the receiver's LED panel. To operate the eBubble correctly, the LED panel must be facing you (that is, you must be looking directly at the receiver's LED panel).

Tilt warnings

178

Tilt warnings is an option that can be enabled to warn you if the rod tilt in excess of the predefined

tilt tolerance

is detected during measurement. When tilt warnings are enabled a measurement can only be stored when the eBubble is green and within the tolerance circle. You can override the warning and store the point if you wish by pressing the button.

Tilt warnings are supported for the following measurement methods:

•

Topo point

•

Observed control point

•

Rapid point

•

Continuous points

•

Staking a Point with General Survey software or Land Seismic software

•

Staking a Line, Arc, or Alignment with General Survey software.

•

Staking a Road with Roads software.

To enable Tilt warnings select:

1. Settings / Survey Styles - Rover options and select the

Tilt option.

2. Settings / Survey Styles and select the Tilt warnings option and enter a Tilt tolerance for topo, observed control, rapid and continuous point types.

Instrument / Receiver settings and configure the eBubble.

Notes - Tilt auto-measure and Tilt warnings:

•

If the eBubble is outside the tilt tolerance when you are starting to measure a topo or observed control point (the bubble is red), a Receiver not level, measure anyway? message appears. Tap Yes to

• continue measuring the position.

An Excess tilt detected when static message appears if you have had excess tilt at any time during the

• measurement process.

An Excess tilt message appears if you have had excess tilt at the time of storage.

•

The eBubble is aligned to the receiver's LED panel. To operate the eBubble correctly, the LED panel

• must be facing you (that is, you must be looking directly at the receiver's LED panel).

You can specify a Tilt tolerance and not select Tilt warnings. When you do this the eBubble indicates

• when the receiver is within the specified tolerance but the tilt warning is not displayed.

Tilt information is stored with every measured point provided the eBubble was calibrated at the time

• the point was stored. No tilt information will be stored if the eBubble was not calibrated.

You will be forced to recalibrate the eBubble if the current temperature differs by than more than 30 degrees Celsius from the calibration temperature.

Understanding tilt tolerance

Tilt tolerance is defined as the distance on the ground that the tilt represents given the antenna height. If the pole is held such that the resultant distance on the ground (Tilt distance) is less than the tilt tolerance the

eBubble will display green and the point can be measured. The Tilt distance is stored with the job and is available at Review job. The circle on the eBubble vial represents the tilt tolerance.

179

End Survey

To end a survey, select the appropriate option depending on the survey type from the Measure or Stakeout options.

Notes

•

When you end a GNSS survey, the software asks you if you want to power down the receiver.

•

When you end a Conventional survey, the current station setup is lost.

•

When ending an Integrated survey, you can choose to end the GNSS survey, the Conventional survey, or both surveys.

180

Survey - Conventional

Measuring topo points in a Conventional Survey

To measure a topographic point using the General Survey software and a conventional instrument:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure topo.

3. Enter a value in the Point name field.

4. If necessary, enter a feature code in the Code field.

5. If you have enabled a measured point to be added to a CSV file, select the Add to CSV file option. The point will be stored in the displayed file name. To enable adding a file, see:

Add to CSV File.

In the Method field, select a measurement method.

7. Enter a value in the Target height field and then tap Measure.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

If you selected the View before storage

check box in the survey style, the measurement information appears on the screen. If necessary, edit the target height and code. Tap the view display button on the left of the measurement information to change the display and then do one of the following:

•

To store the point, tap Store.

•

Turn the instrument to the next point and then tap Read. The last point is stored and a measurement is made to the next point.

If you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored automatically and the point name increments (based on the Auto point step size setting). The General Survey software stores the raw observations (HA, VA, and SD).

Notes

•

If you selected the Auto average option in the survey style, and an observation to a duplicate point is within the specified duplicate point tolerances, the observation and the computed average position

•

(using all the available point positions), are automatically stored.

Two angles only observations from two different known points can be 'averaged' to compute the coordinates of the intersection point. To average the observations, they must be stored with the same point name. When the Duplicate point: Out of tolerance screen appears, select Average.

•

Alternatively, average the observations using Cogo / Compute average.

Two averaging methods are supported.

♦

Weighted

♦

Unweighted

You can select the averaging method in the Cogo settings screen.

181

To change the settings for the current survey, tap Options. You can not change the current survey style or the system settings.

If you are using a servo or robotic instrument to measure a known (coordinated) point, tap Turn.

Alternatively, with a servo instrument, set the Servo auto turn field in the survey style to HA & VA, or HA

only to automatically turn the instrument to the point.

Tips

•

You can tap Enter while measuring an Averaged observations to accept the measurement before the

• required number of observations has been completed.

You can tap Enter while measuring a Direct Reflex (DR) point with a defined standard deviation to accept the measurement before the standard deviation has been satisfied.

If you are measuring topo points with feature codes, you may find Measure codes faster and easier to use than

Measure topo.

If you are using a Leica TPS1100 instrument with Measure topo, you can initiate the measurement on the instrument and then store the measurement in the General Survey software. For more information on how to do this and on how to configure the Leica TPS1100 instrument, see

Configuring a Leica TPS1100 Instrument to Record data to General Survey.

Measurement Methods

For more information on the different measurement methods see the following:

Angles and distance

Angles only, H.Angle only

Angle Offset, H. Angle Offset, and V. Angle Offset

Distance offset

Dual Prism

Circular Object

Remote Object

Scanning

Surface Scan

You can also Measure a point on two faces.

Use the Auto point step size field to set the increment size for automatic point numbering. The default is 1, but you can use larger step sizes and negative steps.

182

Select the View before storage check box to view observations before they are stored.

Station Setup

In a conventional survey, you must complete a station setup to orientate the instrument:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / <Style name> / Station setup.

The menu that appears varies according to whether or not you have a current station setup.

Note - If you have only one style, it is automatically selected.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options from the Station setup screen to set the corrections.

To make the Corrections form appear on startup, select the Show corrections on startup option.

3. Enter the instrument point name and the instrument height. If the point is not already in the database, you can key it in or leave it as null.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518

sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

Notes

♦

If the coordinates for the instrument point are not known, perform a resection to known points

♦ to coordinate the point.

For a 2D or planimetric survey, leave the Instrument height field set to null (?). No elevations are calculated. Unless you are using a Scale only projection, a project height must be defined in the coordinate system definition. General Survey software needs this information to reduce measured ground distances to ellipsoid distances and to compute 2D coordinates.

4. Enter the backsight point name and the target height. If there are no coordinates for the point, you can key in an azimuth.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

183

Notes

♦

If you do not know the azimuth, you can enter an arbitrary value and then edit the azimuth

♦ record later, in review.

If you cannot determine the coordinates for the instrument or backsight point, you can key them in or measure them later using GNSS (provided that there is a valid GNSS site

♦ calibration). The coordinates of any points measured from that station are then computed.

When you enter the instrument point later, make sure that you choose to overwrite the original instrument point in the Duplicate point form. The coordinates of any points measured

♦ from that station are then computed.

You can use the Point manager to edit the coordinates of the instrument point. If you do, then

♦ the positions of all records that are computed from that station setup position may change.

You can use Point manager to edit the coordinates of the backsight point. If you edit the point record that is used as a backsight in a station setup with a computed azimuth to the backsight, then the positions of all records that are computed from that station setup may change.

Tip - If the point is available from a linked file, select the linked file for the job and then enter the point name in the Instrument point name or Backsight point name field. The point is automatically copied to the job.

5. Choose an option in the Method field. The options are:

♦

Angles and distance - measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance

♦

Averaged observations - measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance for a

♦ predefined number of observations

Angles only - measure horizontal and vertical angles

♦

H. Angle only - measure horizontal angle only

♦

Angle offset - measure the slope distance first, the instrument can then be repointed and then

♦ measure the horizontal and vertical angles

H. Angle offset - measure the vertical angle and slope distance first, the instrument can then

♦ be repointed and then measure the horizontal angle

V. Angle offset - measure the horizontal angle and slope distance first, the instrument can

♦ then be repointed and then measure the vertical angle

Distance offset - enter the left/right, in/out or V.Dist offset from the target to the object when a point is inaccessible and then measure horizontal and vertical angles and slope distance to the offset object

When you use an offset method, tap Options and then set the Offset &Stakeout directions

perspective.

Tip - When using Autolock technology and measuring offset points, select the Autolock off

for offsets check box. When enabled, Autolock technology is automatically disabled for the offset measurement and then re-enabled after the measurement.

6. Sight the center of the backsight target and then tap Measure.

7. If the residuals for the station setup are acceptable, tap Store.

Tip - To change the display, tap the view display button on the left of the measurement information.

184

Note - The residuals are the differences between the known position and the observed position of the backsight point.

Station setup is complete.

Tip - To get the most out of the Station setup routine, tap Options to configure Station setup to match the way that you prefer to work. For more information, see

Perform a station setup.

Note - If you want to measure more than one backsight point, use

Station setup plus.

Loading station data to a Trimble 5600 and ATS instrument

When you complete a station setup, Station setup plus, Resection, or Refline station setup with a Trimble

5600 or ATS instrument, the General Survey software loads the station information into the instrument.

Notes

•

The instrument does not accept a null instrument height. If the instrument height is set to null in the

•

General Survey software, then the software writes 0 to label V,50 and clears bit 1 in label PV,52.

The instrument does not accept a null H.Dist. If the General Survey software cannot compute an

H.Dist between the instrument and the backsight point (that is, Keyed in azimuth, Angles only, or

H.Angle only backsight observation) then the software writes 0 to label PV,51.

For more information, see:

•

•

•

•

•

Advanced Geodetics support

Station setup plus

In a conventional survey, use Station setup plus to perform a station setup on a known point by making observations to one or more backsight points.

Warning - If the station setup point is a traverse station that you plan to adjust, do not measure more than one backsight point. Clear the Backsight check box for any additional points so that they are measured as foresights.

For more details, see:

•

Performing a Station setup plus

•

Station setup - Residuals screen

•

Skipping observations

•

Point - Residuals screen

185

•

Point details screen

•

Station setup results screen

Performing a Station setup plus

To perform a Station setup plus:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / <Style name> / Station setup plus.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options and then select the Show corrections on startup check box.

3. Enter the instrument point name. If the point is not already in the database, key it in or leave it as null.

If the coordinates for the instrument point are not known, perform a Resection

to known points. This will provide the coordinates.

4. If applicable, enter the instrument height and then tap Accept.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518

sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

- For a 2D or planimetric survey, leave the Instrument height field set to null (?). No elevations is calculated.

- Once the station setup is started, you cannot enter a different instrument height.

Warning - Before you continue, tap Options and make sure that the Face order setting is correct.

You cannot change this setting after you start measuring points.

5. Enter the first backsight point name and the target height, if applicable. If there are no coordinates for the point, you can key in an azimuth.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

If the point is available from a linked file, select the linked file for the job and then enter the point name in the Instrument point name or Backsight point name field. The point is automatically copied to the job.

186

Note - To include foresight points during Station setup plus, clear the Backsight check box. Foresight points do not contribute to the station setup result.

6. Choose an option in the Method field.

7. Sight the target and then tap Measure.

The Station setup residuals screen appears.

See the following sections for more information on what do next.

Tip - Select

Interrupted target measurement if the measurement is likely to be interrupted, for

example, when measuring in traffic.

Skipping observations

When using Automate rounds you can configure the software to automatically skip obstructed foresight targets.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is enabled, it skips that point and moves onto the next point in the rounds list.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is disabled, a message appears after

60 seconds to indicate that the prism is obstructed.

The General Survey software continues to try to measure to the target until instructed to skip the point. To do this, tap Ok for the obstructed prism message, tap Pause and then tap Skip.

When the General Survey software reaches the end of a rounds list in which points have been skipped, the following message appears:

Observe skipped points?

Tap Yes to observe the points that were skipped during that round. The observations can be skipped again if required. Tap No to end the round.

If a point is skipped in one round, all subsequent rounds continue to prompt for observations to that point.

When one observation from a pair of face 1 and face 2 observations has been skipped, the unused observation is automatically deleted by the General Survey software. Deleted observations are stored in the General

Survey database and can be undeleted. Undeleted observations can be processed in the office software, but are not automatically used to recompute Mean Turned Angle (MTA) records in the General Survey software.

Backsight observations cannot be skipped using the Skip obstructed foresights option.

Station setup - Residuals screen

The Station setup residuals screen lists the residuals for each point observed in the station setup.

Use the Station setup residuals screen to do the following:

187

•

To observe more points, tap + Point. In a conventional only survey, when one measurement is completed, the General Survey software can provide navigation information for further points, and a

Navigate softkey is available. Tap Navigate to navigate to another point. If connected to a GNSS /

GPS receiver or using a Trimble controller with internal GPS, the General Survey software can provide navigation information for any point, and a Navigate softkey is available. Tap Navigate to

• navigate to another point.

To view the Station setup results, tap Results.

•

To store the station setup, tap Results and then tap Store.

•

To view/edit the details of a point, highlight the point and then tap Details.

•

To view/edit the residuals of each individual observation to a point, tap the point in the list once.

•

To start measuring rounds of observations to the points, tap End face.

Tips

•

To highlight an item in a list, tap and hold the item for at least half a second.

•

To sort a column in ascending or descending order, tap the column header. Tap the Point column

• header to sort the point in ascending or descending observed order.

To change the residual display view, select an option from the drop-down list in the Residuals screen.

•

To navigate to a point, tap + Point and then tap Navigate.

Notes

•

A residual is the difference between the known position and the observed position of the backsight

• point(s).

A foresight point that does not yet exist in the database has null residuals in the Residuals form.

•

You cannot add the same point to a station setup more than once. To take further measurements to points already measured, select End Face. For more information, see

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection.

Point - Residuals screen

The Point residuals screen lists the residuals for each observation to a point in the station setup.

Use the Point residuals screen to do the following:

•

To disable an observation, highlight it and then tap Use.

•

To view the details of an observation, highlight it and then tap Details.

•

To return to the Station setup residuals screen, tap Back.

Note - If you have measured face 1 and face 2 observations to a point, turning off the observation for one face will also turn off the observation for the other face.

Warning - If you turn off some (but not all) of the observations to a backsight point, the solution for the resection will be biased. There will be a different number of observations to each backsight point.

Point details screen

Use the Point details screen to:

188

• view the mean observation for a point in the station setup

• change the target height and/or prism constant for all observations to a point

Station setup results screen

The Station setup results screen shows information about the station setup solution.

Use the Station setup results screen to:

• return to the Station Setup Residuals screen (tap Esc)

• store the station setup (tap Store)

Note - During a Station setup plus, nothing is stored in the job until you tap Store in the Results screen.

Station setup is complete.

For more information, see:

•

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection

•

Advanced Geodetics support

•

Conventional surveys

•

Resection

•

Traverse

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection

This topic describes how to measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations during a Station setup plus or

Resection.

A round can consist of either:

• a set of single face 1 observations

• a set of matched face 1 and face 2 observations

Using Station setup plus or Resection, measure the points that you want to include in the rounds. When the rounds list has been built, tap End Face.

General Survey software:

•

Directs you to change face when required. With servo-driven instruments, this happens

• automatically.

Defaults to the correct point details for each observed point.

•

Displays the results. This allows you to delete bad data.

For more details, see:

189

•

Building a rounds list

•

Measuring rounds of observations

•

Skipping observations

•

Residuals screen

•

Point - Residuals screen

•

Point details screen

•

Automated rounds

Building a rounds list

The rounds list contains the points used in the rounds observations. As each point is added to a Station setup

plus or Resection, General Survey software automatically builds this list. For more information, see Station setup plus

or Resection.

When the rounds list is complete, tap End face . General Survey software prompts you for the next point to be measured in the rounds of observations.

Notes

•

You can not edit the rounds list. Before you tap End face, be sure to observe all points to include in

• the rounds observations.

The top of the Measure rounds screen shows which face the instrument is on, the number of the current round, and the total number of rounds to be measured (shown in brackets). For example, Face

•

1 (1/3) shows that the instrument is on face 1 of the first round of three.

Within Station setup plus or Resection, the maximum number of points in a round is 25.

Measuring rounds of observations

Once the rounds list has been built, tap End face. General Survey software enters the default point name and target information for the next point in the rounds. To measure a point, tap Measure. Repeat this until all observations in the round are completed.

When all observations are complete, General Survey software shows the Residuals screen.

Notes

•

When using servo or robotic instruments, check that the instrument has sighted the target accurately.

Manually adjust it if necessary. Some instruments can perform accurate sighting automatically. For

• information on the instrument specifications, refer to the instrument manufacturer's documentation.

If you are using a servo or robotic instrument to measure a known (coordinated) point, tap Turn.

Alternatively, with a servo instrument, set the Servo auto turn field in the survey style to HA & VA, or

•

HA only to automatically turn the instrument to the point.

If you tap Esc in the Measure screen, the current round is discarded.

Skipping observations

When using Automate rounds you can configure the software to automatically skip obstructed foresight targets.

190

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is enabled, it skips that point and moves onto the next point in the rounds list.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is disabled, a message appears after

60 seconds to indicate that the prism is obstructed.

The General Survey software continues to try to measure to the target until instructed to skip the point. To do this, tap Ok for the obstructed prism message, tap Pause and then tap Skip.

When the General Survey software reaches the end of a rounds list in which points have been skipped, the following message appears:

Observe skipped points?

Tap Yes to observe the points that were skipped during that round. The observations can be skipped again if required. Tap No to end the round.

If a point is skipped in one round, all subsequent rounds continue to prompt for observations to that point.

Backsight observations cannot be skipped using the Skip obstructed foresights option.

Residuals screen

At the end of each round, the Residuals screen appears. For more information, see

Station setup plus

Resection.

After you measure rounds, Std Dev becomes available in the Residuals screen. To view the standard deviations of the observations for each point, tap Std Dev.

Notes

•

To change the residual display view, use the drop-down list in the Residuals screen.

•

During a station setup plus or resection, nothing is stored to the job until you tap Close and Store to complete the station setup.

Point - Residuals screen

The Point - Residuals screen shows the residuals for the individual observations to a particular point. For

more information, see Station setup plus or

Resection.

Note - If you have measured both face 1 and face 2 observations to a point, when you turn off a face 1 observation, you also turn off the corresponding face 2 observation. Similarly, when you turn off a face 2 observation, you also turn off the corresponding face 1 observation.

191

Point details screen

The Point details screen shows the point name, code, backsight status, target height, prism constant, mean observation, and standard errors for the observed point. For more information, see

Station setup plus

Resection.

Automated rounds

The Automate rounds option is available for Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station and

5600 instruments. When you select Automate rounds, the instrument automatically completes all rounds after the rounds list has been built.

If you tap + Round after the instrument has completed the required number of rounds, the instrument performs one more round of observations. If you want the instrument to perform more than one extra round, enter the total number of required rounds before you tap + Round.

For example, to measure three rounds automatically, and then measure another three rounds:

1. Enter 3 in the Number of rounds field.

2. Once the instrument has measured 3 rounds, enter 6 in the Number of rounds field.

3. Tap + Round. The instrument measures the second group of 3 rounds.

Note - Targets observed without Autolock are automatically paused.

Station Elevation

In a conventional survey, use the station elevation function to determine the elevation of the instrument point by making observations to points with known elevations.

Note - Use only points that can be viewed as grid coordinates. (The station elevation calculation is a grid calculation.)

A station elevation needs at least one of the following:

• one angles and distance observation to a known point, or

• two angles only observations to different points

To perform a station elevation:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. Select Measure / Station elevation. The instrument point name and code appear. If you entered the instrument height during the station setup, that also appears. Otherwise, enter the instrument height now. Tap Accept.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total

192

station, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and then select Bottom notch. Enter the height measured to the top ridge of the bottom notch on the instrument.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518

sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

3. Enter the point name, code, and target details for the point with the known elevation. Tap Measure.

Once the measurement is stored, the Point residuals appear.

4. From the Point residuals screen, tap one of the following softkeys:

♦

+ Point, to observe additional known points

♦

Details, to view or edit point details

♦

Use, to enable or disable a point

5. To view the station elevation result, tap Results in the Point residuals screen. To accept the result, tap

Store.

Note - The elevation determined through this station elevation method overwrites any existing elevation for the instrument point.

Resection

In a conventional survey, the resection function is used to perform a station setup and determine coordinates for an unknown point by making observations to known backsight points. The General Survey software uses a least-squares algorithm to compute the resection.

Note - To determine the elevation of a point with known 2D coordinates, perform a station elevation once you have completed a station setup.

A resection needs at least one of the following:

•

Two angles and distance observations to different backsight points

•

Three angles-only observations to different backsight points

•

One angles and distance observation to a close-by point and one angles-only observation to a backsight point. This is a special case called eccentric station setup.

Warning - Do not compute a resection point using WGS84 control and then change the coordinate system or perform a site calibration. If you do, the resection point will be inconsistent with the new coordinate system.

For more details, see:

•

Performing a resection

•

Resection - Residuals screen

193

•

Point - Residuals screen

•

Point details screen

•

Resection results screen

•

Eccentric station setup

Performing a resection

To perform a resection:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / <Style name> / Resection.

Note - If you have only one style, it is automatically selected.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options and then select the Show corrections on startup check box.

3. Enter an instrument point name and instrument height, if applicable.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518

sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

Note - Once the resection is started you cannot enter a different instrument height.

4. Set the Compute station elevation check box and then tap Accept.

Note - For a 2D or planimetric survey, clear the Compute station elevation check box. No elevations is calculated

Warning - Before you continue, tap Options and make sure that the Face order setting is correct.

You cannot change this setting after you start measuring points.

5. Enter the first backsight point name and the target height, if applicable.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow (

) and then select Bottom notch.

Note - In a resection, you can only use backsight points that can be viewed as grid coordinates. This is because the resection calculation is a grid calculation.

194

If you perform a Resection or Station setup plus while running an Integrated Survey,

you can measure backsight points with GNSS. To do this, tap the Options softkey and then select Auto measure GNSS.

Enter an unknown point name in the point name field. The General Survey software prompts you to measure the point with GNSS using the specified point name. The Measure softkey shows both a prism and a GNSS symbol. The General Survey software first measures the point with GNSS and then measures with the conventional instrument.

Make sure that you have a site calibration loaded when combining conventional and GNSS measurements.

6. Choose an option in the Method field.

7. Sight the target and then tap Measure.

8. Measure further points.

Note - To include foresight points during resection, clear the Backsight check box. Foresight points do not contribute to the resection result.

In a conventional survey, when two measurements are completed, the General Survey software can provide navigation information for further points, and a Navigate softkey is available. Tap Navigate to navigate to another point.

If connected to a GNSS / GPS receiver or using a Trimble controller with internal GPS, the General

Survey software can provide navigation information for any point, and a Navigate softkey is available. Tap Navigate to navigate to another point.

9. When there is enough data for the General Survey software to calculate a resected position, the

Resection residuals screen appears.

Tip - Select

Interrupted target measurement if the measurement is likely to be interrupted, for

example, when measuring in traffic.

Resection - Residuals screen

The Resection residuals screen lists the residuals for each point observed in the resection.

Use the Resection residuals screen to do the following:

•

To observe more points, tap + Point.

•

To view the resection results, tap Close.

•

To store the resection, tap Close and then tap Store.

•

To view/edit the details of a point, highlight the point and then tap Details.

•

To view/edit the residuals of each individual observation to a point, tap the point in the list once.

•

To start measuring rounds of observations to the points, tap End face.

Tips

•

To highlight an item in a list, tap and hold the item for at least half a second.

•

To sort a column in ascending or descending order, tap the column header. Tap the Point column

• header to sort the point in ascending or descending observed order.

To change the residual display view, select an option from the drop-down list in the Residuals screen.

195

Notes

•

A residual is the difference between the known position and the observed position of the backsight

• point(s).

A foresight point that does not yet exist in the database has null residuals in the Residuals form.

•

You cannot add the same point to a resection more than once. To take further measurements to points

already measured, select End Face. For more information, see Measuring Rounds in Station setup

•

plus or Resection.

Within Station setup plus or Resection, the maximum number of points in a round is 25.

Point - Residuals screen

The Point residuals screen lists the residuals for each observation to a point in the resection.

Use the Point residuals screen to do the following:

•

To disable an observation, highlight it and then tap Use.

•

To view the details of an observation, highlight it and then tap Details.

•

To return back to the Resection residuals screen, tap Back.

Note - If you have measured face 1 and face 2 observations to a point, turning off the observation for one face will also turn off the observation to the other face.

Warning - If you turn off some (but not all) of the observations to a backsight point, the solution for the resection will be biased because there will be a different number of observations to each backsight point.

Point details screen

The Point details screen shows the mean observation for a point in the resection.

Use the Point details screen to do the following:

• change whether the horizontal component or the vertical component of a point will be used in the

• resection calculation change the target height and/or prism constant for all observations to that point

Note - You can only change which components of a point will be used in the resection calculation if you have selected the compute station elevation option, and the observed point has a 3D grid position.

The Used for field shows the point components used in the resection calculation. See the following table.

Option

H (2D)

V (1D)

H,V (3D)

Description

Use only the horizontal values for that point in the calculation

Use only the vertical values for that point in the calculation

Use both the horizontal and vertical values for that point in the calculation

196

Resection results screen

The Resection results screen shows information about the resection solution.

Use the Resection results screen to do the following:

•

To return to the Resection residuals screen, tap Esc.

•

To store the resection, tap Store.

Note - During a resection, nothing is stored in the job until you tap Store in the Results screen.

Resection is complete.

Eccentric station setup

You can use the resection function to perform an eccentric station setup, where the station setup is performed in view of a close-by control point and in view of at least one backsight point. For example, use this setup if you cannot set up over the control point, or you cannot see any backsight points from the control point.

An eccentric station setup needs at least one angles and distance observation to a close-by control point, and one angles-only observation to a backsight point. Additional backsight points can also be observed during an eccentric station setup. You can measure backsight points with angles-only observations or with angles and distance observations.

For more information, see:

•

Measuring Rounds in Station setup plus or Resection

•

Advanced Geodetics support

•

Conventional Surveys

•

Station setup plus

•

Traverse

Refline

Refline is the process of establishing the position of an occupied point relative to a baseline. To perform a refline station establishment, take measurements to two known or unknown baseline definition points. Once this occupation point is defined, all subsequent points are stored in terms of the baseline using station and offset. This method is often used when setting out buildings parallel to other objects or boundaries.

To perform a Refline station setup:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / <Style name> / Refline.

Set the corrections associated with the instrument.

If the Corrections form does not appear, tap Options and then select the Show corrections on startup check box.

197

3. Enter an Instrument point name and Instrument height, if applicable.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518

sft) to calculate true vertical to the trunnion axis.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300

meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

4. Tap Accept.

5. Enter the Point 1 name, and Target height.

•

If point 1 has known coordinates, the coordinates are displayed.

•

If point 1 does not have known coordinates, default coordinates are used. Select Options to change the default coordinates.

6. Tap Meas 1 to measure the first point.

7. Enter the Point 2 name, and Target height.

•

If point 1 has known coordinates, a point with known coordinates can be used for point 2.

•

If point 1 does not have known coordinates then a point with known coordinates can not be used at

• point 2.

If point 1 does not have known coordinates, the default coordinates are used. Select Options to change

• the default coordinates.

If point 1 and point 2 had known coordinates the computed refline azimuth is displayed, otherwise the default azimuth 0° is displayed.

8. Enter a Refline azimuth, if applicable.

9. Tap Meas 2 to measure the second point.

The instrument point coordinates are displayed.

10. Tap Store to complete the refline station establishment.

Once the Refline setup is stored, all subsequent points are stored in terms of the baseline as a station and offset.

If a line does not already exist, one is automatically created between the two points, using the naming scheme "<Point 1 name>-<Point 2 name>". You can enter the Start station and Station interval.

If the line between the two points does already exist, the existing station is used and cannot be modified.

Note - In a refline station establishment, you can only use existing points that can be viewed as grid coordinates. This is because the refline calculation is a grid calculation. You can use 2D and 3D grid coordinates to define the baseline.

198

Measure Rounds

This topic describes how to measure multiple sets (rounds) of observations with a conventional instrument and the General Survey software.

A round can consist of one of the following:

• a set of single face 1 observations

• multiple sets of single face 1 observations

• a set of matched face 1 and face 2 observations

• multiple sets of matched face 1 and face 2 observations

Rounds can be used in a number of different ways depending on your equipment, the accessibility of points, and the procedures to observe the points, such as the order in which the observations are made.

To measure rounds of observations:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure rounds.

3. Tap Options to

configure

the rounds options.

Before you start measuring points, make sure that the Face order and Sets per point settings are correct. You cannot change these settings after you start measuring points.

Manually build the rounds list by observing each point to include in the round on the first face.

5. Measure all points for subsequent rounds.

When all observations are complete, General Survey software shows the Standard deviations screen.

7. Tap Close to save and exit rounds.

Notes

•

When using servo or robotic instruments, check that the instrument has sighted the target accurately.

Manually adjust it if necessary. Some instruments can perform accurate sighting automatically. For

• information on the instrument specifications, refer to the instrument manufacturer's documentation.

Select Interrupted target measurement if the measurement is likely to be interrupted, for example,

• when measuring in traffic.

If you measure to static targets when there are two prisms close together, use FineLock or Long

Range FineLock technology.

♦

With a Trimble S8 total station equipped with FineLock technology, you can use

FineLock

♦ mode when measuring to a prism that is 20 m - 700 m away.

With a Trimble S8 total station equipped with Long Range FineLock technology, you can use

Long Range FineLock mode when measuring to a prism that is 250 m - 2500 m away.

•

If you are using a servo or robotic instrument to measure a known (coordinated) point, tap Turn.

Alternatively, with a servo instrument, set the Servo auto turn field in the survey style to HA & VA, or

•

HA only to automatically turn the instrument to the point.

If you tap Esc in the Measure screen, the current round is discarded.

•

The top of the Measure rounds screen shows the following:

♦ the current face observations

199

♦ when you use more than one set per point, the number of the current set and the total number

♦ of sets to be measured (shown in brackets) the number of the current round the total number of rounds to be measured (shown in brackets)

For example, "Face 1 (2/2) (1/3)" shows that the instrument is on face 1 of the second set of two sets and the first of three rounds.

Building the rounds list manually

When you manually build the rounds list, the General Survey software automatically adds each point to the internal rounds list as it is measured for the first time. The rounds list contains all the information about each point such as point name, code, target height, prism constant, and target ID.

To manually add a point to the rounds list, and then measure rounds:

1. Choose to include or exclude the backsight observation.

Measure 3D axes

To measure a point relative to a 3D axis using General Survey and a conventional instrument:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

202

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure 3D axes.

3. Key in or measure the two points that define a 3D axis.

Tip - To measure a point, tap the pop-up menu button on the point name field and select Measure from the list of options displayed.

4. Tap Options to select the format of the delta display for the points measured relative to the axis.

The content and format of the delta display is controlled by XSLT style sheets. Translated default

XSLT Measure 3D Axes Style Sheet (*.3ds) files are included with the language files, and accessed by General Survey from the language folders. You can create new formats in the office and then copy them to the [Systems files] folder on the controller.

5. Tap Next.

The instrument is automatically put into TRK mode. When General Survey receives a distance, the deltas fields are automatically updated.

If you are not measuring to a prism, use Instrument functions to set DR mode.

You can accept the TRK measurement, or tap Measure to take an STD measurement.

The General Survey software reports the coordinates and elevation for the measured point, and the orthogonal and vertical deltas for the point relative to the 3D axis. The following diagram and table describes the reported deltas using the default format.

1 Point 1 defining the 3D axis 5 Vertical offset to vertical point on 3D axis

2 Point 2 defining the 3D axis 6 Radial offset to vertical point on 3D axis

3 Measured point 7 Perpendicular offset to orthogonal point on 3D axis

4 Horizontal offset to 3D axis 8 Radial offset to orthogonal point on 3D axis

General Survey also reports the:

♦ distance from Point 1 and Point 2 to the calculated orthogonal point on the 3D axis

♦ distance from Point 1 and Point 2 to the calculated vertical point on the 3D axis

♦ coordinates and elevation for the calculated orthogonal and vertical points on the 3D axis

6. To store the measurement, enter a Point name, and a Code , if required, and then tap Store.

You can continue to measure and store additional points.

203

Tip - Tap Back to define a new 3D axis or to change the deltas display format.

Notes

♦

Descriptions and Attributes are not supported.

♦

The style sheet that you selected in Measure / Measure 3D axes is used when displaying 3D

♦ axes records in Jobs / Review job.

If points 1 and 2 define a vertical axis, all vertical deltas show as null (?).

Station setup plus, Resection, and Rounds Options

There are up to four main settings that control the order in which the observations are taken, and how many observations are made during Station setup plus, Resection, and Rounds:

•

•

•

•

Face order options

•

F1 only - observations are taken only on face 1

•

F1... F2... - all face 1 observations are taken to all points and then all face 2 observations are taken to

• all points

F1/F2... - face 1 and then face 2 observations are taken to the first point, face 1 and then face 2 observations are taken to the next point, and so on

Observation order options

•

123.. 123

•

123.. 321

When the Face order is set to F1... F2... :

•

123.. 123 - observations on face 2 are taken in the same order as the observations on face 1

•

123.. 321 - observations on face 2 are taken in the reverse order to the observations on face 1

When the Face order is set to F1 only or F1/F2 :

•

123.. 123 - each round of observations is taken in the same order

•

123.. 321 - every alternate round of observations is taken in the opposite order

Sets per point option

This option can be used to measure multiple sets of face 1 observations, or face 1 and face 2 observations to a point per round of observations.

204

If Face order is set to collect F1 and F2 observations, the Sets per point was set to 3, and the Number of

rounds was set to 1, then the total number of observations to each point would be; 2 x 3 x 1 = 6. Setting the

Sets per point option to a number greater than 1 enables you to collect more than one set of observations to a point with only one visit to that location.

This option is currently available only in rounds.

Note - Before using this option please make sure this data collection technique matches your QA/QC requirements.

Number of rounds option

This option controls the number of complete rounds of observations that are are taken to each point.

Skipping Observations

When using Automate rounds you can configure the software to automatically skip obstructed foresight targets.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is enabled, it skips that point and moves onto the next point in the rounds list.

If the instrument cannot measure the point and Skip obstructed foresights is disabled, a message appears after

60 seconds to indicate that the prism is obstructed.

The General Survey software continues to try to measure to the target until instructed to skip the point. To do this, tap Ok for the obstructed prism message, tap Pause and then tap Skip.

When the General Survey software reaches the end of a rounds list in which points have been skipped, the following message appears:

Observe skipped points?

Tap Yes to observe the points that were skipped during that round. The observations can be skipped again if required. Tap No to end the round.

If a point is skipped in one round, all subsequent rounds continue to prompt for observations to that point.

Backsight observations cannot be skipped using the Skip obstructed foresights option.

Automate rounds

The Automate rounds option is available for Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station and

5600 instruments. When you select Automate rounds, the instrument automatically completes all rounds after

205

the rounds list has been built.

A 3-second delay between automated rounds enables you to check the standard deviations before the next round starts automatically.

If a target has been blocked, the instrument tries to measure the point for up to 60 seconds. After 60 seconds has elapsed it skips the observation and moves to the next point in the rounds list.

For example, to measure three rounds automatically, and then measure another three rounds:

1. Enter 3 in the Number of rounds field.

2. Once the instrument has measured 3 rounds, enter 6 in the Number of rounds field.

3. Tap + Round. The instrument measures the second group of 3 rounds.

Note - Manually observed targets are automatically paused.

Monitoring

When Automated rounds is enabled, monitoring controls are also enabled. Enter a value for the time delay between automated rounds.

With a Trimble 5600 or Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, you can automatically measure to non-active targets. To do this, select the Auto-measure passive targets check box.

Note - If you select the Auto-measure passive targets check box, manually observed targets are automatically measured rather than paused. If you clear this check box, the software prompts you to aim the instrument to non-active targets.

Continuous topo - Conventional

Use the Continuous topo function to measure points continuously.

A point is stored when one of the following conditions occurs:

• a predefined time has elapsed

• a predefined distance has been exceeded

• both predefined time and/or distance settings have been met

• a predefined stop time and distance settings have been met

To measure Continuous topo points:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

206

2. From the main menu, select Measure / Continuous topo.

3. Enter a value in the Start point name field. This increments automatically.

4. Enter a value in the Target height field.

5. In the Method field, select Fixed distance, Fixed time, Time and distance, or Time or Distance.

6. Enter a value in the Distance field and/or the Time interval field, depending on which method you are using.

7. Tap Start to start recording data and then move along the feature to be surveyed.

8. To stop measuring continuous points, tap End.

Tip - To store a position before the predefined conditions have been met, tap Store.

Synchronous and non-synchronous angles and distances

Continuous topo with a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station uses only synchronous angles and distances.

When using any other instrument with Continuous topo, for example a Trimble 5600 total station, the

General Survey software uses the latest angles and the latest distance when it stores a position. When a synchronized angle and distance is not available (within approximately 1 second) a newer angle may be paired with an older distance. To minimize any potential position error, you may need to slow the prism movement during Continuous topo.

To measure Continuous topo points using the Stop and go method:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the main menu, select Measure / Continuous topo.

3. Enter a value in the Start point name field. This increments automatically.

4. Enter a value in the Target height field.

5. In the Method field select Stop and go.

6. Enter a value in the Stop time field for the period of time the target must be stationary before the instrument starts to measure the point.

The user is deemed to be stationary when their velocity is less than 5 cm/sec.

7. Enter a value in the Distance field for the minimum distance between points.

When you use an instrument that has a tracklight that has been enabled, the tracklight will be disabled for 2 seconds when the measured point has been stored.

Using an Echo sounder to store depths

You can use Continuous topo to store depths with measured points.

To configure the survey style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Tap Echo sounder.

207

Select an instrument from the Type field.

4. Configure the Controller port:

♦

If you set the Controller port to Bluetooth, you must configure the Echo sounder bluetooth

♦ settings.

If you set the Controller port to COM1 or COM2, you must configure the port settings.

5. If required, enter the Latency and Draft and then tap Accept.

The latency caters for echo sounders where the depth is received by the controller after the position.

General Survey software uses the latency to match and store the depth when it is received with continuous topo points that were saved previously.

6. Tap Accept and then tap Store to save the changes.

To store continuous topo points with depths, follow the steps above to

Measure continuous topo points, while

connected to the echo sounder with a correctly configured survey style.

Notes

•

During the survey, you can disable storing depths with continuous topo points. To do this, tap Options and then clear the Use echo sounder check box. You can also configure Latency and Draft from

•

Options.

The Draft affects how the target height is measured. If the Draft is 0.00, the target height is the distance from the transducer to the prism. If a Draft is specified, the target height is the distance from the transducer to the prism, minus the draft.

When measuring continuous topo points with an echo sounder enabled, a depth is displayed during continuous topo, and also in the map. When a latency has been configured the continuous topo points are initially stored without depths and later updated. The depth that is displayed during continuous topo when a latency has been configured, is an indicator that depths are being received. The depths that are displayed may not be the depths that are stored with the point names that are displayed at the same time.

Caution - There are many factors involved in correctly pairing positions with accurate depths. These include sound velocity - which varies with water temperature and salinity, hardware processing time, and the speed at which the boat is moving. Make sure that you use the appropriate techniques to achieve the required results.

The elevations of continuous topo points stored in General Survey software do not have the depth applied to them. Use Export custom format files to generate reports with depths applied.

The following sample reports are available for download from www.trimble.com:

•

[Survey report.xsl]

•

[Comma Delimited with elevation and depths.xsl]

•

[Comma Delimited with depth applied.xsl]

Note - If a Sonarmite instrument is connected, General Survey software configures it to use the correct output format and mode. For an instrument from another manufacturer, you must manually configure it to use the correct output format.

208

Scanning

Surface scanning is an automated direct reflex (DR) measuring process where measurements are automatically stored along a remote surface that you have defined.

Notes

•

The Scanning option is available only when connected to a Trimble VX Spatial Station.

•

Scanning is not available when the General Survey software is connected through Bluetooth wireless

• technology.

Scanning is not available when the General Survey software is connected through a serial cable connection.

For more details, see:

•

•

•

•

Starting a scan

To perform a scan using General Survey:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Scanning.

3. Define the area for the scan. Use one of the following methods, and see below for preset buttons that you can use.

Polygon framing:

1. If is displayed, tap to set the Polygon framing mode.

2. Tap on the video screen to define the first corner of the polygon.

3. Tap again on the video screen to define the second vertex. You must enter at least three vertices to define a polygon scan frame.

4. If required, drag-and-drop the last vertex to move it, or select the vertex and then tap undo (

) to remove it. You can do this only with the last vertex.

Rectangular framing:

1. If is displayed, tap to set the Rectangular framing mode.

2. Tap on the video screen to define the first corner of the scan rectangle.

3. Tap again on the video screen to define the opposite corner of the scan area.

4. If required, drag-and-drop the vertices, or click and drag the sides of the scan frame to resize

4. Define the point density for the scan area: a. the scan rectangle.

Tap scan properties ( ).

209

b. Define the scan properties. Select one of the following methods:

◊

Horizontal and vertical distance interval at a given distance

◊

Horizontal and vertical angle interval

◊

Total number of points in the scan

◊

Time to complete c. Enter the parameters to define the scan density.

5. Select the Scanning mode:

♦

High speed scans up to 15 points per second to a maximum range of about 150 m.

♦

Long range (TRK) scans with the EDM in TRK mode and scans up to 2 points per second to a

♦ maximum range of about 300 m.

Long range (STD) scans with the EDM in STD mode and scans up to 1 point per second to a maximum range of about 300 m.

6. Specify the EDM timeout.

7. Tap Start.

Notes

•

The camera is not coaxial with the telescope. For accurate framing at close range, define the At

•

distance setting, which helps to draw the scanning frame in the correct position.

The time to complete a scan is an estimate only. Actual scan times will vary depending on the surface

• or object being scanned.

Scan time is increased if there are areas within the scan that will not return an EDM signal. Where

• possible, try to minimize blank space in the scan area.

Higher speed scans can result in more skipped points. Select a scanning mode appropriate to the

• object you are scanning.

Defining the scanning grid through distance intervals assumes that the scanning object is a constant

• distance from the instrument. In other cases, the scan points will not constitute an even grid.

When you perform a scan with the Trimble VX Spatial Station through a robotic connection, Trimble recommends that you stay within the range of the radio link to ensure that all necessary data is collected successfully. If you lose the radio link, the remainder of the current scan line will be

• skipped.

You can scan a full 360° horizontally. The vertical range is approximately between 3°36' (4 gon) and

•

150° (166 gon).

Make sure that the Maximum distance that you configured in Instrument / EDM Settings is set high

• enough to achieve the required scanning range.

When using long range scanning mode, intensity information is not available and is not saved to the

.tsf file.

You can use the preset buttons to help you define the scan area.

These preset buttons are available for Polygon framing:

Softkey Function

Toggles between rectangular and polygon framing mode.

When selected, the polygon framed area is shaded red.

Deletes the scan frame from the screen. When the 'cross' is grey, the delete function is not available.

210

Undoes the previous vertex. When the 'arrow' is grey, the undo function is not available.

These preset buttons available for Rectangular framing:

Softkey Function

Toggles between rectangular and polygon framing mode.

Toggles between the current frame and the complement of the current frame. Tap this button to change the horizontal extents of the scan so that the horizontal scan area is the opposite of the original frame; it is the larger part of the horizontal circle. The vertical extents of the scan area do not change.

Toggles between the current frame and the complement of the current frame. Tap this button to change the horizontal extents of the scan so that the horizontal scan area is the original frame; it is the smaller part of the horizontal circle. The vertical extents of the scan area do not change.

Automatically defines a rectangle from the highest to lowest vertical angles in the current horizontal position. To resize the scan frame, drag one of its sides or vertices. This is useful for quick-framing an object (for example, a facade), in front of the instrument.

Automatically defines a large horizontal rectangle through the majority of the horizontal circle. To resize the scan frame, drag one of its sides or vertices. This is useful for quick-framing an object that surrounds the instrument.

Deletes the scan frame from the screen. When the 'cross' is grey, the delete function is not available.

Undoes the previous vertex. When the 'arrow' is grey, the undo function is not available.

You can capture the image displayed in the video frame of the scanning window.

Softkey Function

Links to the Scan Properties form where you can define the parameters of the scan. You can define the density of scan points within the frame area by distance intervals, angle intervals, the total number of points, or the scan time. You can also select the Scanning mode and specify the EDM timeout.

Controls the brightness of the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Controls the contrast of the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Controls the level of white balance in the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Set the file name. File names are automatically incremented from the start file name.

Set the image size. The image captured is always the same as the video display on screen. Not all image sizes are available at all zoom levels.

Set the compression of the image. The higher the quality of the image, the larger the file size of the captured image.

Captures an extra large (XL) image (2048x1536). XL is available only when zoomed to extents 1:1.

Captures a large (L) image (1024x768). L is available only when zoomed out to extents 1:1 and 2:1.

211

Captures a medium (M) image (512x384). M is available only when zoomed in to 1:1, 2:1, and 4:1.

Captures a small (S) image (256x192). S is available regardless of the zoom level.

Launches the Panorama function where you can automatically capture multiple images for a defined scan frame. Define the Image size and Compression, enable Fixed exposure to fix the exposure to the settings at the time you tap Start, define the Image overlap and then tap Start to begin taking the images.

Tip - The exposure is fixed when you select Start. When using the Panorama function with Fixed

exposure enabled, point the Trimble VX Spatial Station to the location that defines the camera exposure that you want used for all panoramic images and then tap Start.

You can navigate/zoom around the video frame in the scanning window. The navigation controls are as follows.

Softkey Function

Zoom in. There are four levels of zoom available in the video window.

Zoom out. There are four levels of zoom available in the video window.

Activate tap-and-move functionality in the video window.

Zoom out to the full extents.

Display point clouds controls the option to display the point cloud over the scan.

Options

Color controls the color

of the point cloud.

Point size controls the width of the pixel displayed in the point cloud.

Point cloud color

Color

Cloud color

Station color

Scan color

Show points...

with the color of the clouds they belong to with the color of the stations they belong to with the color of the scans they belong to

Grey scale intensity using the gray scale defined by their intensity

Color coded intensity using the color encoded intensity

Progress information

During a scan, progress information appears in the scanning window. For every point in the scan, a colored square appears on screen.

•

The color of the square indicates the measured distance to the point. A nearby point is red, compared

• to a point further away which is blue.

The brightness of the square indicates the intensity of the returned EDM signal. The brighter the

• square, the better (more intense) the signal.

A black square indicates that no measurement was able to be taken at that location.

•

The size of the squares depends upon the number of points in the scan. The smaller the square, the more points in the scan. When the scan is completed, the points will cover the maximum possible

212

area; so a tall, narrow scan area, that does not fit the screen size well, appears with black strips on each side of the drawn scan points.

The status line provides progress information on:

•

The percentage of scan completed.

•

The number of points scanned.

•

The estimated time remaining. This is updated as the scan progresses to reflect the current scan speed and is dependant on the surface of the object in the scan.

While a scan is in progress:

•

You cannot edit scan properties. To view the properties, tap the scan properties button.

•

Other instrument/survey functions are disabled. If you need to access a survey or instrument function

• during a scan, you must pause the scan, perform the operation and then continue the scan.

You cannot access the video window. You must first complete the scan and then close the scanning window.

Ending a scan

When the scan is completed, the Pause / Continue softkey changes to Finish. Tap Finish or Esc to end the scan.

To cancel a scan that is in progress, tap Esc and then tap yes. The scanning record and associated TSF file will still be written if you manually cancel a scan.

Notes

•

Scanned points are not stored in the General Survey job file; they are written to a TSF file that is

•

stored in the current project folder.

If a scan contains over 100,000 points, the points will not appear in the map or in point manager.

•

You can import the General Survey JOB or JXL file into the Trimble RealWorks Survey software. If associated TSF and JPEG files are stored in the same

project folder

as the JOB or JXL file, they are

• imported at the same time.

When creating DC files, either on the controller or when downloading the file with office software such as Trimble Geomatics Office or the Trimble Data Transfer utility, the data from the TSF file(s)

• associated with the job is inserted into the DC file as regular conventional observations.

To transfer JPEG files from the Trimble CU in the docking station to the office computer, use the

USB-to-Hirose cable.

•

You cannot use the DB9-to-Hirose serial cable to transfer JPEG files.

Once the scan is completed, the name of the scan file, and the scan properties, are stored in the

General Survey job file.

Tips

•

When a scan is completed or cancelled, the last used frame area is retained in the scanning video window. To rescan the same area, edit the scan properties (if required) and then tap Start.

213

Surface Scan

Surface scanning is an automated direct reflex (DR) measuring process where measurements are automatically stored along a remote surface that you have defined.

The Surface scan option is not available when connected to a Trimble VX Spatial Station. Use Scanning when

connected to a Trimble VX Spatial Station.

To perform a surface scan using General Survey:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Survey menu, select Surface scan.

3. Enter the Start point name and code (if necessary).

4. In the Method field, select a measurement method.

5. Define the area for the scan and grid interval.

6. Tap the instrument icon to access Instrument functions and set the EDM measurement method (TRK is fastest).

The total number of points to scan, scan grid dimensions, and estimated scan time are displayed.

Change the scan size, step sizes or EDM measurement method to increase or decrease the number of points and scan time.

7. Tap Start.

To define the scan area, do one of the following:

•

If the point already exists, enter the point name, or use menu arrow to select it from the list.

•

From the pop-up menu in the Top left and Bottom right fields select Fast fix or Measure to measure and store points that define the limits of the search.

Define the scan area with one of the following methods.

HA VA interval - Use this method on complex surfaces when you cannot use a rectangular plane to approximate the surface you are scanning (see the following diagram):

1. Aim to the top left corner of the scan area (1) and measure a point.

2. Aim to the bottom right corner of the scan area (2) and measure another point.

3. Define the angular grid interval, where:

3 is the Horizontal angle

4 is the Vertical angle

214

Tip - To define a Horizontal only scan of a 360° scan area, set the Top left and Bottom right points to the same name, and set the VA interval to null.

Rectangular plane - Use this method on a plane surface where you need a regular grid interval. General

Survey determines the angle of the plane, and uses this and the grid interval to approximate how far to turn the instrument for each subsequent point (see the following diagram):

1. Aim to the first corner of the scan area (1) and measure a point.

2. Aim to the second corner of the scan area (2) and measure another point.

3. Aim to the third point on the opposite side of the plane (3) and measure a point.

4. Define the distance grid interval, where:

4 is the Horizontal distance

5 is the Vertical distance

215

Line and offset - Use this method to define the area to scan from a center line that has equal offsets to the left and right. General Survey defines the surface using horizontal offsets perpendicular to the center line. The software then uses this definition and the station interval to determine approximately how far to turn the instrument for each subsequent point (see the following diagram):

1. Do one of the following:

•

Two point method:

1. Aim to the start point of the center line (1) and measure a point.

2. Aim to the end point of the center line (2) and measure another point. These two points (1 and

2) define the center line.

•

Access the pop-up menu in the Start point field. Change the method and then define the line by a start point with azimuth and length.

2. Define the station interval (3).

3. Define the maximum offset distance (4).

4. Define the offset interval (5).

General Survey scans the center line first, then the points on the right-hand side, and finally the left-hand side.

Note - With all of the above methods, the defined scan area may not exactly fit the grid interval. There may be an area left over along the scan extents that is smaller than the grid interval. If the width of this area is less than one-fifth of the grid interval, the points along this scan area will not be measured. If the width is more than one-fifth of the grid interval, then an extra point is scanned.

Angles and distance

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to measure a point by angles and a distance.

To measure an angle offset when using the Angles and distance measurement method, tap Dist to measure and fix the distance, then turn the instrument. The distance will remain fixed but the horizontal and vertical angles will change.

216

Note - The distance reverts to ? if target test is enabled and the instrument is turned more than 30 cm from the target.

Angles only and H.Angle only

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to measure a point by both a horizontal and vertical angle or by a horizontal angle only.

Averaged Observations

In a conventional survey, use the Averaged observations method to:

• increase the measurement precision with a predefined number of observations

• view the associated measurement standard deviations

To measure a point using the Averaged observations method:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. Select Averaged observations as the method.

6. Sight the target and tap Measure.

While the instrument is carrying out the measurements, standard deviations are displayed for the horizontal (HA) and vertical (VA) angles, and the slope distance (SD).

7. View the resulting observation data, and the associated standard deviations, in the Store screen.

If acceptable, tap Store.

Note - Use the options available in the Measure topo screen to change the number of observations taken by the instrument using averaged observations.

Angle Offset, H. Angle Offset, and V. Angle Offset

In a conventional survey, there are three angle offset methods that you can use to observe a point that is inaccessible; Angle offset, H. Angle offset, and V. Angle offset.

The Angle offset method holds the horizontal distance from the first observation, and combines this with the horizontal angle and vertical angle from the second observation to create an observation to the offset location.

The V.Angle offset method holds the horizontal distance and horizontal angle from the first observation, and combines this with the vertical angle from the second observation to create an observation to the offset location.

217

The H.Angle offset method holds the slope distance and vertical angle from the first observation, and combines this with the horizontal angle from the second observation to create an observation to the offset location.

All raw observables from the first and second observations are stored internally in the job file and are available in Custom ASCII Export.

To measure a point using one of the Offset methods:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. In the Method field, select Angle offset, H. Angle Offset, or V. Angle Offset.

When using the H.Angle offset measurement method, the target height from the first observation is applied to the horizontal angle offset observation.

When using Angle offset or V.Angle offset measurement methods you do not need to enter the Target

height. The offset measurements are to the offset location and the target height is not used in any computations. To ensure that a target height is not applied to the observation, a target height of 0

(zero) is automatically stored to the General Survey software database.

6. Place the target beside the object to be measured, sight the target and then tap Measure.

The first observation is displayed.

Tip - When using Autolock technology and measuring offset points, select the Autolock off for offsets check box. When enabled, Autolock technology is automatically disabled for the offset measurement and then re-enabled after the measurement.

7. Turn to the offset location and then tap Measure. The two observations are combined into one:

•

if you selected the View before storage check box in the survey style, the measurement values appear.

•

Tap Store to store the point.

if you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored automatically.

Note - The observation is stored in the database as raw HA, VA, and SD records.

Distance Offset

In a conventional survey, use this observation method when a point is inaccessible but a horizontal distance from the target point to the object can be measured.

Distance offset allows you to offset in one, two, or three distances in one step.

218

To measure a point using the Distance offset method:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure topo.

3. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

4. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

5. In the Method field, select Distance offset.

6. In the Target height field, enter the height of the target.

Tap Options and then set the Offset &Stakeout directions perspective.

Tip - From the Options screen you can also enter values in the Custom L/R offset 1 and Custom L/R

offset 2 fields to pre-configure two values for the L/R offset.

8. Enter the L/R offset (left or right offset) from the target to the object, if applicable. If custom offsets were preconfigured, tap the pop-up arrow to select the offset.

Tip - From the pop-up menu, tap Set offsets to 0 to set all three offset values to 0. This option is also available from the In/Out offset and V.Dist offset fields.

Note - If all three fields are set to 0 the measurement will be treated as an Angles and distance measurement.

9. Enter the In/Out offset from the target to the object, if applicable.

10. Enter the V.Dist offset from the target to the object, if applicable.

The following figure shows an example where point 5 is measured with the Offset &Stakeout

directions set to Instrument perspective:

♦ offset to the left (2) of the target (3)

♦ offset out (4) from the instrument station (1)

♦ offset vertically (6)

11. Tap Measure.

If you selected the View before storage check box in the survey style, the observation adjusted for the offset distance appears. Tap Store to store the point.

If you did not select the View before storage check box, the point is stored automatically.

219

The General Survey software stores the adjusted horizontal angle, vertical angle, and slope distance in the point record, as well as an offset record with the offset measurement details.

Offset &Stakeout directions

The left and right directions used in Distance offset depend on the Offset &Stakeout directions setting.

You can configure this setting in the survey style and also from Options.

When looking from the instrument to the object, an object that is offset to the left when the Offset

&Stakeout directions are set to Instrument perspective is to the left.

When the Offset &Stakeout directions is set to Target perspective, the object is to the right.

When the Offset &Stakeout directions are set to Automatic, the offset and stakeout directions are with respect to the instrument perspective in a Servo survey, and to the target perspective in a Robotic survey.

The measurements are editable in Review job and are always displayed in the perspective in which they were observed. The perspective cannot be changed in review. The measurement is always stored relative to the instrument position.

Dual-prism Offset

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to coordinate a point that cannot be observed directly with a pole in a plumb position.

To measure a point using the dual-prism offset method:

1. As shown in the following diagram, space two prisms (A and B) apart on the range pole. The distance

BC is known.

2. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

3. From the Measure menu, select Measure topo.

4. In the Point name field, enter the name of the point.

5. In the Code field, enter a feature code (optional).

6. In the Method field, select Dual-prism offset.

7. Complete the fields as required.

Tip - Enter a suitable Tolerance AB to generate a warning if there is a difference between the keyed-in distance AB between the two prisms and the measured distance AB between the two prisms. Exceeding the tolerance could indicate that the entered distance AB is incorrect, or it could indicate pole movement between the measurement to prism A and the measurement to prism B.

8. Take two measurements (tap Measure).

The General Survey software calculates the obscured position (C) and then stores it as a raw HA VA SD observation.

220

All raw observations are stored internally in the job file and are available in Custom ASCII Export.

Circular object

In a conventional survey, use this measurement method to calculate the center point of a circular object, such as a water tank or silo. To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Measure and then perform a

2. From the Measure menu, select Measure topo.

3. Use the Circular object method to measure an angle and distance to the front center face of the circular object.

4. Observe an angles only measurement to the side of the circular object.

From these two measurements, General Survey calculates the center point of the circular object and stores it as a raw HA VA SD observation. The radius is also calculated and stored with the observation.

Remote Object

In a conventional survey, if the instrument does not support DR mode, or if you cannot measure a distance, use this method to calculate the height and/or width of a remote object. See the following diagram.

1. Start a conventional survey.

2. Select Measure / Measure Topo / Remote object.

3. Measure an angle and distance to the bottom of the remote object (1).

4. Set the method as required.

5. Sight to the Remote point (2).

6. Tap Store to store the observation.

7. To make multiple remote object observations, repeat steps 5 and 6.

221

Using the first measurement and continuous HA VA angles, General Survey calculates the position of the remote object, showing the width and elevation difference from the base point. The observation to the base of the remote object is stored as an HA, VA, SD. The Remote point is stored as an HA, VA with a computed SD, including the Object height and Object width.

Conventional Instrument - Corrections

You can set the corrections associated with conventional observations.

Note - If you intend to perform a network adjustment in the Trimble Business Center software using data from a conventional survey, make sure that you enter a pressure, temperature and, curvature and refraction correction.

Use the PPM (Parts Per Million) field to specify a PPM correction to be applied to electronic distance measurements. Key in the PPM correction, or enter the pressure and temperature of the surrounding environment and let the General Survey software compute the correction.

Typical pressure ranges are between 500 mbar - 1200 mbar, but when you work in an area with over-pressure (for example, a tunnel), larger pressures up to 3500 mbar are possible.

Note - If you are using a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, the pressure field is set automatically from the sensor in the instrument. To disable this, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then clear the From instrument check box.

Use the Curvature and Refraction fields to control curvature and refraction corrections. The earth curvature and refraction corrections are applied to vertical angle observations and therefore have an impact on computed vertical distance values. They also affect the horizontal distance values to a very small extent.

The earth curvature and refraction corrections can be applied independently using the options provided. The earth curvature correction is the most significant correction with a magnitude of approximately 16" per km measured distance (subtracted from the zenith vertical angle).

The magnitude of the refraction correction is affected by the refraction coefficient, which is an estimate of the change in air density along the light path from the instrument to the target. Since this change in air density is affected by factors such as temperature, ground conditions, and the height of the light path over ground, it is

222

very difficult to determine exactly which refraction coefficient to use. If you use typical refraction coefficients such as 0.13, 0.142, or 0.2, the refraction correction results in a correction in the opposite direction to the earth curvature correction with a magnitude of approximately one-seventh of the earth curvature correction.

Note - The DC file format only supports a curvature and refraction correction that are both off, or both on, and when on, either with a coefficient of 0.142 or 0.2. When settings other than these are used in the General

Survey software, the settings exported to the DC file will be a best match.

Note - Do not set corrections in both devices. To set them in the General Survey software, make sure the instrument settings are null.

For some instruments, the General Survey software automatically checks to see if various corrections (PPM, prism constant, and curvature and refraction) are being applied correctly. If it finds that the corrections are being applied twice, a warning message appears.

In the following table, the * symbol in a field indicates that the correction at the top of that column is applied.

Note - *' applies only to computed coordinates when a station setup has been defined.

Displayed / Stored data

Status line

HA VA SD (raw)

HA VA SD

Az VA SD

Az HD VD

HA HD VD

Grid delta Grid

Station and offset

DC file (observations)

DC file (reduced coordinates) *

JobXML (observations) -

JobXML (reduced coordinates)

Survey Basic

Corrections applied

C / R PPM PC SL Orient Inst ht Tar ht Proj Cor Stn SF NA POC

* * -

* -

* * *

* *

The following table explains the corrections used above.

C / R Curvature and/or Refraction correction.

PPM

Atmospheric Parts Per Million correction

- PPM is calculated from temperature and pressure.

Prism constant correction.

223

Sea level (ellipsoid) correction.

- this correction is applied only if a fully defined coordinate system definition is being used; the correction is not applied in the Scale factor only definition.

Orient Orientation correction.

Inst ht Instrument height correction.

Tar ht Target height correction.

Proj

Cor

Projection correction.

- this includes the application of a scale factor specified in the Scale factor only definition.

Stn SF

Station setup scale factor.

- in any station setup, a scale factor for this setup can be specified or computed. This scale factor is applied in the reduction of all observations from this station setup.

POC

Neighborhood adjustment.

- in a station setup defined using Station setup plus or Resection, a neighborhood adjustment can be applied. The neighborhood adjustment is computed based on the observed residuals to the control points used during the station setup. The adjustment is applied, using the specified exponent value, in the reduction of all observations from this station setup.

Prism offset correction

- only applied when using a Trimble 360° prism or a Trimble MultiTrack target.

Target Details

You can configure the details of the target during a conventional survey.

When connected to a conventional instrument the Target icon appears in the status bar. The number next to the target icon indicates the target currently in use. To alternate between targets or to edit the target height and

the prism constant,

tap the target icon. To select the target to use, tap the appropriate target in the pop-up list.

You can create up to five non-DR targets.

Tip - To change to a target, select the target name. To edit entries in the Target form, select the target height or prism constant.

Note - If you are using a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, the Pressure field is set automatically from the sensor in the instrument. To disable this, tap the advanced pop-up arrow and then clear the From instrument check box.

When using Trimble prisms, select the Prism type to automatically define the prism constant. When using non-Trimble prisms, select Custom to manually enter the prism constant.

When the Trimble VX/S Series 360° prism type is selected, the General Survey software applies a correction to the Vertical Angle and Slope Distance to correct for the offset difference between the optical center of the prism and the center line of the rod.

The correction is only significant when observing step vertical angles.

224

When connected to a DR instrument, Target DR is used to define the DR target height and prism constant. To enable DR, select Target DR. To disable DR and return the instrument to its last state, select target 1 - 5.

When measuring to the bottom notch on a Trimble prism base, tap the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) and then select Bottom notch.

General Survey corrects this measured slope value to true vertical and adds the offset 0.158 m (0.518 sft) to calculate the true vertical height to the center of the prism.

Note - If you select Bottom notch, the minimum slope distance (Hm) that you can enter is 0.300 meters. This is approximately the minimum slope distance that can be physically measured. If this minimum is too low, you must measure to the top mark.

For information on configuring an integrated survey rover survey rod see, Integrated Surveys.

For details, see the following figure and table.

0.158m Offset from bottom notch to center of prism.

Hm Measured slope distance.

Hm corrected from slope to true vertical.

True vertical target height. Hc + 0.158m.

To add a new target:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar and then tap the height or prism constant for Target 1.

2. In the Target 1 screen, tap Add to create Target 2.

3. Enter the details for Target 2 and then tap Accept.

4. Target 2 now becomes the active target.

To delete a target from the list:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar and then tap the height or prism constant.

2. In the Target screen, tap Delete. The Target is removed from the list.

225

Note - You can not delete Target 1 or Target DR.

To edit a target height:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar.

2. Tap the target height for the target you want to edit.

3. Edit the target details and then tap Accept.

To edit target heights of observations already stored to the job, do one of the following:

•

For a single observation or multiple observations using the same or different targets, use

Point

•

Manager.

For a single target record, and subsequently a group of observations that use that target, use Review job.

Target tracking with the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station

If you use a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station with search capabilities and a

Trimble VX/S Series 360° prism, custom prism, or a Trimble MultiTrack target, you can configure the software to use an Active Target ID.

Note - If you use a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station with the Trimble MultiTrack target, you must upgrade the instrument to firmware version R7.0.35 or later. The Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station firmware is available on www.trimble.com.

Note - Active target ID tracking is not available on the Trimble S3 total station.

When using the

Trimble MultiTrack target, the Tracking mode can be set to:

•

Passive

•

Active

•

Semi-active

Tracking mode - Passive

If you do not operate in a reflective environment, set the Tracking mode to Passive.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series MultiTrack.

4. Set the Tracking mode to Passive.

Tracking mode - Active

If you operate in a highly reflective environment, or on a site with many prisms, set the Tracking mode to

Active to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

226

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use a Trimble MultiTrack target, and Tracking mode

• is set to Active or Semi-active.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series MultiTrack.

4. Set the Tracking mode to Active.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the robotic rover.

Tracking mode - Semi-active

If you operate in a reflective environment, and require precise elevations, set the Tracking mode to

Semi-active to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series MultiTrack.

4. Set the Tracking mode to Semi-active.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the robotic rover.

When using the Trimble VX/S Series 360° prism or a custom prism, the Target ID can be set to:

•

Off - the ID is not checked.

•

Search - check the ID when a search is initiated.

•

Search and measure - check the ID when a search is initiated, and when a measurement is initiated.

•

Always

- the ID is constantly being checked by the instrument.

Check the target ID - Search

If you operate in an environment with few reflective surfaces, but you want to ensure that if you do a search you will lock to the correct target, set Check target ID to Search.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use an VX/S Series 360° prism, and Check target ID

• is not set to Off.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

227

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series 360°.

4. Set the Check target ID to Search.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the Trimble Standard Rod.

Check the target ID - Search and measure

If you operate in an environment with few reflective surfaces, but you want additional assurance if you do a search or when you measure that you will lock to the correct target, set Check target ID to Search and measure.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use an VX/S Series 360° prism, and Check target ID

• is not set to Off.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series 360°.

4. Set the Check target ID to Search and measure.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number set in the Target ID on the Trimble Standard

Rod.

Check the target ID - Always

If you operate in a reflective environment, and require precise elevations set Check target ID to Always to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Do one of the following:

•

If available, select the Target ID field.

The Target ID field is available only when you use an VX/S Series 360° prism, and Check target ID

• is not set to Off.

Select the Target height or Prism constant field to open the Target form.

3. Set the Prism type to VX/S Series 360°.

4. Set the Check target ID to Always.

5. Set the Target ID to match the identification number in the Target ID on the robotic rover.

Notes

•

When passive tracking is used to maintain vertical lock to the prism, you must be aware that there is a risk of nearby reflective surfaces interfering with the vertical tracking.

228

For more information on the different Check target ID modes, see

Target ID - Target tracking with Trimble

VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station.

Remote Measuring Target (RMT) ID - Target tracking with Trimble 5600

When you work on a site with multiple RMTs, configure the RMT channel ID to lock onto a specific RMT target.

This is only available on supported instruments.

To do this:

1. Tap the target icon on the status bar.

2. Select the Target ID field to open the Target screen.

3. Set the RTM ID in the General Survey software to match the ID set in the RMT. For more information, refer to the Trimble 5600 Series User Guide.

Tip - To lock to RMTs that do not support RMT ID, set the RMT ID to 4.

Prism Constant

The prism constant (distance offset) must be set for each prism that is used as a target in a conventional survey.

To edit a prism constant:

1. Tap the target icon in the status bar.

2. Tap the prism constant for the target you want to edit.

3. Edit the prism constant details and then tap Accept.

Enter a negative value if the prism constant is to be subtracted from measured distances. Enter the

Prism constant in millimeters (mm).

When using a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, 5600, or 3600 instrument, all corrections are applied in General Survey.

For some non-Trimble instruments, the General Survey software checks to see if a prism constant has been applied by the instrument and the software. When you select Station setup, status line messages show what has or has not been checked.

If the General Survey software cannot check the setting on the conventional instrument, do one of the following:

•

If there is a prism constant set on the instrument, make sure that the prism constant in the General

•

Survey software is set to 0.000.

If there is a prism constant set in the General Survey software, make sure that the prism constant in the instrument is set to 0.000.

229

To review or edit the prism constant on previously stored observations, tap Favorites / Review job or tap Jobs

/ Point manager. For more information, see

Point Manager.

Measuring a Point in Two Faces

To start a conventional survey in the General Survey software, you must first perform a Station setup using one of the following methods:

•

•

•

•

You can observe points using face 1 (direct) and face 2 (reverse) measurements during a station setup and

during Measure rounds

Measure topo.

Consider the station setup and the new point measurement method together and choose which to use according to how you want to capture and store the data.

If you only want to use a single backsight (measured on one or both faces), and measure some topo points (on one or both faces), then use Station setup and Measure topo. When you measure on both faces, remember to also measure the backsight on face 2 in Measure topo. Otherwise, all foresights on face 2 will be oriented using the face 1 backsight observation.

If you want to measure multiple backsights, measure multiple rounds, or obtain better quality control of your observations, see below for more information on different station setup and new point measurement methods in General Survey.

Use Station setup plus to:

• measure a single backsight point or multiple backsight points

• measure backsight and foresight points

• pair the face 1 and face 2 observations and create MTA records

• measure face 1 only observations and create MTA records

• measure one or more rounds of observations

• review the quality of the observations and remove bad observations

Use Resection to:

• coordinate the instrument point

• measure multiple backsight points

• measure backsight and foresight points

• pair the face 1 and face 2 observations and create MTA records

• measure face 1 only observations and create MTA records

• measure one or more rounds of observations

• review the quality of the observations and remove bad observations

230

Use Station setup to:

• perform a station setup with a single backsight measurement on one face only

Notes

•

When measuring points on both faces, use Measure topo to observe the backsight on the other face.

•

Alternatively, use Measure rounds and include the observation to the backsight point in the rounds.

When you make topo observations after a Station setup, and you subsequently select Measure rounds, you must reobserve the backsight to include it in the rounds, generate an MTA to the backsight, and

• calculate turned angles from the backsight MTA for all foresight points.

MTAs are not created during Station setup, but are created later if you make further observations to the backsight using Measure topo or Measure rounds.

Use Measure rounds (after performing a station setup) to:

• measure one or more foresight points

• pair the face 1 and face 2 observations and create MTA records

• measure face 1 only observations and create MTA records

• measure one or more

sets of observations per point

in one round

• measure one or more rounds of observations

• review the standard deviations of the observations and remove bad observations

Notes

•

Standard deviations are only available after the second round of observations.

•

If the station setup has a single backsight (from Station setup or Station setup plus), you can choose

• whether or not to include the backsight point in the rounds list.

If the station setup has multiple backsights (from Station setup plus or Resection), the backsight points

• are not included in the rounds list.

If you do not measure the backsight on face 2, then the horizontal angle face 2 measurements that

• were observed using Measure rounds will not be used when calculating the MTAs.

When you use Measure rounds after a station setup with a single backsight, and you do not include the backsight point in the rounds list, all turned angles are calculated using the backsight observation(s) made during the station setup.

Use Measure topo (after performing a station setup) to:

• measure face 1 or face 2 observations and create MTA records

Note - You can measure multiple rounds using Measure topo. However, Trimble recommends Measure

rounds as a more suitable method to use.

Additional notes about MTA records

•

When you use Station setup plus or Resection, all observations are stored when the station setup is complete. When you use Measure rounds, the observations are stored at the end of each round. In all three options, the MTAs are stored at the end.

231

•

When you use Measure topo, MTAs are calculated and stored on the fly.

•

You can create MTAs during a station setup using Station setup plus and Resection, and also after a station setup using Measure rounds or Measure topo. When you measure the same point(s) using

Measure rounds or Measure topo after Station setup plus and Resection, the General Survey software may produce two MTAs for the one point. When more than one MTA exists for the same point in one station setup, the General Survey software always uses the first MTA. To avoid having two MTAs for

• the same point, do not use both methods to measure a point.

Once an MTA record is written to the job database, you cannot change it.

•

You can delete a face 1 and face 2 observation but the MTA records are not updated.

•

You cannot delete MTA records in review.

•

In Station setup plus, Resection, or Measure rounds, when you use the F1... F2 or F1/F2... face order,

•

MTAs that are created pair face 1 and face 2 observations.

In Station setup plus, Resection, or Measure rounds, when you use the F1 only face order, MTAs that

• are created group face 1 observations.

In Measure topo, MTAs that are created group together all observations for the same point.

GDM CU Programs

General Survey offers similar functionality to the GDM Control Unit.

To access GDM CU programs, tap the instrument icon to access instrument functions and then enter the GDM

CU program number.

The following table shows where to find specific GDM CU programs within General Survey.

GDM CU programs in General Survey

GDM CU program

20 - Station setup

21 - Z/IZ

22 - Angle measurement

General Survey

Select ...

to ...

Measure / Station setup

Measure / Station setup plus perform a known station setup.

perform a known station plus setup.

Measure / Resection perform a free station or eccentric station setup.

Measure / Refline perform an instrument setup relative to a known or unknown baseline

Measure / Station elevation calculate an instrument elevation

Measure / Measure rounds

Measure / Measure topo measure one or more Face 1 (CI) and Face 2 (CII) measurements.

measure individual Face 1 and/or Face 2 measurements.

Instrument functions number

232

23 - Set Out

24 - Refline

25 - Area

Calculation

26 - Distob

27 - Moving

Coordinates

Forward

33 - Robotic

Lite

39 - Roadline

43 - Enter coordinates

Stakeout / Points

Stakeout / Lines set out points with known coordinates. Points can be defined via Key in / Points or obtained from a linked

CSV, TXT or General Survey JOB file.

measure or set out relative to a line. The line can be defined through Key in / Line or imported to the

General Survey job.

COGO / Compute area

COGO / Compute inverse calculate an area.

calculate an inverse between two points.

the General Survey software stores raw data and automatically calculates point coordinates.

There is no specific program required in the General Survey software to move coordinates forward. Instead, select Station setup plus or Measure rounds.

28 - Obstructed

Point

29 - Roadline

30 - Measure

Coordinates

32 - Angle measurement plus

Measure / Measure topo and set the method to Dual-prism offset.

Stakeout /

Alignments measure or set out relative to an alignment.

28 the General Survey software stores raw data and automatically calculates point coordinates.

There is no specific program required in the General Survey software to measure coordinates. Instead, use Measure topo.

Points can be exported to a CSV or TXT file, through Jobs / Import/Export

/ Send data, for use as a control file. To access the control file from another job, select the CSV, TXT, or JOB file as a linked file through Jobs /

Properties of job.

Measure / Measure rounds

Measure / Measure

rounds / Options measure one or more Face 1 (CI) and Face 2 (CII) measurements.

configure the number of rounds to be measured; select automatic measurements; set the observation order; measure distances on Face 2(CII); define a time interval between rounds (automatic measurements only).

Not supported

Stakeout /

Alignments

Key in / Points measure or set out relative to an alignment.

enter the coordinates for a point.

45 - Pcode the Trimble Access menu tap Feature libraries create a feature library with codes. To create a full feature library, or a feature library with both codes and attributes, use Feature and Attribute Editor or

Autodraft Configuration File Editor. You can then transfer the feature library to the controller.

233

60 - Athletics

61 - COGO

Not Supported

COGO / Compute point perform similar coordinate calculations.

COGO / Compute point perform a From a baseline (Corner + distance),

Brng-Line intersect (Corner + angle), or Four point intersection (Two lines intersection) measurement.

65 - Direct

Reflex

Measure / Measure topo perform a Circular Object (Eccentric object) measurement.

66 - Monitoring

Menu 2

(View/Edit)

Measure / Surface scan

Measure / Measure rounds

Measure / Measure rounds / Options

Jobs / Review job

Favorites / Review

Favorites / Point manager perform a surface scan.

configure the number of rounds to be measured, automatically store points, and define a time interval between rounds.

review and edit the data stored in the job.

F 6 (Change target height)

F 33 (Change prism constant) the target icon on the status bar quickly change the target details for new observations.

Edit target height or Prism constant

GDM Job Files export

Favorites / Review job

Favorites / Point manager

Trimble Data

Transfer (connected to General Survey)

Jobs / Import/Export

/ Export custom format edit the target record to change the target height or prism constant.

Changes then apply to all observations that use that target.

use Point manager to edit the height or prism constant values for individual observations

For more information, refer to the Help.

transfer the GDM Job file.

For more information about transferring data, see between the Controller and the Office Computer.

create a GDM Job file

Transferring Files

Advanced Geodetic Support

To enable the following options for Advanced Geodetic support: when creating a new job, tap Job / New job /

Cogo settings; for an existing job, tap Job / Properties of job / Cogo settings.

•

Station setup scale factor

•

Helmert transformation for Resection

Station setup scale factor

234

When you turn on Advanced Geodetic support, you can apply an additional scale factor to every conventional station setup. All measured horizontal distances are adjusted by this scale factor. To configure the scale factor

settings, select Options during a Station setup

, Station setup plus , or

Resection.

This station setup scale factor can be Free (computed) or Fixed. If you have chosen to compute a station setup scale factor, you must observe at least one distance to a backsight during the station setup so that a scale factor can be calculated.

Helmert transformation for Resection

When you turn on Advanced Geodetic support, Resection has an additional computation method called

Helmert transformation. To perform a resection using a Helmert transformation, select Options during a

Resection, and then set the Resection type to Helmert.

Note - The standard resection type is the same as the resection method used when Advanced Geodetics is turned off.

For a Helmert transformation, you must measure distances to the backsight points. The resection calculation will not use a backsight point without a distance measurement.

For more information, see Neighborhood Adjustment.

235

Survey - Calibration

Calibration

A calibration calculates parameters for transforming WGS-84 coordinates into local grid coordinates (NEE).

It either calculates a horizontal and vertical

adjustment, or a transverse mercator projection and a 3-parameter datum transformation, depending on what has already been defined.

For accurate calibration, your site should be within at least four control points with known 3-D grid coordinates.

Warning - You must complete a calibration before you compute offset or intersection points, or stake out points. If you change the calibration after computing or staking out these points, they will not be consistent with the new coordinate system and any points computed or staked out after the change.

To calibrate point coordinates:

1. Enter the grid coordinates of your control points. Key these in, transfer them from your office computer, or measure them using a conventional total station.

2. Measure the points with GNSS.

3. Perform either an

automatic or a

manual calibration.

4. To obtain the current list of points being used in the calibration, select Measure / Site calibration.

Notes and Recommendations

•

You can perform a calibration using one of the real-time GNSS survey styles in the General Survey software. Do this manually, or let the General Survey software do it automatically. If all the points have been measured, you do not need to connect the Trimble controller to a receiver during a manual

• calibration.

Multiple calibrations can be performed in one job. The last calibration performed and applied is used

• to convert the coordinates of all previously surveyed points in the database.

You can use up to 20 points for a calibration. Trimble strongly recommends that you use a minimum of four 3D local grid coordinates (N, E, E) and four observed WGS84 coordinates, with the local projection and datum transformation parameters (the coordinate system). This should provide enough redundancy.

Note - You can use a combination of 1D, 2D, and 3D local grid coordinates. If no projection and no datum transformation are defined, you must have at least one 2D grid point.

If you did not specify the coordinate system, the General Survey software calculates a Transverse

Mercator projection and a three-parameter datum transformation.

•

Use the Trimble Business Center software, Trimble's Data Transfer utility, or Microsoft

•

ActiveSync/Windows Mobile Device Center technology to transfer control points.

Be careful when naming points that are to be used in a calibration. Before you begin, familiarize yourself with the

Database search rules.

236

•

The set of WGS-84 coordinates must be independent of the set of grid coordinates.

•

You select the grid coordinates. Select the vertical coordinates (elevation), the horizontal coordinates

•

(northing and easting values), or all of these together.

Place the calibration points around the perimeter of the site. Do not survey outside of the area

• enclosed by the calibration points, as the calibration is not valid beyond this perimeter.

The origin of the horizontal adjustment is the first point in the calibration when using one or two calibration point pairs. When there are more than two calibration point pairs, the computed centroid position is used for the origin.

•

The origin of the vertical adjustment is the first point in the calibration with an elevation.

When reviewing a calibration point in the database, notice that the WGS84 values are the measured coordinates. The grid values are derived from these, using the current calibration.

The original keyed-in coordinates remain unchanged. (They are stored elsewhere in the database as a

• point with the Type field showing Keyed in coordinates and the Stored as field showing Grid. )

When you are calibrating a no projection, no datum job, (where ground coordinates are required after calibration) you must define the project height (average site height). When the job is calibrated, the project height is used to compute a ground scale factor for the projection, using the inverse of the

• ellipsoid correction.

When you start a Scale Factor Only job and then introduce GNSS data, you must perform a site calibration to relate the GNSS data to the Scale Factor Only point coordinates.

When you select Site Calibration, you must specify whether the Scale Factor Only coordinates in the job represent grid coordinates or ground coordinates. The site calibration computations then set up a grid coordinate system or a ground-based coordinate system, that best fits the existing data in the job to the GNSS data.

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

A calibration calculates parameters for transforming WGS-84 coordinates into local grid coordinates (NEE).

Set the parameters for computing a calibration when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To set the parameters for computing a calibration:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Tap Site calibration.

3. The Fix H. scale field to 1.0: check box details whether the calibration computation should compute a horizontal scale factor or not:

♦

To compute the horizontal scale factor, make sure the check box is clear. (This is the default setting.) Use this option only if GNSS measurements need to be scaled to fit the local control.

♦

(GNSS measurements are usually more precise.)

To fix the horizontal scale factor to 1.0, select the check box. Select the check box to avoid distorting the geometry of the GNSS network, but note that the calibration residuals will be higher.

4. For the General Survey software to automatically perform a calibration when you measure a calibration point, select the Auto calibrate check box. To switch automatic calibration off, clear the check box.

237

5. Select the Vertical adjustment type to be computed and applied:

♦

The Constant adjustment only option will compute a vertical shift value to best fit the

♦ calibration point measured elevations to the control elevations.

The Inclined plane option will compute a vertical shift plus north and east inclinations to best fit the calibration point measured elevations to the control elevations. Typically, the Inclined plane method will result in smaller vertical residuals than the Constant adjustment only method.

6. Select an observation type appropriate to a calibration point. The options for a calibration point are

Topo point or Observed control point.

Note - If you set the observation type to Topo point, all settings are defined in the survey style for a

Topo point.

7. If necessary, set the tolerances for maximum horizontal and vertical residuals, and maximum and minimum horizontal scale settings. These settings only apply to automatic calibration and do not affect manual calibration.

You can also specify the maximum slope of the vertical adjustment plane. The General Survey software warns you if the slope in the north direction or the slope in the east direction exceeds this.

Generally the default settings are appropriate.

8. Specify how the calibration points you measure will be named:

♦

In the Method field, choose one of the following options: Add prefix, Add suffix, or Add

♦ constant.

In the Add field, enter the prefix, suffix, or constant.

The table below shows the different options and gives an example of each.

Example value in the

Add field

Grid point name

Calibration point name

Option

Same

Add prefix

Add suffix

What the software does

Gives the calibration point the same name as the grid point

Inserts a prefix before the grid point name

Inserts a suffix after the grid point name

Add constant Adds a value to the grid point name

GNSS_

_GNSS

100

GNSS_100

100_GNSS

10 100 110

For more information, see:

•

Calibration

•

Calibration - Automatic

•

Calibration - Manual

238

Calibration - Manual

Key in the grid coordinates of your control points. Alternatively, transfer them from your office computer, or use a conventional instrument to measure them. Then measure the points with GNSS.

To carry out a manual calculation:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / Site calibration.

2. For Scale factor only jobs:

♦

If the job uses ground coordinates, select Ground.

♦

If the job uses grid coordinates, select Grid.

3. Use Add to add a point to the calibration.

4. Enter the name of the grid point and the WGS-84 point in the appropriate fields.

The two point names do not have to be the same, but they should correspond to the same physical point.

5. Change the Use field as required and tap Accept.

The residuals for each point are not displayed until at least three 3D points are included in the calibration to provide redundancy.

6. Tap Results to see the horizontal and vertical shifts that the calibration has calculated.

7. To add more points, tap Esc to return to the calibration screen.

8. Repeat steps 3 through 6 until all the points are added.

9. Do one of the following:

♦

If the residuals are acceptable, tap Apply to store the calibration.

♦

If the residuals are not acceptable, recalculate the calibration.

Recalculating a Calibration

Recalculate a calibration if the residuals are not acceptable, or if you want to add or delete points.

To recalculate a calibration:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / Site calibration.

2. Do one of the following:

♦

To remove (exclude) a point, highlight the point name and then tap Delete.

♦

To add a point, tap Add.

♦

To change the components used for a point, highlight the point name and tap Edit. In the Use field, choose whether to use the vertical coordinate of the grid point, the horizontal coordinates, or both horizontal and vertical coordinates.

3. Tap Apply to apply the new calibration.

Note - Each calibration calculation is independent of the previous one. When a new calibration is applied, it overwrites any previously calculated calibration.

239

Calibration - Automatic

When you use this function to measure calibration points, the calibration calculations are performed and stored automatically.

Define a projection and datum transformation. Otherwise, a transverse mercator projection will be used and the datum will be WGS-84.

To use automatic calibration:

1. Select your RTK Survey Style.

2. Select Site calibration.

3. Select the Auto calibrate check box. Alternatively, tap Options when you measure a Calibration point.

4. Use Options to configure the naming relationship between the grid and WGS-84 points.

5. Enter the grid coordinates of your Calibration points. Key these in, transfer them from your office computer, or measure them using a conventional total station.

For keyed in coordinates check that the coordinate fields are North, East, and Elevation. If they are not, tap Options and change the Coordinate view to Grid. Key in the known grid coordinates and tap

Enter.

Select the Control point check box. (This ensures that the point is not overwritten by a measured point.)

For transferred coordinates make sure that these coordinates are:

♦ transferred as grid coordinates (N, E, E), not as WGS84 coordinates (L, L, H)

♦ control class points

6. Measure each point as a Calibration point.

In the Method field, select Calibration point.

7. Enter the grid point name. The General Survey software names the GNSS point automatically, using the naming relationship that you configured earlier. The Auto-calibrate function then matches the points (grid and WGS-84 values), and calculates and stores the calibration. The calibration is applied to all previously measured points in the database.

8. When you measure the next Calibration point, a new calibration is calculated using all of the

Calibration points. It is stored and applied to all previously measured points.

When one point has been calibrated, or a projection and datum transformation have been defined, the

Find softkey appears. You can use this to navigate to the next point.

The calibration residuals are only displayed if the calibration tolerances are exceeded.

If this happens, consider removing the point with the most extreme residuals. Do one of the following:

240

•

If at least four points are left after removing that point, recalibrate using the remaining points.

•

If not enough points are left after removing that point, measure it again and recalibrate.

It may be necessary to remove (re-measure) more than one point. To remove a point from the calibration calculations:

1. Highlight the point name and tap Enter.

2. In the Use field, select Off and tap Enter. The calibration is recalculated and the new residuals are displayed.

3. Tap Apply to accept the calibration.

To view the results of an automatic calibration:

1. From the Measure menu, select Site calibration. The Site calibration screen appears.

2. Tap Results to see the Calibration results.

To change a calibration that has been calculated using the Auto calibrate function, select Site calibration from the Measure menu. Then proceed as described in

Performing a Manual Site Calibration.

241

Survey - GNSS

Starting the Base Receiver

This chapter describes how to start the base receiver for a GNSS survey.

For more information, go directly to the following topics:

Base Station Coordinates

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time Survey

Setting up the Equipment for a Postprocessed Survey

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time and Postprocessed Survey

Starting a Base Survey

Ending a Base Survey

Radios for GNSS Surveys

Base Station Coordinates

When you set up a base, it is important to know the WGS-84 coordinates of the point as accurately as possible.

Note - Every 10 m of error in a base station coordinate can introduce a scale error on every measured baseline of up to 1 ppm.

The following recognized methods, listed in descending order of accuracy, are used to determine base station

WGS-84 coordinates:

•

Published or precisely-determined coordinates.

•

Coordinates computed from published or precisely-determined grid coordinates.

•

Coordinates derived using a reliable differential (RTCM) broadcast based on published or

• precisely-determined coordinates.

A WAAS or EGNOS position generated by the receiver. Use this method if no control exists for the

• location and you have a receiver that tracks WAAS/EGNOS satellites.

An autonomous position generated by the receiver. Use this method for real-time surveys in a location where no control exists. Trimble strongly recommends that you calibrate any jobs started by this method on a minimum of four local control points.

Tip - In the U.S.A., you can regard NAD83 geodetic coordinates as equivalent to WGS-84 coordinates.

242

Note - If the keyed in WGS-84 coordinates differ from the current autonomous position generated by the receiver by more than 300 m, a warning message appears.

For more information about entering base station coordinates, see Starting a Base Survey.

Survey Integrity

To preserve the integrity of a GNSS survey, consider the following:

•

When you start subsequent base receivers for a particular job, make sure that each new base coordinate is in the same terms as the initial base coordinate.

Note - Within a job, only use an autonomous position to start the first base receiver. An autonomous position is equivalent to an assumed coordinate in conventional surveying.

•

Coordinates published by a reliable source and coordinates determined by control surveys should be

• in the same system.

If subsequent base coordinates are not in the same terms, regard observations from each base as a

• separate job. Each needs a separate calibration.

Because measured real-time kinematic points are stored as vectors from the base station, not as absolute positions, the origin of the survey must be an absolute WGS-84 position from which the vectors radiate.

If other base stations are subsequently set up on points measured from the original base station, all

• vectors are resolved back to the original base station.

It is possible to start the base on any kind of coordinates, for example, grid or local ellipsoid coordinates. However, in a real-time survey, the General Survey software must store a WGS-84 position for the base when a rover survey is started. It is this position that is held fixed as the origin of the network.

When you start a rover survey, the General Survey software compares the WGS-84 position broadcast by the base receiver with points already in the database. If a broadcast point has the same name as a point in the database, but different coordinates, the General Survey software uses the coordinates that are in the database. These coordinates were keyed in or transferred by you, so it assumes that you want to use them.

If a point in the database has the same name as the one being broadcast by the base, but the coordinates are NEE or local LLH rather than WGS-84 coordinates, the General Survey software converts this point to WGS-84 coordinates using the current datum transformation and projection. It then uses these as the base coordinates. If no datum transformation and projection are defined, the broadcast WGS-84 point is automatically stored and used as the base.

The following diagram shows a survey using two base stations.

243

In this survey, Base station 2 was first surveyed as a roving point from Base station 1.

Note - Base stations 1 and 2 must be linked together by a measured baseline, and Base station 2 must be started with the same name that it had when it was surveyed as a roving point from Base station 1.

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time Survey

This section describes how to assemble the hardware components at the base receiver for a Real-time kinematic (RTK) or Real-time differential (RT differential) survey.

Using a Trimble modular GNSS Receiver

To set up a base receiver for a real-time survey using a Trimble modular GNSS receiver:

1. Set the Zephyr antenna over the ground mark using a tripod, a tribrach, and a tribrach adaptor.

2. Use the tripod clip to hang the receiver on the tripod.

3. Connect the Zephyr antenna to the GNSS receiver port labeled "GPS". Use the GNSS antenna cable.

Note - Instead of hanging the receiver on the tripod, you can place the receiver in its base case. Run the antenna cable out of the portal in the side of the base case to the antenna so that the case can stay closed while the receiver is running.

4. Assemble and erect the radio antenna.

5. Connect the radio antenna to the radio using the cable attached to the antenna.

6. Connect the radio to the GNSS receiver port 3.

♦

If using a Trimble radio, use the supplied cable.

♦

If using a radio provided by a third party, use the appropriate cable.

244

Note - For some third-party radios, a separate power supply is needed for the radio.

Warning - Do not force plugs into the receiver ports. Align the red dot on the plug with the red line on the socket and then insert the plug carefully.

7. If external power is required, connect the power supply with a 0-shell Lemo connection to port 2 or port 3 on the receiver.

8. Connect the controller to the GNSS receiver port 1 using the 0-shell Lemo-to-Hirose cable.

Turn on the controller, then follow the instructions in Starting a Base Survey.

Setting up the Equipment for a Postprocessed Survey

This section shows how to assemble the hardware components at the base receiver for a postprocessed kinematic, or a FastStatic survey.

Using a Trimble modular GNSS Receiver

To set up the base receiver for a postprocessed survey:

1. Set the Zephyr antenna over the ground mark using a tripod, a tribrach, and a tribrach adaptor.

2. Use the tripod clip to hang the receiver on the tripod.

3. Connect the Zephyr antenna to the GNSS receiver port labeled "GPS". Use the GNSS antenna cable.

Warning - Do not force plugs into the receiver ports. Align the red dot on the plug with the red line on the socket and then insert the plug carefully.

7. If external power is required, connect the power supply with a 0-shell Lemo connection to Port 2 or

Port 3 on the receiver.

8. Connect the controller to the GNSS receiver port 1 using the 0-shell Lemo to 0-shell Lemo cable.

Turn on the controller, then follow the instructions in Starting a Base Survey.

Setting up the Equipment for a Real-Time and Postprocessed Survey

To conduct a survey that uses both real-time and postprocessed techniques, follow the assembly instructions for real-time surveys. If the receiver has no memory (or has a limited memory), use a controller to store raw data at the base receiver.

Starting a Base Survey

To conduct a survey using a predefined survey style, make sure that the required job is open. The title of the main menu should be the current job name.

From the main menu, choose Measure and select a survey style from the list.

245

A Measure menu is generated. It displays items specific to the chosen survey style and includes the Start base

receiver and measure options.

Warning - In a real-time survey, make sure that the radio antenna is connected to the radio before starting the base survey. If it is not, the radio will be damaged.

To start a base survey:

1. From the Measure menu, tap Start base receiver.

♦

If the controller is connected to a receiver that was logging data, the data logging stops.

♦

If the base survey requires an internet connection and one doesn't already exist, the

♦ connection is established.

The first time that you use this survey style, the Style wizard prompts you to specify the equipment you are using.

The Start base screen appears.

Note - When you start a survey, the General Survey software automatically negotiates the highest possible baud rate for communicating with the connected receiver.

2. Enter the base station name and coordinates. Use one of the following methods:

♦

If WGS84 coordinates are known:

Access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in.

In the Key in point screen, set the Method field to Keyed in coordinates. Check that the coordinate fields are Latitude, Longitude, and Height (WGS84). If they are not, tap Options and change the Coordinate view setting to WGS84. Key in the known WGS84 coordinates for the base station, and tap Store.

♦

If grid coordinates are known, and projection and datum transformation parameters are defined:

Access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in.

In the Key in point screen, set the Method field to Keyed in coordinates. Check that the coordinate fields are Northing, Easting, Elevation. If they are not, tap Options and change the

Coordinate view setting to Grid. Key in the known grid coordinates for the base station, then

♦ tap Store.

If local geodetic coordinates are known and a datum transformation is defined:

Access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in.

In the Key in point screen, check that the coordinate fields are Latitude, Longitude, and

Height (Local). If not, tap Options and change the Coordinate view setting to Local. Key in the known local coordinates for the base station, then tap Store.

♦

If the coordinates of the point are unknown:

246

In a real-time survey, to use either the current WAAS/EGNOS position (if tracked), or the current autonomous position derived by the GNSS receiver, access the Point name field and enter the point name. Tap Key in to access the Key in point screen. Tap Here and the current position is displayed. Tap Store to accept and store this position.

Note - If you want a WAAS/EGNOS position, ensure the receiver is tracking a WAAS/EGNOS satellite by checking the SBAS icon is displayed on the status line when you tap Here. The receiver can take 120 seconds to lock on to WAAS/EGNOS. Alternatively, check the Observation class field before starting the base.

Warning - Within a job, only use an autonomous position (the Here softkey) to start the first base receiver.

Notes

♦

If you carry out a real-time survey using RTCM 2.x corrections and use a base point name that is more than eight characters long, the name will be shortened to eight characters when it

♦ is broadcast.

If you carry out a real-time survey using RTCM 3.0 corrections, you must use a base point name (in upper case) that is within the range RTCM0000 to RTCM4095.

3. The Observation class field shows the observation class of the base point. For more information, see

Storing GNSS points.

4. Enter values in the Code (optional) and Antenna height fields.

5. Set the Measured to field as appropriate.

6. In the Station index field, enter a value.

This value is broadcast in the correction message, and must be in the range 0-31.

Tip - Tap Scan to view a list of other base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of the other bases and the reliability of each. Choose a different station index number to those displayed.

7. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays, the Transmission delay field appears.

Choose a value depending on how many base stations you intend to use. For more information about

transmission delays, see Operating Several Base Stations on One Radio Frequency.

8. Tap Start.

The base receiver starts to record data and transmit corrections in the format selected in the Survey

Style.

9. Do one of the following:

♦

If you are carrying out a real-time survey, the following message appears:

Base started

Disconnect controller from receiver

247

Disconnect the controller from the base receiver but do not turn off the receiver. You can now set up the rover receiver.

Note - For a real-time survey, check that the radio is working before leaving the equipment.

The data light should be flashing.

♦

If you are logging data in the controller, and/or you are uploading corrections to a remote server, the Base screen appears. It shows which point is being surveyed and the time that has elapsed since data logging started. Leave the Trimble controller connected to the base

♦ receiver and set up the rover using another Trimble controller.

If your base is operating as an internet server, the Base screen appears and in addition to the above, it shows the IP address that has been assigned to the base, as well as the number of rovers that are currently connected to the base.

Ending a Base Survey

When all rover surveys using your base are complete, return to the base, connect the controller to the base receiver and then select Measure / End GNSS base survey. If the controller was logging base data, tap End on the Base screen.

Base Options

To configure the Base survey when you create or edit a Survey Style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Base options.

2. Choose a survey type.

3. Set the elevation mask.

4. Set the antenna type.

Tracking L2C

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and all rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the L2 civil signal, select the L2C check box. This sets up the base GNSS receiver to track the civil signal on the L2 GPS frequency and send those L2C observations to the rovers.

Tracking GLONASS

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the GLONASS signal, select the GLONASS check box if you want to use the GLONASS observations. This sets up the base GNSS receiver to track the GLONASS signals and send those GLONASS observations to the rovers.

For postprocessed surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers can track the GLONASS signal, select the GLONASS check box if you want to use the GLONASS observations. This sets up the GNSS receivers to track the GLONASS signals and include the signals in the logged data.

248

Tracking GPS L5

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and all rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the GPS L5 signals, select the GPS L5 check box. This sets up the base GNSS receiver to track the GPS L5 signals and send those GPS L5 observations to the rovers if the broadcast format is set to

CMRx.

Tracking Galileo test satellites

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the Galileo test signals, select the Galileo check box if you want to use the Galileo test satellite observations. This sets up the base GNSS receiver to track the Galileo test signals and send those

Galileo test satellite observations to the rovers, if the broadcast format is set to CMRx.

For postprocessed surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers can track the Galileo test signals, select the Galileo check box if you want to use the Galileo test satellite observations. This sets up the GNSS receivers to track the Galileo test signals and include the test signals in the logged data.

Notes

•

The Galileo test satellites are tracked, but not used, for RTK surveys.

•

You can log the Galileo test satellites data only to the receiver memory.

Tracking QZSS satellites

For real-time surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers that will receive base data from that base receiver can track the QZSS signals, select the QZSS check box if you want to use the QZSS satellite observations. This sets up the base GNSS receiver to track the QZSS signals and send those QZSS satellite observations to the rovers, if the broadcast format is set to CMRx.

For postprocessed surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers can track the QZSS signals, select the

QZSS check box if you want to use the QZSS satellite observations. This sets up the GNSS receivers to track the QZSS signals and include the signals in the logged data.

For real-time differential surveys where the rover can track the QZSS signals, select SBAS in the Broadcast

format field, and select the QZSS check box. This enables the rover receiver to track the QZSS satellite and, if you are within the valid QZSS differential network, to use the QZSS SBAS differential corrections in the real-time differential survey.

Notes

•

You can log the QZSS satellites data only to the receiver memory.

•

Both the base and rover receivers must have v4.61 firmware or later installed to track QZSS satellites in a RTK survey.

Tracking BeiDou test satellites

249

For postprocessed surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers can track the BeiDou test signals, select the BeiDou check box if you want to log the BeiDou test satellite observations. This sets up the GNSS receivers to track the BeiDou test signals and include the test signals in the logged data.

Notes

•

The BeiDou test satellites are tracked and logged, but not used, for postprocessed surveys.

•

You can log the BeiDou test satellites data only to the receiver memory.

•

Both the base and rover receivers must have v4.70 firmware or later installed to track BeiDou test satellites in a postprocessed survey.

Setting Up the Equipment for a Rover Receiver

This section describes how to assemble the hardware at the rover receiver for a real-time and postprocessed kinematic (PP kinematic) survey. It describes the steps for a Trimble integrated GNSS receiver.

For more information, go directly to these topics in this section:

Setting up the rover equipment

Starting a rover survey

RTK initialization methods

Postprocessed initialization methods

Swapping bases during a real-time rover survey

Ending a rover survey

Setting Up the Rover Equipment

To set up a rover Trimble integrated GNSS receiver:

1. Mount the receiver onto a range pole. Power for the receiver is supplied by the internal battery in the receiver.

2. Attach the controller to the holder. See:

Attaching and Detaching the Trimble CU Controller.

3. Connect the controller holder to the range pole.

4. Turn on the receiver.

5. Turn on the controller.

Note - In a postprocessed survey you may find it useful to use a bi-pod to hold the range pole while taking measurements.

Starting a Real-Time Rover Survey

250

Only start a survey after you have started the base receiver. For more information, see Starting the Base

Receiver.

Warning - If you start a survey while the receiver is logging data, logging stops. If you start a survey that specifies data logging, logging restarts to a different file.

To start a survey using VRS or SAPOS FKP, you must send an approximate position for the rover receiver to the control station. When you start the survey, this position is automatically sent through your radio communications link in a standard NMEA position message. It is used to compute the RTK corrections your receiver will use.

To start the rover receiver for a real-time survey:

1. Make sure that the required job is open. The title of the main menu should be the current job name.

2. From the main menu, choose Measure or Stakeout. Select a survey style from the list.

When you start a survey using a particular Trimble survey style for the first time, the General Survey software prompts you to customize the style for your specific hardware.

Note - If you have only one survey style, it is automatically selected.

3. Select Start survey.

4. Make sure the rover is receiving radio corrections from the base.

Note - An RTK survey needs radio corrections.

5. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays and you select the Prompt for station index check box in the Rover options field, the Select base station screen appears. It shows all the base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of each base and the reliability of each. Highlight the base you want to use and tap Enter.

For more information about using transmission delays, see

Multiple bases on one frequency.

Tip - If you want to check the point name of the base station being used in the rover survey, select

Files / Review current job and inspect the Base point record.

6. If necessary, initialize the survey.

Note - If you are carrying out an RTK survey but do not require centimeter-level results, select

Measure / RTK initialization. Tap Init and set the Method field to No initialization.

For an RTK survey, initialize before starting centimeter-level surveying. If you are using a dual-frequency receiver with the OTF option, the survey automatically starts to initialize using the

OTF initialization method.

7. When the survey is initialized, you can perform a site calibration, measure points, or stakeout.

Starting an RTK & Infill Rover Survey

251

Only start a survey after you have started the base receiver. For more information, see Starting the Base

Receiver.

To start the rover receiver for an RTK & infill survey:

1. Make sure that the required job is open. The title of the main menu should be the current job name.

2. From the main menu, choose Measure or Stakeout. Select a survey style from the list.

When you start a survey using a particular Trimble survey style for the first time, the General Survey software prompts you to customize the style for your specific hardware.

Note - If you have only one survey style, it is automatically selected.

3. Select Start Survey.

4. Make sure the rover is receiving radio corrections from the base.

Note - An RTK survey needs radio corrections.

5. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays and the Prompt for station index check box in the Rover options option in the survey style is selected, the Select base station screen appears. It shows all the base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of each base and the reliability of each. Highlight the base you want to use and tap Enter.

For more information about using transmission delays, see

Multiple bases on one frequency.

Tip - If you want to check the point name of the base station being used in the rover survey, select

Files / Review current job and inspect the Base point record.

6. Initialize the survey using an

RTK initialization

method.

7. Measure points as usual.

Switching to PP infill

During periods when no base corrections are received, the following message flashes in the status line:

Radio link down

To continue surveying select Start PP infill from the Measure menu. When postprocessing infill starts, this item changes to Stop PP infill.

Raw data is logged at the rover during postprocessing (PP) infill. For successful baseline resolution, you must now use postprocessed kinematic observation techniques.

Note - Initialization cannot be transferred between the RTK survey and the PP infill survey. Initialize the PP infill survey like any other postprocessed kinematic survey. For more information, see

Postprocessed

Initialization Methods.

252

Only rely on the OTF (automatic) initialization if you are certain that the receiver will observe at least five satellites, without interruption, for the next 15 minutes. Otherwise, select Measure / PPK initialization and perform an initialization.

Note - You cannot stake out points during a postprocessed survey.

When base corrections are received again, the Radio link up message appears in the status line. This message also shows the initialization mode of the RTK survey.

Select Stop PP infill from the Measure menu to stop data logging at the rover. When postprocessing infill stops, this item changes back to Start PP infill. Real-time measurements are resumed.

Starting a Postprocessed Rover Survey

To start the rover receiver for a postprocessed survey, select Start survey.

You can begin surveying immediately, you do not need to initialize a FastStatic or differential survey.

You must initialize a PP kinematic survey to achieve centimeter-level precisions when the data is processed.

With dual-frequency receivers, the initialization process begins automatically if at least five L1/L2 satellites are being observed.

For more information about initializing a postprocessed survey, see

Postprocessed Initialization Methods.

For

information about measuring points, see Measure Points.

Working with no initialization

If you do not want to initialize a survey, start the survey and then select PPK initialization. When the PPK

initialization screen appears, press Init. Set the Method field to No initialization and then tap Enter.

Swapping Bases During a Real-Time Rover Survey

If you are using multiple bases on the same frequency, you can swap bases during the rover survey. For more

information, see Multiple bases on one frequency.

To swap bases, do the following:

•

From the Measure menu, select Swap base receiver.

The Select base station screen appears. It shows all the base stations operating on the frequency you are using. The list shows the station index numbers of each base and the reliability of each. Tap the base you want to use.

Note - When you change to a different base, your OTF receiver automatically starts the initialization.

Ending a Rover Survey

When you have measured or staked out all points required, do the following:

253

1. From the Measure or Stakeout menu, choose End GNSS survey.

When prompted to power down the receiver, tap Yes.

2. Turn off the controller before disconnecting the equipment.

Return to the base station and end the base survey. For more information, see Ending a Base Survey.

Rover Options

To configure the Rover survey when you create or edit a Survey Style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Rover options.

2. Choose a survey type and set the associated parameters.

Generally, when a GNSS surveying system setup consists of one base and one rover receiver, make sure that the survey type selected in the Rover options field and the Base options field is the same. However, when there are multiple rovers, you can have various configurations but make sure that if the rover is logging raw data your base station is also logging raw data.

Broadcast format

For Real-time Kinematic surveys, the format of the broadcast message can be CMR, CMR+, CMRx, or

RTCM RTK.

CMR is Compact Measurement Record; RTCM is Radio Technical Commission for Maritime Services.

The default is CMR +, which is a format used by the modern Trimble receivers. It is a modified type of CMR record that improves the efficiency of a low bandwidth radio link in real-time surveys. Only use CMR + if all the receivers have the CMR + option installed. To check if this option is installed in the receiver, select

Instrument / Options on the controller that is connected to a receiver.

CMRx is a compressed data format designed to handle the extra load of additional GNSS signals from modernized GPS, GLONASS, Galileo, and QZSS.

Choose CMRx if the base receiver transmits modernized or new GNSS signals to your rovers.

Note - If you want to operate several base stations on one frequency, use CMR+ or CMRx. For more

information, see Operating several base stations on one radio frequency.

For

wide-area RTK surveys, the broadcast message format can be from the following wide-area RTK

solutions: SAPOS FKP, VRS (CMR), VRS (RTCM), and RTCM3Net. For more information, see

Starting a wide-area RTK survey.

Networked single base RTK is also supported in the form of "Multi station" surveys with both CMR and

RTCM formats. These surveys enable you to connect to a network service provider by cellular modem or through the Internet, and receive CMR or RTCM data from the nearest physical reference station in the network.

The rover selection should always correspond to the broadcast message format generated by the base.

254

Satellite differential

When the radio link is down in a real-time survey, the receiver can track and use signals from the following sources:

•

The Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) available in North America

•

The European Global Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS) available in Europe

•

OmniSTAR available worldwide

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and select an RTK style.

2. Tap Rover options and set the Satellite differential field to either SBAS or OmniSTAR.

Notes

•

WAAS/EGNOS is configured under the umbrella term Satellite Based Augmentation Systems or

•

SBAS.

For WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR surveys, you must use a GNSS receiver that can track

•

WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR satellites.

OmniSTAR support requires receiver firmware version 4.60 or later.

•

See your local Trimble distributor for more information.

Use station index

If you want to use multiple base stations on one radio frequency, enter the station index number that you want to use first in the Use station index field.

If you do not want to use multiple base stations on one frequency, enter the same station index number that you enter in the Base options screen.

To use any base station operating on the frequency set in the rover radio, tap Any.

Warning - If you tap Any and there are other base stations operating on the frequency, your rover survey could receive corrections from the wrong base.

For information about using multiple bases, see

Multiple bases on one frequency.

Prompt for station index

When you use a receiver that supports multiple base stations on one radio frequency, the General Survey software asks you to specify the base to use when you start the rover survey. You can stop this question from appearing by clearing the Prompt for station index check box. The station index number in the Use station

index field is used.

In a GNSS survey style, you can set the Station index for the base receiver to a number between 0 and 31, and you can set the Use station index for the rover receiver to Any or to the same number that the base is transmitting. When the rover station index is set to Any, the rover receiver will accept base data from any

255

base. If you set the rover station index to match the same number as the base station index, the rover will accept data only from a base with the same station index.

The base station index number is automatically generated according to the controller serial number. Now that all controllers do not all default to the same number, fewer base receivers will transmit the same station index, and there is less chance that you accidentally receive corrections from the wrong base.

The rover station default index value is Any. If you know your base station index, and you want to connect to only that base, make sure that you set the appropriate station index for the rover.

If the Prompt for station check box is selected, a list of base stations on your radio frequency appears when you start the survey.

Elevation mask

You must define an elevation mask below which satellites are not considered. For kinematic applications, the default of 10° is ideal for both the base and rover.

For differential surveys where the base and rover are separated by more than 100 kilometers, Trimble recommends that the base elevation mask be lower than the rover setting by 1° per 100 kilometers of separation between the base and rover. Generally, the base elevation mask should be no lower than 10°.

PDOP mask

For the rover option, define a PDOP mask. The General Survey software issues high PDOP warnings when the satellite geometry goes above this threshold. The default value is 6.

Logging device

With survey types that involve postprocessing, set the Logging device to be either the Receiver or Controller.

Note - The Trimble GeoXR logs only to the controller.

To define the logging interval, enter a value in the Logging interval field. The base and rover logging intervals must correspond to (or be multiples of) each other.

Log data in RTK mode

Select this option to log raw data in the RTK part of an RTK &infill survey type. Use this option if you want postprocessed data stored as a backup to your RTK survey. When this option is selected, switching between

Infill and RTK modes does not suspend logging.

Antenna type

To set the default antenna height, enter a value in the Antenna height field.

To define the antenna details, access the Type field and select the correct antenna from the list of antennas.

Access the Measured to field and select the correct measurement method for the equipment and type of survey. The field that displays the part number is automatically filled. Key in the serial number.

256

Tracking L2C

For real-time surveys where the base data contains L2C observations, select the L2C check box. This sets up the rover GNSS receiver to track the civil signal on the L2 GPS frequency to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

Use this option only when the base receiver can track L2C, and when you selected the L2C box in the base options when you started the base survey.

Tracking GLONASS

For real-time surveys where the base data contains GLONASS observations, select the GLONASS check box.

This sets up the rover receiver to track the GLONASS satellites to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

You can use this setting to track GLONASS satellites at the rover even if the base receiver is not tracking

GLONASS. However, the satellites will not be used in the RTK processing.

Tracking GPS L5

For real-time surveys where the base data contains GPS L5 observations, select the GPS L5 check box. This sets up the rover GNSS receiver to track the GPS L5 signals to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

Use this option only when the base receiver can track and transmit GPS L5, and when you selected the GPS

L5 check box in the base options when you started the base survey.

Tracking Galileo test satellites

For real-time surveys where the base data contains Galileo test satellite observations, select the Galileo check box. This sets up the rover receiver to track the Galileo test satellites to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

You can use this setting to track Galileo test satellites at the rover even if the base receiver is not tracking

Galileo test satellites. However, the satellites will not be used in the RTK processing.

Notes

•

The Galileo test satellites are tracked, but not used, for RTK surveys.

•

You can log the Galileo test satellites data only to the receiver memory.

257

Tracking QZSS satellites

For real-time kinematic surveys where the base data contains QZSS satellite observations, select the QZSS check box that appears when the Broadcast format is set to CMRx. This sets up the rover receiver to track the

QZSS satellite to match what the base station receiver is tracking.

You can use this setting to track QZSS satellites at the rover even if the base receiver is not tracking QZSS satellites. However, the satellites will not be used in the RTK processing.

To fall back to QZSS SBAS positioning if your RTK radio link goes down, select SBAS in the Satellite

differential field, and select the QZSS option. The QZSS option is only available if you are using CMRx as your RTK Broadcast format.

For postprocessed surveys where the base receiver and rover receivers can track the QZSS signals, select the

QZSS check box if you want to use the QZSS satellite observations. This sets up the GNSS receivers to track the QZSS signals and include the signals in the logged data.

For real-time differential surveys where the rover can track the QZSS signals, select SBAS in the Broadcast

format field, and select the QZSS option. This enables the rover receiver to track the QZSS satellite and, if you are within the valid QZSS differential network, to use the QZSS SBAS differential corrections in the real-time differential survey.

Notes

•

You can log the QZSS satellites data only to the receiver memory.

•

Both the base and rover receivers must have v4.61 firmware or later installed to track QZSS satellites in a RTK survey.

Tracking BeiDou test satellites

Notes

•

The BeiDou test satellites are tracked and logged, but not used, for postprocessed surveys.

•

You can log the BeiDou test satellites data only to the receiver memory.

•

Both the base and rover receivers must have v4.70 firmware or later installed to track BeiDou test satellites in a postprocessed survey.

Tilt

Select the Tilt option when using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor. Then, when you define the style for a Topo point or Rapid point, the Tilt warnings and Tilt auto-measure options will be available. And when defining the style for an Observed control point, or Continuous points, the Tilt warnings option will be available.

258

xFill technology

Select the xFill option when using a GNSS receiver with xFill support. This option enables you to continue surveying with RTK accuracy during base data outages for some time (depending on conditions). xFill uses new technology that leverages a worldwide network of Trimble reference stations to bridge communication outages via satellite-delivered correction data.

xFill corrections are based on a global model aligned to WGS84. These corrections are used when the RTK radio link from the base station is lost. To achieve optimal positioning performance during xFill operation, set up the base station that RTK is using on coordinates that are as close as possible to the true WGS84 coordinates for the base station point.

xFill requires the WGS84 coordinates of your RTK base to be accurate to within 1 meter of the correct

WGS84 coordinate of that base point. When establishing a field base station using the Here key in Trimble

Access, the required accuracy of the base coordinates may be achieved when the position is augmented with

SBAS such as WAAS or EGNOS. If using xFill with network RTK such as VRS, subscribers should check with their network administrator that the network is providing base coordinates and correction data in a global reference frame aligned with ITRF08 or WGS84.

Notes

•

To use this option, your GNSS receiver must support xFill.

• xFill is not available if OmniSTAR has been selected.

•

When measuring a point in xFill, the precisions cannot converge, and the best position is the single measurement at the beginning of the occupation. For this reason, any point measured when using xFill technology will become acceptable after 1 second. The Occupation time and Number of

•

measurements settings in Options are overridden by the 1 second rule during xFill mode.

Trimble Access continues storing RTK vectors and all points are measured relative to the same RTK

• coordinate system.

xFill is only available for areas covered by the broadcast satellite. For more information see: www.trimble.com

Measuring Antenna Heights

The following describes how to measure the height of an antenna mounted on a range pole when the

Measured to field is set to Bottom of antenna or Bottom of antenna mount. With a fixed height range pole, the height is a constant value.

Zephyr antenna

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Zephyr antenna, (2) is the corrected height to APC and (3) is the uncorrected height.

259

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the top of the notch on the side of the antenna.

Zephyr Geodetic antenna

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the bottom of the notch on the side of the antenna.

Trimble integrated GNSS receiver

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Trimble GNSS receiver, (2) is the corrected height to APC and (3) is the uncorrected height of 1.80m.

If this receiver is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the bottom of the groove between the gray base and the white top of the antenna, and select Center of bumper in the Measured to field.

Tip - If you are using a fixed height tripod, you can measure the height to the bottom of the antenna housing and select Bottom of antenna mount in the Measured to field.

Micro-centered L1/L2 antenna

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Micro-centered antenna, (2) is the corrected height to APC and (3) is the uncorrected height.

260

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the bottom of the plastic housing. Enter this value in the Antenna height field and set the Measured to field to Bottom of antenna.

Tornado antenna

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Tornado antenna, (2) is the corrected height to APC and (3) is the uncorrected height.

If this antenna is mounted on a tripod, measure the height to the join between the grey and white plastics on the antenna.

Trimble GeoXR

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the bottom of the receiver, (2) is the electrical phase center and

(3) is the APC.

261

When using the Trimble GeoXR mounted on a monopole, select Bottom of monopole bracket as the Measure

to method.

Note - If the Trimble GeoXR is mounted on a monopole, the distance from the bottom of the monopole bracket to the APC (3) is 0.095 m.

Trimble R10 receiver

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Trimble R10 receiver, (2) is the bottom of the antenna mount,

(3) is the bottom of the quick release, (4) is the corrected height to the APC from the bottom of the pole.

The following describes how to measure the height of an Trimble R10 receiver using the lever on the R10 extension, when the R10 is mounted on a tripod.

262

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Trimble R10 receiver, (2) is the lever of the R10 extension, (3) is the corrected height to the APC from the ground mark and (4) is the uncorrected height.

Ground plane

If you are using a ground plane, see the next section.

Measuring the Height of an Antenna When Using a Ground Plane

If the Micro-centered antenna (or a Compact L1/L2 antenna) has a ground plane measure to the underside of the notch in the ground plane.

Refer to the following diagram where (1) is the Micro-centered L1/L2 antenna, (2) is the ground plane, (3) is the underside of the notch and (4) is the top of the notch.

263

Tip - Measure the height to three different underside notches around the perimeter of the ground plane. Then record the average as the uncorrected antenna height.

Antenna.ini File

The General Survey software includes an integrated Antenna.ini file that contains a list of antennas that you can choose from when creating a survey style. You cannot edit this list in the General Survey software.

However, if you want to shorten the list or add a new antenna type, you can edit and transfer a new

Antenna.ini file.

To edit the antenna.ini file, use a text editor such as Microsoft Notepad. Edit the General Survey group, and transfer the new Antenna.ini file to the General Survey software, using Trimble's Data Transfer utility.

Note - When you transfer an Antenna.ini file, it overwrites any existing file of that name. The information in this file is also used in preference to the antenna information built into the General Survey software.

RTK Initialization Methods

If base corrections are being received and there are sufficient satellites, the survey is initialized automatically when you start the survey. A survey must be initialized before centimeter-level surveying can begin.

The number of satellites required depends on whether you are using GPS satellites only, or a combination of

GPS and GLONASS satellites. The following table summarizes the requirements.

Note - The Galileo test satellites are tracked, but not used, for initialization.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required for initialization

264

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 5 0

GPS + GLONASS 4 3

GLONASS only N/A N/A

Note - You cannot initialize if the PDOP is greater than 7.

After initialization, a position can be determined and the initialization can be maintained with one satellite less than the number required to initialize. If the number of satellites drops below this number, the survey must be reinitialized.

The following table summarizes the requirements.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required to maintain initialization and produce positions

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 4 0

GPS + GLONASS 4

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2 4

GLONASS only N/A N/A

With legacy receivers, after initialization, the survey mode changes from Float to Fixed. The mode remains

Fixed if the receiver continuously tracks at least four satellites. If the mode changes to Float, reinitialize the survey.

With new GNSS receivers, after initialization, the survey mode changes from Not initialized to Initialized.

The mode remains Initialized if the receiver continuously tracks the minimum number of satellites. If the mode changes to Not initialized, you must reinitialize the survey.

Multipath

Initialization reliability depends on the initialization method used and on whether or not multipath occurred during the initialization phase. Multipath occurs when GNSS signals are reflected off objects, such as the ground, a building, or trees. When initializing, always choose a site that has a clear view of the sky and is free of obstructions that could cause multipath.

The occurrence of multipath at the GNSS antenna adversely affects GNSS initializations and solutions:

•

If initialization is by the Known Point method, multipath can cause an initialization attempt to fail.

•

During initialization by the OTF method, it is difficult to detect multipath, which may cause initialization to be lengthy or unsuccessful.

The initialization process in Trimble receivers is very reliable. In legacy receivers, if an incorrect initialization does occur, the Trimble RTK processing routines detect it very quickly, discard the initialization automatically and the Trimble Access software then displays a warning. In receivers equipped with

265

HD-GNSS technology, incorrect initializations are more reliably prevented from occurring, and the precision estimates better reflect the multipath conditions.

Notes

•

You should adopt good survey practice and periodically check your initialization by measuring

• previously measured points with a new initialization.

To minimize the effect of multipath during an OTF initialization, move around.

Known Point Initialization

To perform a Known Point initialization:

1. Position the rover antenna over a known point.

2. From the Measure menu, tap RTK initialization.

3. Set the Method field to Known Point.

Tip - If you are using a newer receiver, you can re-initialize on-the-fly. To do this, set the Method to Reset SV tracking and then tap Reset. This will cause the receiver to drop all SV tracking, re-acquire the SVs, and re-initialize RTK.

4. Access the Point name field and tap List. Select the point from the list of known points.

5. Enter values in the Antenna height field, and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is correct.

6. When the antenna is centered and vertical over the point, tap Start.

The controller starts to record data, and the static icon ( ) appears in the status bar. Keep the antenna vertical and stationary while data is recorded.

Tip - If you are using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, tap eBubble (or press Ctrl + L ) to display the eBubble. When the bubble is green, tap Start to ensure that the point is measured within the predefined tilt tolerance. The tolerance is that specified for a

Topo point.

7. When the receiver is initialized, a message stating this appears together with the deltas from the RTK position to the known point. Tap Accept to continue.

8. If the initialization fails, the results are displayed. Tap Retry to retry the initialization.

Postprocessed Initialization Methods

In a postprocessed survey you must initialize to attain centimeter-level precisions.

Use one of the following methods to initialize dual-frequency postprocessed kinematic surveys in the field:

•

On-The-Fly

•

Known Point

Note - In a postprocessed survey, collect enough data during initialization so that the postprocessor can

266

successfully process it. Recommended times are as follows.

Initialization method 4 SVs 5 SVs 6+ SVs

L1/L2 OTF initialization N/A 15 min 8 min

Known Point initialization at least four epochs

After initialization, the survey mode changes from Not initialized to Initialized. The mode remains Initialized if the receiver continuously tracks the minimum number of satellites. If the mode changes to Not initialized, you must reinitialize the survey.

Note - If you do an On-The-Fly initialization in a postprocessed kinematic survey, you can measure points before initialization is gained. The Trimble Business Center software can back-process the data later to give a centimeter-level solution. If you do this but lose lock on the satellites while initializing, re-measure any one of the points that you surveyed before lock was lost.

Known Point Initialization

In a postprocessed survey you can initialize on:

• a point measured previously in the current job

• a point that you will provide coordinates for later (before the data is postprocessed)

See

Known Point initialization

for instructions.

RTK Survey

Real-time kinematic surveys use a radio to broadcast signals from the base station to the rover. The rover then calculates its position in real time. Configure this type of survey when you create or edit a Survey Style, then follow these steps to carry out an RTK survey:

Configure the survey style

Configure the base receiver

Configure the rover receiver

Begin the survey

End the survey

Configure the survey style

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Select each of the options in turn, and set them to suit your equipment and survey preferences.

3. When you have configured all the settings, tap Store to save them.

For more information, see:

267

Observed control point

Rapid point

Continuous points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

Configure the base receiver

To do this:

1. Set up the base station and connect the data collector.

2. From the main menu, select Measure / RTK / Start base receiver. If you are using this Survey Style for the first time, the Style wizard prompts you to specify the type of equipment you are using.

The style wizard customizes the chosen survey style, setting any parameters specific to the hardware.

Tip - To correct a mistake when customizing a survey style, first complete the process and then edit the style.

Note - When using Trimble GNSS receivers that do not have the UHF Transmit option, use an external radio at the base even if you use the internal radio at the rover.

Tip - You can use a Custom radio if the radio you have is not listed.

3. Enter the point name. If the WGS-84 point is not already in the database, the Key in / Point screen appears.

4. Enter values, or tap Here to use the current position. Only use Here once in a job.

5. Enter the code.

6. Enter the antenna height and tap Enter.

7. Disconnect the data collector from the base station.

Configure the rover receiver

268

To do this:

1. Set up the Rover receiver and connect the data collector.

2. From the main menu, select Measure / RTK / Start survey. Again, the Style wizard may prompt you to specify the type of equipment you are using.

3. Initialize the survey. If you have selected the On-The-Fly (OTF) option, initialization is automatic.

Otherwise, the RTK initialization screen appears.

4. Once the rover is initialized, the survey mode in the status line shows this. You can then measure points.

Begin the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points.

2. Enter the point name and code.

3. In the Type field, select Topo point.

4. Enter the antenna height.

5. Tap Measure. The antenna must remain stationary and vertical while you measure a point.

6. Tap Store to store the point.

7. Move to the next point and measure it.

8. To review stored points, select Review job from the Jobs menu.

End the survey

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / End GNSS survey.

2. Tap Yes to confirm.

3. Turn off the data collector.

For more information, see:

Swap base receiver

269

Operating Several Base Stations on One Radio Frequency

In an RTK survey you can reduce the effects of radio interference from other base stations on the same frequency by operating your base station with a different transmission delay. This allows you to operate several base stations on one frequency. The general procedure is as follows:

1. Check that you have the correct hardware and firmware.

2. Set up the equipment and start a survey at each base station, specifying a transmission delay and a station index number.

3. Start a rover survey and specify which base to use.

Hardware and firmware requirements

To operate several base stations on one frequency, you must use receivers that support the CMR+ or CMRx correction format.

All other base and rover receivers must be Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receivers.

Note - Do not use transmission delays if you intend to use radio repeaters.

Starting the base with a transmission delay

When you use multiple base stations, you set the transmission delay for each base when you start the base survey. Each base must broadcast with a different transmission delay and station index number. The delays allow the rover to receive corrections from all of the base stations at once. The station index numbers let you select which base station to use at the rover.

Note - You can set the base radio transmission delay only when using Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receivers.

When you carry out surveys using different base stations in one job, make sure that the coordinates of the base stations are in the same coordinate system and are in terms of each other.

Before you start the base receiver, do the following:

1. Select the CMR+ or CMRx correction format. Select this in the survey style for both the base and the rover.

2. Set the over air baud rate in the radio to at least 4800 baud.

Note - If you use a 4800 over air baud rate you can only use two base stations on one frequency. Increase the over air baud rate if you want to increase the number of base stations on one frequency.

When you start the base survey, do the following:

1. In the Station index field, enter a value within the range 0-31. This number is broadcast in the correction message.

Tip - You can configure the default station index number in the survey style. For more information,

270

refer to Station index.

2. If the receiver you are using supports transmission delays, the Transmission delay field appears.

Choose a value, depending on how many base stations you want to use. See the following table.

No. of base stations

Use these delays (in ms) ...

Base 1 Base 2 Base 3 Base 4

One

0 -

Two

0 500 -

Three

0 350 700 -

Four

0 250 500 750

For more information about starting the base survey, see

Starting a Base Survey.

For information about starting the rover and selecting which station index to use, see Starting a Rover Survey.

Starting a Real Time Survey Using a Dial-in GSM connection

If you are receiving corrections from a single base station, do not start the survey until you have started the base receiver.

To start the rover receiver for a real-time survey:

1. If you are using a cellular modem, make sure that the modem is switched on and then connect it to the receiver (or to the controller if you selected the

Route through controller option).

2. If you are using a Trimble Internal GSM/mobile internet module, make sure that the receiver is turned on and is connected to the controller.

3. From the main menu, tap Measure / <Style name> / Measure points

The message Connecting to modem appears. Once the connection is completed, the modem dials the base station or wide-area RTK service provider.

Once the cellular modem or Trimble Internal GSM/mobile internet module signals are received, and the corrections data link is established, the cellular phone icon appears on the status bar.

Tip - Select the Prompt for GNSS contact check box to display the GNSS contact that is configured in the survey style, or change the GNSS contact when you start the survey.

To end the survey, tap Measure / End GNSS survey.

The modem hangs up during the end survey process.

Note - When you send initialization strings to the modem, if you see the error message "No response from modem", check that the strings you set in the survey style are valid for your particular modem. Some modems

271

accept only upper case AT commands.

Note - To configure a Survey style for a real-time dial-in GSM survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for a

Dial-in Real Time Survey.

Starting a Real Time Survey Using a mobile internet connection

If you are receiving corrections from a single base station, do not start the survey until you have started the base receiver.

To start the rover receiver for a real-time survey:

1. If you are using a cellular modem, make sure that the modem is switched on, then connect it to the receiver.

2. If you are using a Trimble Internal GSM/mobile internet module, make sure that the receiver is turned on and is connected to the controller.

3. From the main menu, tap Measure / <Style name> / Measure points

4. If the Prompt for GNSS contact check box is selected in your survey style, select a GNSS contact to use.

The message "Establishing network connection" appears.

5. If Connect directly to Mountpoint and the NTRIP Mountpoint name were configured in the GNSS contact, you are not prompted to select one from the Source Table.

If Connect directly to Mountpoint was not selected, or the NTRIP Mountpoint name was not configured, or the defined Mountpoint cannot be accessed, the Source Table appears. Select the

Mountpoint you want to receive corrections from.

Once the corrections data link is established, the radio icon appears on the status bar.

Once the connection is completed, the modem receives corrections from the base station or wide-area

RTK service provider through the Internet connection.

Note - To configure a Survey style for a real-time internet survey, see

Configuring a Survey Style for an

Internet Real Time Survey.

Note - When you start a survey with the controller already connected to the Internet, the existing connection is used for the base data. The Internet connection does not close when you end the survey.

When you start a survey with the controller not connected to the Internet, the controller will open an Internet connection using the connection specified in the Survey Style. This connection closes when you end the survey.

272

Redialing the Base Station

If you lose the cellular modem connection during a GSM dial-in or mobile internet survey, use Redial to re-establish the connection to the base station or

wide-area RTK network.

Alternatively, you can hang up the modem using the General Survey software, continue the survey, and later redial the base to re-establish corrections.

To hang up and redial a GSM dial-in connection:

1. Tap the cellular modem icon on the status bar. The Rover radio screen appears.

2. To hang up the modem, tap Hang up.

3. To redial the base station, tap Redial.

To hang up and redial a mobile internet connection:

1. Tap the network connection icon on the status bar. The Rover radio screen appears.

2. To hang up the network connection, tap Hang up.

3. To redial the base station, tap Redial.

Notes

•

A mobile Internet connection can be hung up in the Rover radio screen only when the connection was established when you started the survey. However, you can always redial the connection from within

• the Rover radio screen while the survey is running.

When you redial a VRS service provider, a new base station position is sent through the data link.

When the General Survey software switches to the new base, the survey continues with this new position.

Starting a Wide-Area RTK Survey

Wide-Area RTK (WA RTK) systems, also called Network RTK systems, consist of a distributed network of reference stations communicating with a control center to calculate GNSS error corrections over a wide area.

Real-time correction data is transmitted by radio or cellular modem to the rover receiver within the network area.

The system improves reliability and operating range by significantly reducing systematic errors in the reference station data. This lets you increase the distance at which the rover receiver can be located from the physical reference stations, while improving on-the-fly (OTF) initialization times.

The General Survey software supports broadcast formats from the following WA RTK solutions:

•

SAPOS FKP

•

Virtual Reference Station (VRS)

•

RTCM3Net

273

To use a WA RTK system, first check that you have the necessary hardware and firmware.

Hardware Requirements

All rover receivers must have firmware that support WA RTK. For details of availability, check the Trimble website or contact your local dealer.

Real-time correction data is provided by radio or cellular modem. For details about the delivery option for your system, contact your local dealer.

Configuring the Survey Style

Before you start a survey using a WA RTK system, configure the RTK survey style.

To select a WA RTK broadcast format:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Rover options.

2. In the Broadcast format field, select one of the following options from the list:

♦

SAPOS FKP

♦

VRS (RTCM)

♦

VRS (CMR)

♦

RTCM3Net

To store VRS vectors to the nearest Physical Base Station (PBS) in the VRS network, the VRS system must be configured to output the PBS information. If the VRS system does not output PBS data, VRS data must be stored as positions.

To select a radio solution:

1. In the survey style, select Rover radio.

2. In the Type field, select your radio from the list.

Note - If you are using a radio in a VRS system, you must select a two-way radio. You cannot use Trimble internal 450 MHz or 900 MHz radios.

RTK and Infill Survey

This type of survey allows you to continue a kinematic survey when radio contact is lost. The infill data must be postprocessed.

Configure an RTK and Infill survey when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and then tap New.

2. Type in 'RTK and Infill', set the Style type to GNSS and then tap Accept.

274

3. Tap Base options.

4. In the Survey type field, select RTK and infill.

5. Specify the logging device and logging interval.

6. Do the same for Rover options.

To receive WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR positions instead of autonomous positions when the radio is down, set the Satellite differential field to SBAS (for WAAS or EGNOS), or OmniSTAR.

To track and store observations from GLONASS satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the GLONASS check box.

To track and store observations from Galileo test satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the Galileo check box.

The logging interval is for the infill session only and should be the same for each receiver.

When radio contact is lost, the following message flashes in the status line: 'Radio link down'.

To start infill:

1. From the main menu, select Measure / <Style name> / Start PP infill.

2. Initialize, and continue as for a postprocessed kinematic survey.

When the radio link returns, select Measure / Stop PP infill from the main menu and continue with your RTK survey.

If you have no radio link while starting the survey, tap Esc in the Select base station screen or when the starting survey progress bar has stopped for a long time. Then:

•

When the Waiting for radio link dialog appears, tap Continue to start the survey in Infill mode without

• waiting for RTK, or tap Cancel to stop the survey.

If the survey style has been configured to use OmniSTAR for fallback, when the Waiting for radio

link dialog appears, tap Continue to start surveying with OmniSTAR without waiting for RTK, or tap

Cancel to stop the survey.

For more information, see:

275

Observed Control Point

Rapid Point

Continuous Points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

RTK and Data Logging

This type of survey records raw GNSS data during an RTK survey.

As this survey style is not provided by the General Survey software, you must create the style the first time that you want to use it.

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and then tap New.

2. Type in 'RTK and data logging' and then tap Accept.

3. Tap Base options.

4. In the Survey type field, select RTK and logging.

5. Specify the logging device and the logging interval.

6. Repeat steps 4-6 for Rover options.

The logging interval should be the same for each receiver - typically 5 seconds. The RTK interval remains at

1 second.

To track and store observations from GLONASS satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the GLONASS check box.

To track and store observations from Galileo test satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the Galileo check box.

Note – In an RTK and Data logging survey, points measured using the Rapid point method are not saved to the T01/T02 file and are not available for postprocessing.

For more information, see:

276

Observed Control Point

Rapid Point

Continuous Topo Points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

FastStatic Survey

A FastStatic survey is a postprocessed survey using occupations of up to 20 minutes to collect raw GNSS data. The data is postprocessed to achieve sub-centimeter precisions. Typically, the occupation times vary based on the number of satellites. A minimum of four satellites is required.

Configure a FastStatic survey when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and then tap New.

2. Type in 'FastStatic' and then tap Accept.

3. Tap Base options.

4. In the Survey Type field select FastStatic.

5. Do the same for Rover options.

To track and store observations from GLONASS satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the GLONASS check box.

To track and store observations from Galileo test satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the Galileo check box.

For more information, see:

Rover Options

277

Base Options

Starting a rover survey

Laser Rangefinder

FastStatic Point

PPK Survey

Postprocessed Kinematic surveys store raw observations and process them later.

Configure a PPK survey when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and then tap New.

2. Type in 'PPK' and then tap Accept.

3. Tap Base options.

4. In the Survey Type field select PP Kinematic

5. Do the same for Rover options.

To track and store observations from GLONASS satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the GLONASS check box.

To track and store observations from Galileo test satellites as well as GPS satellites, select the Galileo check box.

Note - When logging PPK data to the controller and the message "Unsupported receiver firmware version" appears, upgrade the receiver firmware to version 3.30 or later, or log the data to the receiver.

Before you measure points,

initialize

the survey using one of the following methods:

•

Known point

•

New point

•

On-The-Fly (OTF)

When you are familiar with the equipment, you can configure the PP initialization times.

For more information, see:

Rover Options

Base Options

278

Starting a rover survey

Laser Rangefinder

FastStatic Point

PP Initialization Times

Select the PP initialization times survey style option to define initialization times. Generally the default settings are appropriate.

In a postprocessed survey, collect enough data during initialization so that the postprocessor can successfully process it. Recommended times are as follows.

Initialization method 4 SVs 5 SVs 6+ SVs

L1/L2 OTF initialization N/A 15 min 8 min

Known Point initialization at least four epochs

Warning - Reducing any of these times can affect the outcome of a postprocessed survey. Increase these times rather than decrease them.

The number of satellites required depends on whether you are using GPS satellites only, or a combination of

GPS and GLONASS satellites. The following table summarizes the requirements.

Notes

•

The Galileo test satellites are tracked, but not used, for initialization.

•

The QZSS system operates in the same time-base as GPS and therefore is included in the counters as another GPS satellite.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required for On-The-Fly initialization

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 5 0

GPS + GLONASS 4

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2 4

GLONASS only N/A N/A

Note - You cannot initialize if the PDOP is greater than 20.

279

reinitialized.

The following table summarizes the requirements.

Minimum L1/L2 satellites required to maintain initialization and produce positions

Satellite Systems GPS GLONASS

GPS only 4 0

GPS + GLONASS 4

GPS + GLONASS 3

GPS + GLONASS 2

GPS + GLONASS 1

GLONASS only N/A N/A

RT Differential Survey

This rover survey type uses the differential corrections transmitted from the WAAS, EGNOS, QZSS or

OmniSTAR satellites, or a differential base station, to achieve sub-meter positioning at the rover.

Differential surveys must track four satellites to calculate a position. SBAS differential surveys do not require initialization.

As this survey style is not provided by the General Survey software, you must create the style the first time that you want to use it. To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and then tap New.

2. Enter a name in the Style name field.

3. In the Style type field, choose GNSS and tap Accept.

4. Choose Rover options, select RT Differential as the Survey type and then:

♦

Set the Broadcast format field to RTCM (land based transmission), SBAS or OmniSTAR.

♦

Define an elevation mask, PDOP mask and antenna.

Notes

•

To use the QZSS SBAS functionality, select SBAS as the Broadcast format and select the QZSS

• option.

For WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR surveys, you must use a GNSS receiver that can track

•

WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR satellites.

OmniSTAR support requires receiver firmware version 4.60 or later.

•

See your local Trimble distributor for more information.

280

For more information, see:

Observed Control Point

Rapid Point

Continuous Topo Points

Configuring the Survey Style for a Site Calibration

for RT differential surveys

Wide Area Augmentation System (WAAS) and European Global

Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS)

WAAS is a satellite-based delivery system for differential positions. It is available only in North America.

The equivalent system in Europe is the European Global Navigation Overlay Service (EGNOS), and in Asia it is MSAS.

WAAS and EGNOS signals provide real-time, differentially corrected positions without the need for a radio link. You can use WAAS or EGNOS in real-time surveys when the ground-based radio link is down.

To use WAAS signals, in the Rover options screen of your survey style, set Satellite differential to SBAS (for

WAAS or EGNOS depending on your location).

In real-time differential surveys, you can set the broadcast format to SBAS to always store WAAS/EGNOS positions without the need for a radio link.

When WAAS/EGNOS signals are being received, the radio icon changes to a SBAS icon, and in an RTK survey, RTK:SBAS is displayed on the status line.

281

In a WAAS/EGNOS survey, QC1 quality control information is available, while QC2 and QC3 are not available.

The availability of WAAS/EGNOS signals depends on your location. EGNOS is available in Europe, WAAS is available in the Americas.

OmniSTAR Differential Correction Service

OmniSTAR is a wide-area differential GPS service provider. OmniSTAR correction signals are proprietary, are available worldwide, but are only supported by an OmniSTAR capable GNSS receiver and a subscription must be bought from OmniSTAR to receive a subscription authorization.

OmniSTAR signals provide real-time, differentially corrected positions without the need for a radio link. You can use OmniSTAR:

•

•

for fallback in an RTK survey

when the ground-based radio link is down

Subscription levels for OmniSTAR corrections include:

•

OmniSTAR HP, G2 and XP - all three are displayed in Trimble Access as OmniSTAR HP

•

OmniSTAR VBS - displayed in Trimble Access as OmniSTAR VBS

In an OmniSTAR survey, QC1 quality control information is available, while QC2 and QC3 are not available.

Notes

•

For WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR surveys, you must use a GNSS receiver that can track

•

WAAS/EGNOS/OmniSTAR satellites.

To track OmniSTAR satellites, start a survey using a style that specifies OmniSTAR as the Satellite

Differential service. Once you end that survey, subsequent surveys will track OmniSTAR satellites

• until you start a new survey with a style that does not specify OmniSTAR for the Satellite differential.

The OmniSTAR subscription expiry date is displayed on the OmniSTAR initialization screen or from

• the Instrument / Receiver settings screen.

OmniSTAR is only available in the Trimble R7-GNSS with firmware 4.60 or later, and in the

•

Trimble R10 receiver.

To process Trimble Access job files with OmniSTAR data in Trimble Business Center, you must have

• version 2.70 or later.

See your local Trimble distributor for more information.

OmniSTAR - RTK Survey

To survey using RTK and OmniSTAR do this:

Create an RTK survey style with the satellite differential set to OmniSTAR. See Satellite differential.

2. Start an RTK survey using this survey style.

282

The Select OmniSTAR Offset screen appears.

To relate the OmniSTAR positions to the RTK positions, you must measure the OmniSTAR offset between an RTK measured point and the same position measured using OmniSTAR. Before the offset can be measured, you must wait for the OmniSTAR survey to converge.

Tip - The following techniques enable you to survey without the convergence delay.

♦

You can choose to measure the OmniSTAR offset later when the OmniSTAR system has converged. To do this: a. Tap Esc and continue surveying using RTK.

b. To check to see if the OmniSTAR survey has converged tap General Survey /

Measure / OmniSTAR initialization.

c. When the OmniSTAR survey has converged, tap Offset and then measure the

OmniSTAR offset. See steps 4 to 10 below.

♦

You can initialize your OmniSTAR survey enabling you to to continue surveying using the

OmniSTAR signals if the ground-based radio link goes down during an RTK survey. See

Initializing an OmniSTAR survey

below.

3. Tap New.

4. From the Initialization point field select a previously measured point.

Tip - Trimble recommends selecting the highest quality, most convenient RTK point.

5. Define the antenna.

6. Optionally, enter a note.

7. With the survey receiver positioned at the Initialization point tap Start to measure the point.

When the measurement is complete, the Trimble Access software computes the offset between the

OmniSTAR position and the initialization point and applies this offset to the subsequent OmniSTAR corrected positions from the GNSS receiver, ensuring that the OmniSTAR positions are in terms of the RTK points.

When OmniSTAR signals are being received, the radio icon changes to an SBAS icon , and

RTK:OmniSTAR appears on the status line.

Tips

♦

Tap to see the SBAS status. From the SBAS status screen, tap the Info softkey to see the

♦

OmniSTAR initialization details. The Info softkey is only available when you are in a survey.

Tap the Radio softkey from the SBAS status screen to access the

Rover radio

screen.

8. Continue surveying.

If the ground-based radio link goes down during an RTK survey you can continue surveying using

283

the OmniSTAR signals.

For subsequent RTK surveys using OmniSTAR and the same RTK base as before, you do not need to measure a new OmniSTAR offset. When you start the survey you will be presented with a list of previously measured offsets for the current base. Select an appropriate offset.

Tips

•

Tap All to see all previously measured offsets for all bases and then Filter to filter the list to display the offsets for the current base. You must select an offset for the current RTK base, or for another base that is in the same calibration. Tap Delete to delete an offset. Tap Clear to clear a previously

• selected offset.

The selected offset is indicated by a tick.

Starting an OmniSTAR survey on its own

If you can't start an RTK survey you can start an OmniSTAR survey on its own. To do this:

1. Attempt to start an RTK survey configured to use the OmniSTAR system when RTK is unavailable.

2. Tap Esc. You will be asked if you want to cancel the survey or start an OmniSTAR survey without waiting for RTK.

3. Tap Continue to start an OmniSTAR survey.

4. Select an OmniSTAR offset.

Note - Because you have not received an RTK base yet, the offset list can not be filtered. You must select an offset with the appropriate base.

Tip - The selected offset is indicated by a tick.

5. Continue surveying

Later, if you are within radio range and the RTK base is detected, a New base detected message appears, enabling you to select the base and continue surveying using RTK.

Initializing an OmniSTAR survey

If you start a survey without RTK, or if the ground-based radio link goes down during an RTK survey and you lose lock on satellites resulting in OmniSTAR losing convergence, you can manually initialize the

OmniSTAR system. To do this:

1. Tap General Survey / Measure / OmniSTAR initialization.

2. If you have not already done so, select an offset.

Tip - The selected offset is indicated by a tick.

3. Tap Init.

4. From the Initialization point field, select a previously measured point.

284

Tip - Trimble recommends that you select the highest quality, most convenient RTK point.

5. Define the antenna.

6. With the survey receiver positioned at the Initialization point, tap Start to measure the point.

The OmniSTAR system will converge.

Notes

•

This procedure is only available for OmniSTAR HP, G2 and XP subscription levels.

•

If your RTK survey is running and an OmniSTAR offset is selected, OmniSTAR can initialize from

• the RTK survey automatically and this procedure is not necessary.

Tap to see the SBAS status. From the SBAS status screen, tap the Info softkey to see the

OmniSTAR initialization details. The Info softkey is only available when you are in a survey.

OmniSTAR initialization - RT Differential Survey

To survey using RT differential and OmniSTAR do this:

Create an RT differential survey style with the broadcast format set to OmniSTAR. See RT

Differential Survey.

2. Start an RT differential survey using this survey style.

When OmniSTAR signals are being received (and not RTK), the radio icon changes to an SBAS icon.

Tip - Tap the SBAS icon to see the SBAS status.

Note - If you subscribed for OmniSTAR HP, G2, or XP, the accuracy of your position after convergence will improve as the system converges.

Rapid Point

This is a method for measuring real-time GNSS points quickly. Configure this type of point when you create or edit a GNSS Survey Style. The point is stored when the preset precisions have been satisfied. There is no minimum occupation time.

Configure the survey style

The General Survey software collects just one epoch of data when the preset precisions are reached, so the default precision values should ideally be higher than for other point measurement types. The software uses this single epoch of data to define the point, making Rapid point the least precise measurement method.

To configure the survey style, from the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

285

measuring. If you want to enter your own precision tolerances, clear this check box.

When "Store RTK initialized only" is not enabled, both RTK Initialized and Uninitialized solutions that meet the precision tolerances can be stored.

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can select:

•

Tilt auto-measure to auto-measure points when the pole is within a specified Tilt tolerance.

•

Tilt warnings to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance

Tip - To enable these options, select Survey Styles / Rover options and then select

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

Measuring a rapid point

To measure a Rapid point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and then select

Rapid point from the Method field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

5. Tap Measure to start recording data. The point is automatically stored when the preset precisions are reached.

Tip - When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can configure the survey style to

prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance.

When measuring a point, the

eBubble appears. Store the point when the bubble is within the tilt tolerance.

Tilt auto-measuring rapid points

To Tilt auto-measure rapid points, you must use a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, and define a suitable style. See

Configure the survey style.

To Tilt auto-measure rapid points:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and then enter Rapid

point in the Method field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

286

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

5. Tap Start. The eBubble automatically appears and Waiting for level appears in the status line.

6. When the receiver is within the specified tilt tolerance, the position will auto-measure.

7. When the preset occupation time and precisions have been reached, tap Store.

8. The status becomes Waiting to move. You can now move to the next point to be measured. When movement of more than 5 degrees of tilt is detected, the status changes to Waiting for level. The system is now ready to measure the next point.

9. To exit the Tilt auto-measure sequence, press End.

Tips

♦

You can tap the button to accept the measurement before the occupation time or precisions have been satisfied or if there has been movement, tilt or precision warnings during

♦ the occupation.

Select Instrument / Receiver settings to configure the

Configuring a survey style to use a laser rangefinder

Measuring Points with a Laser Rangefinder

During a survey, select Measure laser points from the Measure menu to measure laser points as offsets from a known point. Alternatively, to insert a distance into an H.Dist or a Length field, tap Laser from the pop-up menu and measure the distance with the laser.

If the Auto measure field in the survey style Laser rangefinder option is set to Yes, the General Survey software instructs the laser to take a measurement when you tap Laser.

If the General Survey software receives only a distance measurement from the laser, another screen is displayed with the measured distance in a Slope distance field. Enter a vertical angle if the measured distance was not horizontal.

Note - If you are using a laser without a compass, you must key in a magnetic azimuth before the General

Survey software can store the point.

Note - Allow the laser to settle for a few seconds before you take a measurement with it. If you enter a value for magnetic declination in the laser, make sure the

Cogo settings

value is set to zero.

For more information, see:

•

Continuous Topo

Use the Continuous topo function to measure points continuously.

A point is stored when one of the following conditions occurs:

287

• a predefined time has elapsed

• a predefined distance has been exceeded

• both predefined time and/or distance settings have been met

• a predefined stop time and distance settings have been met

Configure the survey style

To configure the survey style, from the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

You can store quality control information with each point measurement. Options may include QC1,

QC1 & QC2, and QC1 & QC3, depending on the type of survey.

When you select the Store low latency positions check box, the measurements are made by the receiver in low latency mode. Low latency is more suitable when using continuous topo with distance based tolerances.

When Store low latency positions is not enabled, measurements from the receiver are synchronized on the epoch resulting in slightly more accurate positions, and is more suitable when using continuous topo with time-based tolerances.

Tip - If using Continuous topo as a static test to check the quality of measured positions make sure Store low

latency positions is not enabled.

When "Store RTK initialized only" is not enabled, both RTK Initialized and Uninitialized solutions that meet the precision tolerances can be stored.

If you are doing a postprocessed survey, the time interval is the logging interval. Configure this logging interval in the Rover options screen of the postprocessed survey style.

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can select

Tilt warnings to prompt a warning

when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance.

Tip - To enable this option, select Survey Styles / Rover options and then select

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

Measuring continuous topo points

To measure Continuous topo points:

1. From the main menu, tap Measure / Continuous topo.

2. In the Method field, select one of the following:

♦

Fixed time

♦

Fixed distance

288

♦

Time and distance

♦

Time or distance

♦

Stop and go

Note - For a postprocessed survey, you can only use the Fixed time continuous method. The time interval is set by default to the same value as the logging interval.

4. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

5. Enter a value in the Time interval field, or the Stop and go field and/or the Distance field, depending on the method you are using.

6. To generate offsets, set the Offset field to One or Two. The Fixed time method does not support offsets.

7. Enter a value in the Start point name field (or enter a start point name for the center line when measuring offset points). This increments automatically.

8. If you are measuring an offset line, enter the offset distances and the start point name. To enter a left horizontal offset, enter a negative offset distance or use the Left or Right pop-up menus.

9. Tap Measure to start recording data, and then move along the feature to be surveyed.

If you are using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor and Tilt warnings has been selected, you will not be able to measure a point until the receiver is within the defined tilt tolerance as indicated by the eBubble.

Note - To change the distance interval, time interval, or offset while measuring points, enter new values in the fields.

10. To stop measuring continuous points, tap End.

Tip - To store a position before the predefined conditions have been met, tap Store.

Using an Echo sounder to store depths

You can use Continuous topo to store depths with measured points.

To configure the survey style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Tap Echo sounder.

Select an instrument from the Type field.

4. Configure the Controller port:

♦

If you set the Controller port to Bluetooth, you must configure the Echo sounder bluetooth

♦ settings.

If you set the Controller port to COM1 or COM2, you must configure the port settings.

5. If required, enter the Latency and Draft and then tap Accept.

The latency caters for echo sounders where the depth is received by the controller after the position.

General Survey software uses the latency to match and store the depth when it is received with continuous topo points that were saved previously.

6. Tap Accept and then tap Store to save the changes.

289

To store continuous topo points with depths, follow the steps above to

Measure continuous topo points, while

connected to the echo sounder with a correctly configured survey style.

Notes

•

During the survey, you can disable storing depths with continuous topo points. To do this, tap Options and then clear the Use echo sounder check box. You can also configure Latency and Draft from

•

Options.

The Draft will have an effect on how the antenna height is measured. If the Draft is 0.00 then the antenna height is the distance from the transducer to the antenna. If a Draft is specified, then the antenna height is the distance from the transducer to the antenna, minus the draft.

The elevations of continuous topo points stored in General Survey software do not have the depth applied to them. Use Export custom format files to generate reports with depths applied.

The following sample reports are available for download from www.trimble.com:

•

[Survey report.xsl]

•

[Comma Delimited with elevation and depths.xsl]

•

[Comma Delimited with depth applied.xsl]

FastStatic Point

This type of point is measured in a

FastStatic survey.

Configure the preset times at which a FastStatic point is measured when you create or edit a FastStatic Survey Style - usually the default time is sufficient.

Note - If you do not record enough data, the points may not be successfully postprocessed.

The General Survey software terminates a FastStatic occupation automatically if the Auto store point check box is selected and the specified occupation time is satisfied.

The default occupation times are satisfactory for most users. If you change an occupation time, choose a setting according to the number of satellites being tracked by that receiver. Remember that both receivers

290

must track the same satellite at the same time for the data to be useful.

Tip - Use a mobile phone or a walkie-talkie radio to verify that both receivers are tracking the same satellites.

Changing the occupation times directly affects the outcome of a FastStatic survey. Any changes should increase this time rather than decrease it.

You can only measure a FastStatic point in a FastStatic survey.

Note - FastStatic surveys are postprocessed and do not need to be initialized.

To measure a FastStatic point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional).

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

4. Tap Measure to start measuring the point.

5. When the preset occupation time is reached, as shown in the following table, tap Store to store the point.

Receiver type 4 SVs 5 SVs 6+ SVs

Single-frequency 30 min 25 min 20 min

Dual-frequency 20 min 15 min 8 min

Tip - No satellite tracking is necessary between measuring points. You can turn off the equipment.

Observed Control Point

This is a previously configured method of measuring and storing a point. Configure observed control points when you create or edit a Survey Style. The point is stored with a search classification of Normal.

Configure the survey style

To configure the survey style, from the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

The General Survey software can terminate observed control point measurements and store the results automatically if the Auto store point check box is selected and the occupation times are satisfied. For RTK surveys, the number of measurements and the horizontal and vertical precisions must also be satisfied. The default setting for the Number of measurements field is 180. The extended occupation time suggests that this measurement type is ideally suited to points that will be used for control purposes.

Note - When the Auto store point check box is cleared, tap Store when it appears on the Enter button to store the point. The Enter softkey is blank until the specified occupation time has been met. To store a point before

291

that time has elapsed, tap Enter. When you do this, the General Survey software asks you to confirm storing the point. Tap Yes to store the point.

Quality control information is automatically stored with each point:

•

Real-time observed control points can store QC1, QC1 & QC2, or QC1 & QC3 records.

•

Postprocessed observed control points only store QC1 records.

If the Topo point option is configured to perform 180 measurements, the positional result is similar to a point measured using the observed control point measurement type. Differences are:

• the default value in the Quality control field

• the observation class given by the office software when the point is downloaded

When the General Survey software measures an observed control point, it stores a point when the preset number of epochs has elapsed and the precisions have been attained.

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can select

Tilt warnings to prompt a warning

when the pole is outside a specified Tilt tolerance.

Tip - To enable this option, select Survey Styles / Rover options and then select

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

Select Auto abandon to abandon and restart the measurement process. When selected, points measured using a

GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor that experience excess tilt, or, for all receivers, excess movement, during the measurement process will be abandoned and the measurement process restarted.

Measuring an observed control point

To measure an observed control point:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the main menu, select Measure / Measure points.

♦

Tap Favorites and select Measure points.

2. Enter values in the Point name and Code fields (the Code field entry is optional), and then select

Observed control point in the Method field.

3. Enter a value in the Antenna height field and make sure that the setting in the Measured to field is set appropriately.

5. Tap Measure to start recording data.

6. When the preset number of epochs and precisions are reached, tap Store to store the point.

If you are using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor and Tilt warnings has been selected (see

Configure the survey style),

the eBubble appears. Store the point when the bubble is within the tilt tolerance.

292

Tips

♦

If the eBubble is outside the tilt tolerance (the bubble is red) a Receiver not level, measure

♦

anyway? message appears. Tap Yes to continue measuring the position.

You can tap the button to accept the measurement before the occupation time or precisions have been satisfied or if there has been movement, tilt, or precision warnings

♦ during the occupation.

An Excess tilt detected when static message appears if you have had excess tilt at any time

♦ during the measurement process.

An Excess tilt message appears if you have excess tilt at the time of storage.

♦

Select Instrument / Receiver settings to configure the

Configuring an integrated survey style

Note - For an RTK survey, initialize the survey before starting to measure the point. For a Postprocessed

Kinematic survey, you can start measuring a point, but you cannot store it until you have initialized the survey.

RTK On Demand

If you are using an Internet connection to send RTK data from the base to the rover, then you can use General

Survey's RTK on Demand functionality to control the amount of data broadcast from the base receiver. You can request the base station to send data only when you require it. This will reduce the amount of data received by your cellular phone and may reduce costs from your cellular network service provider.

Once the RTK survey is running over an Internet connection, you can access the RTK on Demand controls by tapping the icon in the status bar.

When the survey is started, General Survey will default to Play data will be streamed continuously.

mode. When in Play mode, RTK

If you tap the softkey, your survey will go into Pause mode and data will only be streamed when required. General Survey will request data from the base station when initialization is lost, or when you choose to measure a point, or when you start continuous topo, or when you use the stakeout functionality. As soon as the receiver has regained initialization, or the survey task is complete, then General Survey will request the base station to stop streaming data.

Note - When in Pause mode, you cannot measure rapid points or fast fix points.

If you tap the softkey then your survey will go into Stop mode and no RTK data will be streamed.

This can be used in situations where you do not wish to end your survey, but do not require the receiver to stay initialized until you are ready to start surveying again.

Hardware requirements

The RTK on Demand function requires an Internet connection at both the GNSS base station and the rover.

This means that you will require two cellular phones, either mobile Internet capable or GSM, connected to a

293

dial-up Internet connection. Either General Survey software is required to be at both the GNSS base station and the rover (this means that you will require two Trimble controllers running General Survey software), or you must be connected to a Trimble VRS

Net, Trimble GPSNet or GPSBase infrastructure system.

294

Survey - Integrated

Integrated Surveys

Using an Integrated Survey (IS) allows you to connect to both a GNSS receiver and a conventional instrument at the same time.

You can perform an integrated survey using Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station or

Trimble 5600 instruments and RTK surveys.

For more information, see:

•

•

Starting an integrated survey

•

Switching between instruments

•

Ending an integrated survey

•

Using the eBubble in an integrated survey

•

Using an IS rover survey rod

Configuring an integrated survey style

An integrated survey style is created by referencing a conventional survey style and an RTK survey style, and then providing additional information specific to the integrated survey.

To configure an integrated survey style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles and then tap New.

2. Enter the Style name, set the Style type to Integrated Surveying and then tap Accept.

3. Select the Conventional and GNSS styles you want to reference for the integrated style and then tap

Accept.

Enter the Prism to antenna offset.

5. To stake a road using Precise elevation, where the GNSS horizontal position is combined with the elevation from a conventional setup, enable Precise elevation.

6. Tap Accept and then tap Store to save the changes.

Note - When the IS rover option is enabled, the only way to change the GNSS antenna height in an integrated survey is to enter the height to the prism for the current target. The GNSS antenna height is computed automatically using the Prism to antenna offset configured in the IS style.

Starting an integrated survey

There are a number of ways to start an integrated survey. Use the method that best suits the way you work:

•

Start a conventional survey and then start a GNSS survey at a later time.

•

Start a GNSS survey and then start a conventional survey at a later time.

•

Start an integrated survey. This starts a conventional survey and a GNSS survey at the same time.

295

To start an integrated survey, first create an

integrated survey style,

and then select Measure / <integrated survey style name>.

To start a single survey, and then start an integrated survey at a later time, begin your first survey as usual and then select Measure / Integrated surveying. Only the styles that are configured in the integrated survey style are available in an integrated survey.

Tip - When using an integrated survey you can measure points using GNSS during a Resection and Station

Setup Plus.

Switching between instruments

In an integrated survey, the controller is connected to both devices at the same time. This makes switching between instruments very quick.

To switch from one instrument to another, do one of the following:

•

Tap the Status line

•

Select Measure / Switch to <survey style type>

•

Tap Switch to and then select Switch to <survey style type>

•

On the Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller, customize

the [Left App] button or the [Right App] button to Switch to TS/GNSS and then tap the [App] button.

In an integrated survey, identify the instrument that is currently 'active' by looking at the Status bar or the

Status line.

When you use the General Survey software in an integrated survey, there are some areas of functionality within the General Survey software where you cannot switch instruments. For example, if the current screen is

Continuous topo.

For more information on how the different features behave, and the way to switch the feature to use the active instrument see the following sections:

Measure topo / Measure points

•

If you switch instruments during an integrated survey when you are using Measure topo

(conventional), the software automatically switches you to the Measure points (GNSS) screen (and

• vice versa).

The point name defaults to the next available name.

•

The code defaults to the last stored code.

•

Switch instruments before you change the point name and code. If you enter a point name or code before switching instruments, they will not be the default after the switch.

Measure codes

•

When you switch instruments, the active instrument is used for the next observation.

Continuous topo

296

•

Only one Continuous topo survey is possible at one time.

•

You cannot switch the instrument used in Continuous topo while Continuous topo is running.

•

To change the instrument that is being used in Continuous topo, tap Esc to exit Continuous topo and

• then restart Continuous topo.

You can switch instruments if the Continuous topo screen is open but running in the background. If you switch instruments when the Continuous topo screen is running in the background, and you later make the Continuous topo screen the active screen, the General Survey software automatically switches to the instrument with which you started Continuous topo.

Stakeout Points, Lines, Arcs, Alignments, and Roads

•

When you switch instruments, the graphical stakeout display changes.

•

If you switch instruments when the Stakeout graphics screen is running in the background, and you later make the Stakeout graphics screen the active screen, the General Survey software automatically switches to the instrument you last used.

Ending an integrated survey

To end an integrated survey, you can end each survey individually, or select End integrated survey to end the

GNSS survey and the conventional survey at the same time.

Using the eBubble in an integrated survey

If you are using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor the eBubble can be displayed, but for all conventional measurements Tilt auto-measure is not supported and no tilt warnings will be issued.

Tips

•

Press CTRL + L to show or hide the eBubble.

•

To move the eBubble, tap and hold on the eBubble then and drag it to a new position.

•

Select Instrument / Receiver settings to configure the

Using an IS rover survey rod

•

The eBubble is aligned to the receiver's LED panel. To operate the eBubble correctly, the LED panel must be facing you (that is, you must be looking directly at the receiver's LED panel).

IS rover - Integrated survey rod

When surveying with an integrated survey style you can use an IS rover survey rod.

For more information, see:

•

Configuring an IS rover

•

Configuring an IS rover

The IS rover survey rod is configured as part of the integrated survey style.

297

When you configure the IS rover survey rod, enter the Prism to antenna offset. The offset is measured from the center of the prism to the position on the GNSS antenna. The position on the GNSS antenna is defined in the Rover options form of the GNSS survey style which is referenced by the integrated survey style.

The following table shows the offset distance from the center of the prism to the Trimble R8 antenna:

Prism type

VX/S Series MultiTrack

VX/S Series 360°

RMT606

Offset measured to bottom of antenna mount

0.034 m

0.057 m

0.033 m

The following table shows the offset distance from the center of the prism to the Trimble R10 receiver antenna:

Prism type

R10 360°

VX/S Series MultiTrack

Offset measured to bottom of quick release

0.028 m

0.034 m

Note - If an incorrect antenna measurement method is set, the incorrect offset is applied to the GNSS antenna heights.

Using an IS rover survey rod

In an integrated survey you must enable IS rover and use the target prism height to update the GNSS height automatically. When the IS rover option is enabled, a change to the conventional target height applies the

Prism to antenna offset configured in the IS style and automatically updates the GNSS antenna height.

To change the IS rover height:

1. Ensure that the Prism to antenna offset is correctly configured and applies to the antenna Type and

Measured to setting configured in the RTK style.

2. Tap the target icon in the status bar and select the appropriate target.

3. Enter the Target height (the height to the center of the prism).

The updated height is not displayed in the Status bar until the target form is closed.

4. Tap Antenna to see the entered target height, style configured prism to antenna offset, and computed antenna height. This step is optional.

5. Tap Accept.

298

Survey - Stakeout

Stakeout - Configuring the Display Mode

The display varies depending on whether you are performing a

Conventional or

GNSS survey.

Conventional Surveys

For a conventional survey the Stakeout graphical display

screen displays directions using the conventional instrument as a reference point.

For a conventional survey, you can configure the Stakeout directions and the Display mode of the Stakeout graphical display.

Offset &Stakeout directions allows you to configure the stakeout directions to be from an instrument perspective, target perspective, or automatic. Automatic configuration sets the stakeout directions automatically, based on whether you have a servo connection or a robotic connection to the instrument:

Display mode allows you to configure the graphical navigation display.

When the Display mode is set to Direction and distance, the navigation screen displays:

♦

A large arrow pointing in the direction you have to move. When you are close to the point, the arrow changes to the in/out and left/right directions, relative to the instrument.

When the Display mode is set to In/out and left/right, the navigation screen displays:

♦

In/out and left/right directions, with the conventional instrument as a reference point.

To configure the display:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Instrument.

2. Set the Offset &Stakeout directions:

♦

Automatic - navigation directions are from Instrument perspective (during a servo

♦ connection), or Target perspective (during a robotic survey).

Instrument perspective (standing behind the instrument) - in/out and left/right navigation directions given from an instrument perspective, looking from the instrument towards the

♦ target.

Target perspective (standing at the target) - in/out and left/right navigation directions given from a target perspective, looking from the target towards the instrument.

3. Tap Accept, and then select Stakeout.

4. Set the Display mode:

♦

Direction and distance - navigate using the large arrow, similar to GNSS stakeout.

When you are close to the point, the display automatically changes to the in/out and left/right display.

299

♦

In/out and left/right - navigate using in/out and left/right directions, with the instrument as a reference point.

5. Choose a setting in the Deltas (points) and Deltas (other) fields. The two deltas fields allow you to configure one deltas default for point stakeout, and the other deltas default for arc, line, alignment and road stakeout.

♦

Distances - navigate to a point using distances only

♦

Delta grid - navigate to a point using delta grid values

♦

Station and offset - navigate to a point using station and offset when staking a line or arc.

When staking to the line or arc the station and offset view displays the Station, H.offset,

V.Dist and the Grade.

When staking to the Station on the line / arc or the Station/offset from line / arc the view displays the Station, H.offset, V.dist, delta Station and delta H.offset.

6. Use the Distance tolerance field to specify the allowable error in distance. If the target is within this distance from the point, the graphical stakeout display indicates that the distance(s) is correct.

7. Use the Angle tolerance field to specify the allowable error in angle. If the conventional instrument is turned away from the point by less than this angle, the graphical stakeout display indicates that the angle is correct.

8. If a DTM file has been transferred into the General Survey software, you can select the Display

cut/fill to DTM check box, and the graphical display screen will display the cut or fill relative to that

DTM. Use the DTM field to specify the name of the DTM to be used. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

Note - All DTM files from all folders are listed.

Alternatively, tap Options from the Stakeout screen to configure the settings for the current survey.

GNSS Surveys

For a real-time GNSS surveys, you can set the mode of the

Stakeout graphical display so that the point stays

fixed in the center of the screen, or so that your position stays fixed in the center of the screen.

To configure the display:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Stakeout.

2. In the Display mode, select either Target centered, or Surveyor centered.

3. Choose a setting in the Deltas field. The options are:

♦

Azimuth and distance - navigate to a point using azimuth and distance

♦

Delta grid - navigate to a point using delta grid values

♦

Station and offset - navigate to a point using station and offset

When staking To the line or arc the station and offset view displays the Station, H.offset, V.Dist and the Grade.

When staking to the Station on the line or arc, or the Station/offset from line or arc the view displays the Station, H.offset, V.Dist, delta Station and delta H.offset.

300

4. Choose a setting in the Display orientation field. The options are:

♦

Direction of travel - the screen will orientate so that the top of the screen points in the

♦ direction of travel.

North - the screen will orientate so that the north arrow points up the screen.

♦

Reference azimuth:

◊

For a point the screen will orientate to the azimuth specified when the Stake option is

◊

set to Relative to azimuth.

For a line the screen will orientate to the azimuth of the line.

Notes

♦

If, when staking a point, the Display orientation is set to Reference azimuth and the Stake option is not set to Relative to azimuth the display orientation behaviour will default to

♦

Direction of travel.

When using a TSC3 or Trimble Slate Controller the compass is ignored if the Display

orientation is set to North or Reference azimuth.

5. If a DTM file has been transferred into the General Survey software, you can select the Display

cut/fill to DTM check box, and the graphical display screen will display the cut or fill relative to that

DTM. Use the DTM field to specify the name of the DTM to be used. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

Note - All DTM files from all folders are listed.

Alternatively, tap Options from the Stakeout screen to configure the settings for the current survey.

Stakeout - Using the Graphical Display

The graphical display in Stakeout helps you to navigate to a point. The display varies depending on whether you are performing a

Conventional or

GNSS

survey.

Tip - If navigating with a TSC3 or Trimble Slate Controller you can use the internal compass to aid navigation. See

Compass

for further details.

Conventional

To use the graphical display in a conventional survey:

If you are using the Direction and distance mode:

1. Hold the display screen in front of you as you walk forwards in the direction that the arrow is pointing. The arrow points in the direction of the point.

2. When you get to within 3 meters (10 feet) of the point, the arrow disappears, and the in/out and left/right directions appear, with the instrument as a reference point. Follow the instructions below to navigate in this mode.

Note - When navigating to the position, a grid is displayed as you near the target and when the large

301

navigation arrow disappears. The grid changes scale as you move closer to the target.

If you are using the In/out and left/right mode:

1. The first display shows which way the instrument should be turned, the angle that the instrument should display and the distance from the last point staked to the point currently being staked.

2. Turn the instrument (two outline arrows will appear when it is on line), and direct the rod person on line.

If you are using a servo instrument, and the Servo auto turn field in the survey style is set to HA &

VA, or HA only the instrument automatically turns to the point.

If you are working robotically, or when the Servo auto turn field in the survey style is set to Off, the instrument does not turn automatically. To turn the instrument to the angle indicated on the screen, tap

Turn.

3. If the instrument is not in TRK mode, tap Measure to take a distance measurement.

4. The display shows how far the person holding the rod should move towards or away from the instrument.

5. Direct the person holding the rod, and take another distance measurement.

6. Repeat steps 2 - 5 until the point has been located (when four outline arrows are displayed), then mark the point.

7. If a measurement to the target is within the angular and distance tolerances, tap Store at any time to accept the current measurement.

If the instrument is in TRK mode and you require a higher precision distance measurement, tap

Measure to take an STD measurement and then tap Store to accept that measurement.

To discard the STD measurement and return the instrument to TRK mode, tap Esc.

If you are operating a robotic instrument remotely from the target:

♦ the instrument automatically tracks the prism as it moves

♦ the instrument continuously updates the graphical display

♦ the graphical display is reversed and the arrows are shown from the target (prism) to the instrument

GNSS

When you use the graphical display in a GNSS survey to navigate to a point, the screen first shows a large navigation arrow when you are some distance away from the point and then automatically changes to a bull's-eye target as you move in closer.

Note - When the

Display orientation is set to Direction of travel:

•

The arrow assumes that your are moving forward at all times.

•

The bull's eye target does not assume that your are moving forward.

To use the graphical display in a GNSS survey:

302

1. Hold the display screen in front of you as you walk forwards in the direction that the arrow is pointing. The arrow points in the direction of the point that you intend to measure.

2. When you get to within 10 feet (3 meters) of the point, the arrow disappears and a bull's-eye target appears.

When the bull's-eye target is displayed, do not change your orientation. Keep facing in the same direction and only move forwards, backwards, left or right.

Note - When staking a Point, Line, Arc or Alignment a grid is displayed as you near the target and when the large navigation arrow disappears. The grid changes scale as you move closer to the target.

3. Continue moving forwards until the cross, representing your current position, covers the bull's-eye target, representing the point. Mark the point.

Stakeout - Options

Configure the stakeout settings when you create or edit a Survey Style.

Select Stakeout and set the

As-staked point details , and

Stakeout display mode.

If you do not want the total station EDM set to TRK mode when you enter stakeout, clear the Use TRK for

stakeout check box.

Alternatively, tap Options from the Stakeout screen to configure the settings for the current survey.

If you do not want the point removed from the stake out point list after it has been staked, clear the Remove

staked point from list check box.

Tap Options from the Stakeout screen to enable / disable the internal compass,

when using a TSC3 or Trimble

Slate Controller.

In a GNSS survey, select the Auto measure option to automatically start measuring when the Measure key is tapped.

As-Staked Point Details

Configure the As-staked point details either in the Stakeout option, when you create or edit a survey style, or by tapping Options in the Stakeout screen.

You can configure the View before storage

, Horizontal tolerance

Staked deltas format

As-staked name ,

As-staked code , and Store grid deltas.

View before storage and Horizontal tolerance

303

If you want to see the differences between the design point and the as-staked point before you store the point, select the View before storage check box and then choose one of these options:

•

To see the differences every time, set the Horizontal tolerance to 0.000 m.

•

To see the differences only if the tolerance is exceeded, set the Horizontal tolerance to a suitable value.

Note - The Stake delta values are reported as differences from the measured/as-staked point to the design point.

User definable stakeout reports

The General Survey software supports user-definable stakeout reports, which enable you to configure the display of staked information on the Confirm staked deltas screen that appears when you enable View before storage.

User definable stakeout reports can offer the following benefits:

• important information can be displayed first

• the data can be ordered to suit the user's requirements

• information that is not required can be removed

• additional data can be computed for display, for example by applying construction offsets to reported

• values the point design elevation can be edited after the stake out measurement is completed

• up to 10 extra design elevations with individual vertical offset values can be defined and edited, with the cut/fill to each extra design elevation being reported

Formatting of the staked deltas screen also supports the following settings:

• the size of the font for prompts

• the size of the font for reported values

• the color of the font for prompts

• the color of the font for reported values

• widescreen on or off

The content and format of the stakeout reports is controlled by XSLT style sheets. Translated default XSLT

Stakeout Style Sheet (*.sss) files are included with the language files, and accessed by the General Survey software from the language folders. You can create new formats in the office and then copy them to the

[System files] folder on the controller.

From the Staked deltas format field, select an appropriate display format.

The following list shows the translated stakeout reports that are supplied with the language files, and the support offered by those reports:

•

Point - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the design point. The vertical distance to a DTM will also be displayed if applicable.

304

•

Point - Stake multiple elevs

♦

Provides a stakeout display that allows you to edit the point design elevation (the cut/fill value will be updated) and entry of up to two extra design elevations with associated vertical offsets and updated cut/fill values.

•

Line - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the design position. The appropriate station and offset values are reported, based on the selected line stakeout method.

•

Arc - Stake markup

♦

•

DTM - Stake markup

♦

Provides a simplified stakeout display that presents the vertical distance (cut/fill) to the DTM being staked.

Tip - When you use multiple Stakeout Style Sheet files, Trimble recommends that you set the Staked deltas format. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Stakeout , to configure unique formats for Points, Lines, Arcs, DTMs, and Roads. You can also select the format within Options during stakeout.

Note - The development of the XSLT style sheets is an advanced procedure recommended for users with programming experience. For more information, please refer www.trimble.com.

As-staked name and As-staked code

You can set the name of the As-staked point to be one of the following:

• the next Auto point name

• the Design point name (not available for roads)

You can also set the code of the As-staked point to be one of the following:

•

Design name

•

Design code

•

Last code used

•

Design station and offset

The Description defaults as follows:

•

When staking a point, line or arc with descriptions, the description of the as-staked point will default to the description of the design entity unless the As-staked code is set to Last code used in which case

• the the last used description is used.

When staking a road the description will always be the last used independent of the the As-staked

code setting.

Store grid deltas

305

Set the Store grid deltas check box. Do one of the following:

•

Select the check box to display and store the delta northing, delta easting, and delta elevation during

• stakeout.

Clear the check box to display and store the deltas as a horizontal distance, vertical distance, and azimuth.

Note - If you use a user definable stakeout report, the Store grid deltas option is not used, unless it is referenced in your report.

Stakeout - Points

There are many ways to stake a point. Select the method that suits you best:

•

From the Map - single point

•

From the Map - using a list

•

From

Stakeout / Points - single point

•

From

Stakeout / Points - using a list

•

From

Stakeout / Points - using a CSV/TXT file

For more information, see:

•

GNSS stake methods

•

Editing the design elevation

To stake a single point from the Map:

1. From the map, do one of the following:

♦

Select the point to be staked out and then tap Stakeout.

♦

Double-tap the point to be staked.

2. Do one of the following:

•

In a GNSS survey:

♦

If the antenna height is null, select the Stake method, enter the Antenna height, and set the

♦

Measured to field appropriately and then tap Start.

If the antenna height was configured in the survey style, or recently entered, you are not prompted to enter the antenna height again.

To change the antenna height, tap the antenna icon in the status bar and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

•

In a conventional survey:

♦

To change the target height, tap the target icon in the status bar, tap the antenna height field and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

3. Use the

to navigate to the point.

306

4. When the point is within tolerance, measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

5. When the point has been stored, you are returned to the map. The selection of the point that was just staked has been removed. Select another point to stake and then repeat the process.

To stake a group of points from the Map:

1. From the map, select the point(s) to be staked out. Tap Stakeout.

If you have selected more than one point from the map for staking out, the Stake out points screen appears. Go to the next step. If you have selected one point from the map, go to step 4.

2. The Stake out points screen lists all points selected for stakeout. To add more points to the list, do one of the following:

♦

Tap Map and then select the required points from the map. Tap Stakeout to return to the Stake

♦

out points screen.

Tap Add and then add points using one of the methods listed

to add more points to the list.

3. To select a point for stake out, do one of the following:

♦

Tap the point name.

♦

Use the controller arrow keys to highlight the point and then tap Stakeout.

4. Do one of the following:

•

In a GNSS survey:

♦

If the antenna height is null, select the Stake method, enter the Antenna height, and set the

♦

Measured to field appropriately and then tap Start.

If the antenna height was configured in the survey style, or recently entered, you are not prompted to enter the antenna height again.

To change the antenna height, tap the antenna icon in the status bar and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

•

In a conventional survey:

♦

To change the target height, tap the target icon in the status bar, tap the antenna height field and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

5. Use the

to navigate to the point.

307

6. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

7. When the point has been stored, the point is removed from the stake out list and you are returned to the stake out point list. Select the next point and then repeat the process.

To stake a single point from the Stakeout menu:

1. From the main menu, select Stakeout / Points.

2. Make sure that you are in the stake a single point mode:

♦

If a Point name field is displayed, stake out point is in the stake a single point mode.

♦

If a stake out point list is displayed, stake out point is in the stake from a list mode. Tap >

Point to change to the stake a single point mode.

3. Enter the name of the point to stake, or tap the pop-up arrow and then select a point using one of the following methods:

List

Method Description

Select from a list of all points in the current job and linked files.

Wildcard search

Select from a filtered list of all points in the current job and linked files.

Key in Key in the coordinates of the point to stake.

Tip - Tap Closest to automatically populate the Point name field with the name of the closest point.

Closest searches the current job and all linked files to find the closest point that is not an as-staked point or a design point for the as-staked points.

4. Enter the Point increment and then tap Stakeout. Do one of the following:

♦

To return to the stake out point screen after staking a point, enter an increment of 0 or ?.

♦

To stay in the graphical stake out display and automatically increment to the next point, enter a valid increment value.

If a point does not exist using the increment specified, tap Cancel to return to this form after staking a point. Alternatively, tap the Search button to find the next available point.

You can use a decimal point increment, for example 0.5. You can also increment the numeric component of a point name that ends in alpha characters, for example, you can increment 1000a by 1 to 1001a. To do this, tap the advanced pop-up arrow on the point increment field and then clear the

Apply to numeric only setting.

5. Do one of the following:

•

In a GNSS survey:

308

♦

If the antenna height is null, select the Stake method, enter the Antenna height, and set the

♦

Measured to field appropriately and then tap Start.

If the antenna height was configured in the survey style, or recently entered, you are not prompted to enter the antenna height again.

To change the antenna height, tap the antenna icon in the status bar and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

•

In a conventional survey:

♦

To change the target height, tap the target icon in the status bar, tap the antenna height field and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

6. Use the

to navigate to the point.

7. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

8. When the point has been stored, the increment value is used to determine the next point to stake:

♦

If the next point using the increment value exists, you remain in the stake out graphics screen

♦ with the navigation details updated for the next point.

If the next point does not exist, tap Cancel to return to the stake out point screen where you can enter the name of the next point to stake. Alternatively, tap the Search button to find the next available point.

Tip - When using stake a single point mode, you can still use a stake point list to ensure that you stake all required points. To do this, build the stake list, make sure that Remove staked point from list is enabled, and stake points using the stake a single point mode. As points are staked they will be removed from the stake list.

Tap > List as required to check which points still need to be staked.

To stake a group of points from the stake out menu:

1. From the main menu, select Stakeout / Points.

2. Make sure that you are in the stake out list mode:

♦

If a stake out point list is displayed, stake out point is in the stake from a list mode.

♦

If a Point name field is displayed, stake out point is in the stake a single point mode. Tap >

List to change to the stake from a list mode.

3. The Stake out points screen lists all points selected for stake out. The list may already contain points that were added to the list previously but not staked out.

309

Tap Add and add points using one of the

methods listed to add more points to the list.

4. To select a point for stake out, do one of the following:

♦

Tap the point name.

♦

Use the controller arrow keys to highlight the point and then tap Stakeout.

5. Do one of the following:

•

In a GNSS survey:

♦

If the antenna height is null, select the Stake method, enter the Antenna height, and set the

♦

Measured to field appropriately and then tap Start.

If the antenna height was configured in the survey style, or recently entered, you are not prompted to enter the antenna height again.

To change the antenna height, tap the antenna icon in the status bar and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

•

In a conventional survey:

♦

To change the target height, tap the target icon in the status bar, tap the antenna height field and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

6. Use the

to navigate to the point.

7. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

8. When the point has been stored, the point is removed from the stake out list and you are returned to the stake out point list. Select the next point and then repeat the process.

To stake out points from a CSV/TXT file or another Job

There are many ways to stake out points in a linked file; from linked points displayed in the map,

or using various methods to

build a stake out list.

This section describes how to build a stake out list from a CSV/TXT or Job file that does not need to be linked:

1. From the main menu, select Stakeout / Points.

2. Make sure that you are in the stake out list mode:

♦

If a stake out point list is displayed, stake out point is in the stake from a list mode.

♦

If a Point name field is displayed, stake out point is in the stake a single point mode. Tap >

List to change to the stake from a list mode.

310

3. Tap add and choose Select from file.

4. Choose the file from which to select points to add to the stake out list. Do one of the following:

♦

Tap the file.

♦

Use the controller arrow keys to highlight the file and then tap Accept.

5. If

Advanced geodetics is enabled, and you select a CSV or TXT file, you must specify if the points in

the linked file are Grid points or Grid (local) points.

♦

Select Grid points if the points in the CSV/TXT file are grid points.

♦

Select Grid (local) points if the points in the CSV/TXT file are Grid (local) points and then select the input transformation to transform them to grid points.

◊

To assign the transformation later, select Not applied, this will be defined later, and

◊ then tap Accept.

To create a new display transformation, select Create new transformation, tap Next

◊

and then complete the required steps.

To select an existing display transformation, select Select transformation, select the display transformation from the list and then tap Accept.

6. All the points in the selected file are listed. To check the points that are to be added to the list, do one of the following:

♦

Tap All. A check mark appears beside every name.

♦

Tap the point names. A check mark appears beside the name of each point that you selected.

Note - Points in the CSV/TXT/JOB file that are already in the stake out list do not appear and cannot be added again to the list.

7. Tap Add to add the points to the stake out list.

8. To select a point for stake out, do one of the following:

♦

Tap the point name.

♦

Use the controller arrow keys to highlight the point and then tap Stakeout.

9. Do one of the following:

•

In a GNSS survey:

♦

If the antenna height is null, select the Stake method, enter the Antenna height, and set the

♦

Measured to field appropriately and then tap Start.

If the antenna height was configured in the survey style, or recently entered, you are not prompted to enter the antenna height again.

To change the antenna height, tap the antenna icon in the status bar and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

•

In a conventional survey:

♦

To change the target height, tap the target icon in the status bar, tap the antenna height field and then enter the new value in the screen that appears. Tap Accept.

10. Use the

to navigate to the point.

11. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

311

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

12. When the point has been stored, the point is removed from the stake out list and you are returned to the stake out point list. Select the next point and then repeat the process.

GNSS Stake methods

In a GNSS survey, configure the stake method to control how stake out navigation information appears.

In the Stake field, select one of the following methods for staking out the point:

•

To the point - stake out the point with directions from your current position.

•

From fixed point - stake out the point with cross-track information and directions from another point.

•

Enter a point name in the From point field. Select from a list, key in, or measure this value.

From start position - stake out the point with cross-track information and directions from the current

• position when you start to navigate.

From last point staked - stake out the point with cross-track information and directions from the last

• point that was staked out and measured. The staked point is used, not the design point.

Relative to azimuth - stake out the point with the cross-track information and directions relative to a keyed-in azimuth.

Notes

•

The cross-track function creates a line between the point to be staked out and one of the following: a fixed point, the start position, the last point staked, or a reference azimuth. The General Survey software displays this line, and an extra field (Go left or Go right), in the graphical stake out screen

• gives the offset to the line.

When the Deltas field is set to Station and offset the Go left or Go right field shows the same

• information as the H.Offset field.

When the Deltas is set to Station and offset and the Stake method is set to Relative to azimuth, the Go

left or Go right field is replaced by the delta Elev (to last) staked point field.

If the antenna height was already entered, you can configure the Stake methods. From the second row of softkeys in the stake out point list screen, tap Options. To see the other softkeys, tap the arrow or press the

Shift key.

To add points to the Stake Out List:

1. Make sure that you are in stake out list mode:

If a stakeout point list is displayed, stake out point is in the stake from a list mode

If a Point name field is displayed, stake out point is in the stake a single point mode. Tap > List to change to the stake from a list mode.

2. Tap Add and then use one of the following methods to add points to the stake out list:

312

Method Description

Enter single point name Enter a single point name in the current job or linked files.

Select from list

Select using wildcard search

Select from a list of all points in the current job and linked files.

Select from a filtered list of all points in the current job and linked files.

Select from file

All grid points

All keyed in points

Points within radius

All points

Add all points from a defined CSV or TXT file.

Add all grid points from the current job.

Add all keyed in points from the current job.

Add all points within a defined radius from the current job and linked files.

Add all points from the current job and linked files.

Points with same code

Points by name range

Section of job

Add all points with a defined code from the current job and linked files.

Add all points within a name range from the current job and linked files.

Add points from a section of the current job.

Notes

♦

When you add points to the stakeout list using the Select from file option, you can now add them from the linked file even if the point in the linked file already exists in the current job.

The Select from file option is the only way you can stake a point from a linked file when a

♦ point of the same name exists in the current job.

If a linked job contains two points of the same name, the point with the higher class is displayed.

Editing the design elevation

•

The design elevation appears in the bottom right corner of the navigation window. To edit the elevation, tap the arrow. To reload an edited elevation, select Reload original elevation from the pop-up menu in the Design elevation field.

If the navigation window contains five rows of navigation information, the label for the Design

•

elevation field is not shown.

After staking, you can modify the design elevation in the as-staked deltas screen, depending on the

stake out style sheet

being used.

Stakeout - Lines

To stake out a line in an RTK or conventional survey:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select two points to define a line, tap and hold on the map and then select

Stake out line from the menu.

313

♦

From the map, select the line to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ then select Stake out line from the menu.

From the main menu, select Stakeout / Lines. Enter the line name.

Tips

♦

In the Line name field (or the Start point or the End point field) use the advanced pop-up

♦ arrow to select staking either a keyed-in line or one defined from two points.

To stake out a line, double tap it on the map.

♦

When selecting a line to stakeout, tap near the end of the line that you want to designate as the start. Arrows are then drawn on the line to indicate the direction.

If the direction is incorrect, tap the line to deselect it and then tap it at the correct end to reselect the line in the direction required. Alternatively tap and hold on the map and select

♦

Reverse line direction from the menu.

When staking by Station on the line or Station/offset from line use the Sta- and Sta+ softkeys to select the station to stake.

Note - If the line has been offset, the offset directions are not swapped when the line direction is reversed.

2. In the Stake field, select one of the following options:

♦

To the line

♦

Station on the line

♦

Station/offset from line

♦

Slope from line

3. Enter the Antenna/Target height, the value of the station to be staked out (if any), and any further details, such as horizontal and vertical offsets. Tap Start.

4. Use the

to navigate to the point.

5. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

To the line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on a defined line starting with the closest point (1) from your current position (2).

314

Station on the line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out stations (1) on a defined line at the station interval (2) along the line.

Station/offset from line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points (1) perpendicular to stations (3) on a defined line (2) and offset to the left or right by a set distance (4).

Slope from line

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on surfaces (2), at different defined grades

(3), either side of the defined line (1).

Use the Slope left field and the Slope right field to define the type of grade in one of the following ways:

• horizontal and vertical distance

• grade and slope distance

• grade and horizontal distance

315

At any point on the surface, the display shows the closest station, the Horizontal offset, and the Vertical distance as a cut (4) or a fill (5).

Stakeout - Arcs

Follow these steps to stake out an arc in an RTK or conventional survey:

1. Do one of the following:

♦

From the map, select the arc to be staked out. Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map and

♦ then select Stakeout from the menu.

From the main menu, select Stakeout / Arcs. Enter the arc name.

Tips

♦

To stake out an arc, double tap it on the map.

♦

When selecting an arc to stakeout, tap near the end of the arc that you want to designate as the start. Arrows are then drawn on the arc to indicate the direction.

If the direction of the arc is incorrect, tap the arc to deselect it and then tap it at the correct end to reselect the arc in the direction required. Alternatively tap and hold on the map and

♦ select Reverse arc direction from the menu.

When staking by Station on the arc or Station/offset from arc use the Sta- and Sta+ softkeys to select the station to stake.

Note - If the arc has been offset, the offset directions are not swapped when the arc direction is reversed.

2. In the Stake field, select one of the following options:

♦

To the arc

♦

Station on the arc

♦

Station/offset from arc

♦

Slope from arc

♦

Intersect point of arc

♦

Center point of arc

3. Enter the Antenna/Target height, the value of the station to be staked out (if any), and any further details, such as horizontal and vertical offsets. Tap Start.

4. Use the

to navigate to the point.

5. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

316

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

To the arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on a defined arc, starting with the closest point (1) from your current position (2).

Station on the arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points (1) on a defined arc at the station intervals

(2) along the arc.

Station/offset from arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points (1) perpendicular to stations (3) on a defined arc (2) and offset to the left or right by a specified distance (4).

317

Slope from arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out points on surfaces (2), at different defined grades

(3) either side of the defined arc (1).

Use the Slope left field and the Slope right field to define the type of grade in one of the following ways:

• horizontal and vertical distance

• grade and slope distance

• grade and horizontal distance

At any point on the surface the graphical display shows the closest station, the Horizontal offset and the

Vertical distance as a cut (4) or a fill (5).

Intersect point of arc

Use this option as shown in the diagram below, to stake out the Intersection point (1) of an arc (2).

Center point of arc

Use this option, as shown in the diagram below, to stake out the Center point (1) of a defined arc (2).

318

Stakeout - Alignments

The General Survey software supports offsetting and stakeout of alignments, which are sometimes known as polylines.

Alignments always have a horizontal component; the vertical component is optional. If an alignment is created using entities that have elevations, the alignment will have a vertical component.

You can select or create and stake alignments using one of the following methods:

•

Key in point name ranges.

•

Select one or more polylines in graphical view from a DXF/SHP file.

•

Select a previously keyed in alignment from the map.

•

Select a series of points in the map.

•

The points can be from the current job, a linked job, or a linked csv file.

Select a combination of points, lines, arcs, polylines, or alignments in the map.

Tip - To add files from another folder to the list, tap Add, navigate to the required folder and then select the file(s) to add.

You can edit alignments using Key in / Roads. The horizontal and vertical components are edited individually.

If you edit the horizontal alignment, you must check if the vertical alignment also needs editing.

To create an alignment by keying in a point name range:

1. From the main menu, select Stakeout / Alignments.

You can stake an existing alignment or key in a new alignment. If the Point range field is not visible, tap New to enter a new alignment.

2. Enter the point names that define the alignment.

The following name range techniques are supported:

Enter

1,3,5

1-10

1,3,5-10

1(2)3

1(2,L)3

1(100,L,S)3

Result

Creates a line between points 1 to 3 to 5

Creates lines between all points from 1 through 10

Creates a line between points 1 to 3, to 5, and 5 through 10

Creates an arc between points 1 and 3, through point 2

2 (Radius point), L (left) or R (right)

Creates a Left hand arc between points 1 and 3, with point 2 as the radius point

1 to 3, radius=100, L (left) or R (right), L (large) or S (small)

Creates a Left hand Small arc between points 1 and 3 with a radius of 100

3. To store the alignment, select the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a Code

(if required) and a Start station and Station interval, and then tap Next.

319

This takes you to stakeout.

Alignments are stored as RXL files. If you save the alignment, you can easily stake it again, view it in the map, and share it with other jobs and with other controllers.

Tip - To offset the alignment, tap Offset. If the Store alignment check box is enabled, tap Next to store the alignment and go to stakeout. To store the alignment without going to stakeout, tap Store.

4. You can stake an alignment by the following methods:

To stake a polyline from a DXF/SHP file:

1. From the main menu, tap Map. Tap the up arrow to access more softkeys and then tap Layers.

2. Tap the file name once to make it visible; tap it again to make it selectable.

Tap to expand the layers within a DXF file and to allow individual selection of layers to be visible and selectable.

3. Tap Accept to confirm the selection and return to the map.

4. Tap the polyline you want to stake.

Tap the end of the polyline that you want to be the start of the polyline.

5. To stake the polyline/alignment:

♦

Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map screen, and then select Stake out alignment.

This allows you to stake the polyline without storing the alignment.

♦

Tap and hold on the map screen and then select Create/Offset alignment. Complete the fields as required and then tap Next. You can then do one or more of the following:

◊ stake the polyline

◊ store the polyline as an alignment

◊ offset and stake the alignment

◊ store the offset alignment

◊ store the offset alignment and store node points at vertices

◊ stake the alignment or offset alignment

You can stake a polyline directly from a DXF/SHP file, but all polylines are converted to alignments for stakeout and when saved to the controller.

6. You can stake an alignment by the following methods:

To stake a previously keyed in alignment:

320

1. From the main menu, tap Map. Tap the up arrow to display more softkeys and then tap Layers.

2. Tap the file name once to make it visible, tap it again to make it selectable.

3. Tap Accept to confirm the selection and return to the map.

4. Tap the alignment you want to stake.

The direction of an alignment and a Trimble road is defined when it is created; it cannot be changed.

5. To stake the alignment:

♦

Tap Stakeout, or tap and hold on the map screen, and then select Stake out alignment.

♦

This takes you directly to Stake out alignment.

Tap and hold on the map screen and then select Create/Offset alignment. Complete the fields as required and then tap Next. You can then do one or more of the following:

◊ stake the polyline

◊ store the polyline as an alignment

◊ offset and stake the alignment

◊ store the offset alignment

◊ store the offset alignment and store node points at vertices

◊ stake the alignment or offset alignment

6. You can stake an alignment by the following methods:

To stake an alignment defined by points selected from the map:

1. From the main menu, tap Map.

2. Select the points defining the alignment.

3. To stake the alignment:

♦

Tap and hold on the map screen, and then select Stake out alignment.

♦

This takes you directly to Stake out alignment.

Tap and hold on the map screen and then select Create/Offset alignment. Complete the fields as required and then tap Next. You can then do one or more of the following:

◊ stake the polyline

◊ store the polyline as an alignment

◊ offset and stake the alignment

◊ store the offset alignment

◊ store the offset alignment and store node points at vertices

◊ stake the alignment or offset alignment

4. You can stake an alignment by the following methods:

Offsetting alignments

321

You can create an offset alignment from a keyed-in alignment, an alignment saved as an RXL file, or a polyline from a DXF/SHP file.

When creating an offset alignment, you can stake the alignment without saving it, or you can give the alignment a name and then save the offset alignment as an RXL file. You can also create and save node points at the vertices of the horizontal alignment.

To offset and stake an alignment:

1. From the main menu, select Stakeout / Alignments.

You can select an existing alignment or key in a new alignment.

1. To select an existing alignment, tap the alignment name (if the Select an alignment screen is displayed). If the Point range field is displayed, tap Select to view the alignments already on the controller.

2. To key in a new alignment, enter the point names that define the alignment (if the Key in

alignment screen is displayed). If the Select an alignment screen is displayed, tap New to enter the point range.

For more information, see the section

above.

2. To offset an alignment, tap Offset.

3. Enter the offset distance.

To offset to the left, enter a negative value.

4. To store the offset alignment, enable the Store alignment check box, enter an Alignment name, enter a

Code, if required, and then tap Next. The alignment is stored as an RXL file.

5. To store node points at the vertices of the offset alignment, enable the Store points at nodes check box, enter a Start point name, enter a Code, if required, and then tap Next.

Selecting Next stores the alignment, if the Store alignment check box is enabled, and takes you to stakeout. To store an alignment without going to stakeout, tap Store.

6. You can stake an alignment by the following methods:

cross section of your current position, tap the icon at the bottom right of the

Station abbreviations

The General Survey software uses the following abbreviations in the Station field pop-up menu.

Abbreviation Meaning Abbreviation Meaning

322

Curve to transition SS

Point of curvature (Tangent to curve) ST

Point of intersection

Point of tangent (Curve to tangent)

VCE

Alignment start

Alignment end

VCS

VPI

Transition to curve

Vertical curve high point

Transition to transition

Transition to tangent

Tangent to transition

Vertical curve end

Vertical curve start

Vertical point of intersection

Regular sections

Vertical curve low point

Stakeout station on alignment

1. In the Stake field, select Station on alignment.

2. Select a Station to stake and then specify the Station interval.

You can select a station using one of the following methods:

♦

Select from the list in the Station field pop-up menu.

♦

Key in a value.

♦

Tap Sta+ or Sta- to select the next/previous station.

3. If required, enter an Offset.

4. To edit the design elevation, tap the arrow. To reload an edited elevation, select Reload original

elevation from the pop-up menu in the Design elevation field.

Note - If the position that you select for stakeout has no elevation, the Design elevation field becomes available. Enter an elevation into this field.

6. If required, enter values in the

Construction offsets

fields.

7. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

8. Tap Stakeout and then use either the plan or

cross section

graphical display to navigate to the point.

The graphical display shows the:

♦

Station value

♦

Code

♦

Elevation of your current position (shown in blue)

♦

Design elevation of the selected position (shown in red if edited)

The base of the screen displays the navigation deltas.

Tips

♦

To select the delta display, tap the arrow to the left of the navigation deltas.

♦

Tap Options for further delta display options.

♦

To view the

graphics window. Alternatively, press the [Tab] key on the controller to switch between the

323

♦ plan view and the cross section view.

To access the status bar while the graphics window is in widescreen mode, tap the arrow on the far right of the screen. The status bar appears for approximately three seconds, after which

♦ time the window returns to widescreen.

To change the widescreen mode tap and hold in the graphics window and then select

Widescreen.

8. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

Stakeout Side Slope from Alignment

1. In the Stake field, select Side slope from alignment.

2. Enter a value in the Code field (this step is optional).

Tip - The annotation entered in the Code field is assigned to the end of the side slope and is displayed during stakeout.

3. Select a Station to stake and then specify the Station interval.

You can select a station using one of the following methods:

♦

Select from the list in the Station field pop-up menu.

♦

Key in a value.

♦

Tap Sta+ or Sta- to select the next/previous station.

To define the hinge, select a Hinge derivation

method and then complete the appropriate fields.

Note - If the alignment consists of only a horizontal alignment, the only hinge derivation method available is Offset and elevation.

5. To define the

Side slope, enter appropriate values in the Cut slope, Fill slope, and Cut ditch width

fields.

Note - Cut and fill slopes are expressed as positive values.

Tip - To define a side slope with only a cut or fill slope, leave the other slope value field as '?'.

6. If required, enter values in the

Construction offsets

fields.

324

7. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

8. Tap Stakeout and then use either the plan or

cross section

graphical display to navigate to the point.

The graphical display shows the:

♦

Station value

♦

Code

♦

Side slope value defined by your current position (shown in blue)

♦

Design side slope value

♦

Elevation of your current position (shown in blue)

The base of the screen displays the navigation deltas.

When you are within 3m of the target the graphical display in the plan view shows your current position along with the target. Also displayed is a dashed line that connects the side slope catch position, (the point where the side slope intersects with the ground), to the side slope hinge position.

Tips

♦

To select the delta display, tap the arrow to the left of the navigation deltas.

♦

Tap Options for further delta display options.

♦

To view the

cross section of your current position, tap the icon at the bottom right of the

graphics window. Alternatively, press the [Tab] key on the controller to switch between the

♦ plan view and the cross section view.

To access the status bar while the graphics window is in widescreen mode, tap the arrow on the far right of the screen. The status bar appears for approximately three seconds, after which

♦ time the window returns to widescreen.

To change the widescreen mode tap and hold in the graphics window and then select

♦

Widescreen.

9. When the point is within tolerance measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

Notes

•

If you are staking to a catch point

with construction offsets, navigate to the catch point and then tap

Apply to add the construction offsets. You are prompted to apply the offsets from your current position. If you are not on the catch position, select No, navigate to the catch position and then tap

325

Apply again.

If you want to store the catch position and the construction offset, see

Construction offsets.

•

To also stake the appropriate hinge position, tap Select>> and select either the Hinge point (Cut) or

Hinge point (Fill) option.

Hinge Derivation Methods

The following diagram explains the three hinge derivation methods:

Key to the above diagram:

1 - Offset and elevation. Enter an offset (4) from the horizontal alignment, and the elevation (5) of the hinge position.

2 - Offset and slope. Enter an offset (6) from the horizontal alignment, and the slope value (7) from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical alignments to the hinge position.

3 - Offset and vertical distance. Enter an offset (8) from the horizontal alignment, and the vertical difference

(9) from the intersection of the horizontal and vertical alignments to the hinge position.

Cross Section View

The cross section that appears is orientated in the direction of increasing station. Your current position and the target are shown. If the target has construction offsets specified, the smaller single circle indicates the selected position and the double circle indicates the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offset(s).

The construction offset(s) appear as green lines.

326

Specifying Construction Offsets

A point to be staked can be offset by a:

•

Horizontal offset

•

Vertical offset

A construction offset is indicated in the graphical display by a green line, with the double circle indicating the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offset(s).

Tips

•

Construction offsets are job-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for an alignment is not

• used for the same alignment when it is accessed from a different job.

Construction offsets are not alignment-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for an

• alignment is used for all alignments in the same job.

Construction offsets are not survey session-specific. That is, a construction offset specified for an alignment is used for subsequent survey sessions.

Horizontal construction offsets

You can offset a point horizontally where:

•

A negative value offsets the point towards the centerline (in).

•

A positive value offsets the point away from the centerline (out).

When staking a catch point, use the advanced pop-up arrow ( ) to specify if the offset is to be applied:

•

Horizontal

•

At the slope of the previous element in the cross section

The following diagram shows a Horizontal offset (1) and Slope previous offset (2) applied to the catch point

(3). For the Slope previous option, the slope of the offset is defined by the slope of the side slope (4). The

Vertical offset value in the diagram is 0.000.

Note - For points with zero offset, you cannot apply construction horizontal offsets at the slope value of the previous template element.

Notes

327

•

If you enter a value for the horizontal offset on the centerline (at offset 0.00 m), a negative value

• offset is to the left.

Construction offsets are not automatically applied to a side slope offset. For more information, see

•

staking a Catch point.

When you stake a side slope, select the Store both catch and construction offset check box if you want to measure and store the catch position.

Vertical construction offsets

You can offset a point vertically where a:

•

Negative value offsets the point vertically down.

•

Positive value offsets the point vertically up.

When staking a side slope from the alignment, in the Vertical offset field, use the advanced pop-up arrow (

) to specify if the offset is to be applied:

•

Vertically

•

Perpendicular to the element in the cross section before the point being staked

The following diagram shows a Vertical offset applied vertically (1) and a Vertical offset applied perpendicular (2) to the side slope (3).

Specifying a Side Slope

A Side Slope is defined by a Cut slope (1), Fill slope (2), and Cut ditch width (3) fields.

The following diagram shows the side slope.

328

Catch Point

The catch point is the point where the design side slope intersects with the ground.

The actual intersection position of the side slope with the existing ground surface - the catch point - is determined iteratively (by repetition). The General Survey software calculates the intersection of a horizontal plane passing through the current position, and either the cut or fill side slope, as shown in the following diagram , where x

is the Go Right/Left value.

The graphical display in the plan view, shows the calculated catch position. The calculated slope value (in blue) and the design slope value appears at the top of the screen.

To view the

cross section of your current position, tap the icon at the bottom right of the graphics window.

Alternatively, press the [Tab] key on the controller to switch between the plan view and the cross section view.

The cross section is displayed looking in the direction of increasing station. Your current position and the calculated target are indicated. A line is drawn (in blue) from the hinge position to your current position to indicate the calculated slope.

If the catch point has construction offsets specified, these appear in the cross-section view as green lines. The smaller single circle indicates the calculated catch position and the double circle indicates the selected position adjusted for the specified construction offset(s). The construction offsets appear only after you have applied them.

From the Confirm staked deltas screen (or Review job ) tap

Report to view the Catch point deltas report

screen.

The Select softkey

The Select softkey provides the following options related to staking a side slope.

Option

Catch point

(Auto)

Catch point

(Cut)

Catch point

(Fill)

Description

The General Survey software selects the side slope (cut or fill) to intersect with the ground.

This is the default.

Fixes the side slope as a cut side slope.

Fixes the side slope as a fill side slope.

329

Hinge point

(Cut)

Hinge point

(Fill)

Stakes out the base of the cut side slope. This is the most direct way to select the hinge point if the template includes a ditch offset.

Stakes out the start of the fill side slope.

Catch Point Staked Deltas

If you have the View before storage check box in the Stakeout options selected, the Confirm staked deltas screen appears before you store the point.

storage. For more information, see As-Staked Point Details.

Note - The value in the S.Dist to hinge + Constr off field includes any construction offset values specified and reports the slope distance from the hinge to the as-staked position. The value is null (?) if there is no horizontal construction offset specified or the horizontal construction offset is applied horizontally.

Tip - Tap Report to view the Catch point deltas report screen. This screen shows the horizontal and vertical distances from the hinge and the centerline. If the side slope includes a cut ditch, the report includes the hinge position at the toe of the cut slope. The reported values exclude any construction offset specified.

The following diagram explains some of these fields.

Where:

A = Distance to center line

B = Horizontal distance to hinge point

C = Vertical distance to hinge point

D = Slope

E = Slope distance to hinge point

F = Horizontal construction offset

G = Ditch offset

H = Hinge point

J = Catch point

330

Stakeout - Digital Terrain Models (DTM)

A DTM is an electronic representation of a 3D surface. The General Survey software supports gridded (.dtm), triangulated (.ttm) DTMs, and triangulated DTMs in a LandXML file.

Note - DTM's in a LandXML file are only supported in the Map, not in stakeout

When you specify a DTM, you can view the cut and fill relative to the DTM. You must define a projection and datum transformation before you use a DTM in a GNSS or conventional survey.

When a DTM is enabled in the Map, a color gradient shows the elevation changes. To disable the color gradient and show only an outline of the DTM, go to Options and then clear the Display color gradient check box.

To stake out a DTM:

1. Transfer a DTM file into the General Survey software then select Stakeout / DTMs.

2. Select the file to be used.

Note - All DTM files from all folders are listed.

3. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

4. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

If the target or antenna height have not been defined, the elevation and cut/fill will be null (?).

5. Tap Start. The stakeout

screen appears, displaying the coordinates of the current position and the vertical distance above (cut) or below (fill) the DTM.

Note - Unless you are using a conventional instrument that supports tracking (for example, a Trimble

5600), the values appear only after you have taken a distance measurement.

6. When the point is within tolerance, measure the point.

Tips

♦

When using a GNSS receiver with an in-built tilt sensor, you can:

◊

to display an electronic bubble

◊ configure the survey style to prompt a warning when the pole is outside a specified

Tap Options to configure the quality control, precision, and tilt settings.

♦

When staking out the DTM, if you are outside the extent of the DTM or in a "hole", the DTM elevation and cut/fill will be null (?).

To show the cut/fill to a DTM when staking out a point, line, arc, or road:

331

1. Tap Options in the Stakeout screen.

2. Select the Display cut/fill to DTM check box and specify the model.

Note - This does not apply to the Slope from line or Slope from arc stake methods.

To show the cut/fill to a DTM in the map:

1. Transfer a DTM file to the appropriate project folder on the controller.

2. From the main menu, tap Map. Tap the up arrow to display more softkeys and then tap Layers.

3. Tap the DTM file once to select the file and view it in the map; tap the DTM file name again to make it active. Tap Accept to return to the map.

When the DTM is active and the map has a position on the DTM, the DTM elevation, and the vertical distance above (cut) or below (fill) the DTM appear in the map screen.

Tip - For the Trimble Tablet the elevation of your current position is also displayed in the map screen.

4. If necessary, specify a vertical offset to raise or lower the DTM.

The vertical offset can be configured in Options when you select the DTM file. When defined, the vertical offset also appears in the Map.

5. To change target or antenna heights, tap the target icon in the status bar.

If the target or antenna height have not been defined, the elevation and cut/fill will be null (?).

332

Survey Settings

Settings Menu

Use Settings from the Trimble Access menu to configure common configuration settings that are shared among multiple programs.

The following programs use common configuration settings that are available from Settings:

•

Trimble Access General Survey

•

Trimble Access Roads

•

Trimble Access Tunnels

•

Trimble Access Mines

Use the Survey styles menu to:

•

Create and edit

survey styles

Use the Templates menu to:

•

Create, edit, rename, or delete a

template.

•

Import a template from another job.

Use the Connect menu to:

•

Configure the Internet setup

•

Create GNSS contacts for use with cellular modems

•

Configure

Auto connect

options

•

Configure Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station and Trimble 5600 total station

•

Radio settings

Configure

Bluetooth

connections

•

Configure the Wi-Fi image transfer settings. Only available if you are using a controller with Wi-Fi

• image transfer software installed.

Calibrate the

Compass.

Only available if you are using a TSC3 or Trimble Slate Controller.

Use the Feature library menu to:

•

Create and edit

feature libraries

Use the Language menu to:

•

Change the

language.

•

Switch on or off

sound events.

333

Survey Styles

Survey Styles define the parameters for configuring and communicating with your instruments, and for measuring and storing points. In a GNSS survey, the Survey Style instructs the base and rover receivers to

perform the functions required for a specific survey type.

This whole set of information is stored as a template that can be called up and re-used when necessary.

You can use the styles supplied with the system without configuring them, but you can change default settings as required. The 5600 3600 style works with both the Trimble 5600 and Trimble 3600 instruments. General

Survey detects the instrument that you are connected to and automatically configures the appropriate controls.

In a new system, a number of Survey styles are created automatically, and their display properties are controlled through options that are not initially enabled. Options are automatically enabled when the controller software auto-connects to the instrument. To control the options manually, tap Settings / Survey

styles from the Trimble Access menu and then tap the Options softkey.

You can set the software options and the auto-connect options independently of each other. For example, if

you clear the Trimble GNSS receiver check box in the Auto connect options dialog, that does not disable the

GNSS surveying option in the software Options dialog.

However, if the auto-connect options are disabled, then the software options cannot be automatically enabled, because it is the auto-connect process that detects the instrument and then configures the appropriate software options.

Configure the style if the defaults do not suit your needs. To modify the survey style, tap Settings from the

Trimble Access menu and then select Survey styles.

You can lock Survey Styles to prevent them from being edited in the field. To do this:

1. Use Microsoft ActiveSync technology to establish a connection between the controller and your office computer.

2. Navigate to the [Mobile Device / My Windows Mobile-Based Device / Trimble Data / Systems Files] folder.

3. Copy the required style file to your office computer.

4. Select the file, right-click it and then select [Properties].

5. From the [Properties / General] tab, select the [Read-only] check box.

6. Tap OK.

7. Copy the file back to the [Systems Files] folder on your controller.

Select Settings / Survey Styles and note the lock symbol to the left of the style name indicating that you cannot edit this style.

Note - A locked style will be updated to reflect any changes made during the auto-connect cycle when connecting to an instrument.

Tip - You can edit a copied survey style.

For more information, see:

334

Integrated Surveying

Conventional Survey

FastStatic Survey

Postprocessed Kinematic Survey

Real-Time Kinematic and Infill Survey

Real-Time Kinematic Survey

Real-Time Kinematic and Data Logging

Survey Types

Your GNSS survey type will depend on available equipment, field conditions, and the results required.

Configure the survey type when you create or edit a Survey Style.

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Base options.

2. Change the Type field as required.

3. Do the same for Rover options.

Note - General Survey uses the settings from the selected survey style when you start the survey. General

Survey will check the style settings to ensure that they are appropriately configured for the equipment that you are connected to. For example, if GLONASS is enabled in the survey style it will check if the GNSS receiver or antenna you are connected to also supports GLONASS. If General Survey detects an incorrect setting, or if it detects that the settings in the survey style have never been checked, it will ask the user to confirm or correct the settings. Any changed settings are saved to the survey style.

The General Survey software provides survey styles for the following survey types:

Conventional Survey

Real-Time Kinematic Survey

Integrated Surveying

To use one of the following survey types, you must create your own survey style:

FastStatic Survey

Real-Time Kinematic and Data Logging

335

Real-Time Kinematic and Infill Survey

Real-Time Differential Survey

Postprocessed Kinematic Survey

Conventional Instrument - Configuration

Configure the conventional instrument type when you create or edit a Survey Style.

Select Instrument, choose the instrument type, and then set the associated parameters.

Baud rate and parity

Use the Baud rate field to configure the General Survey baud rate to match that of the conventional instrument.

Use the Parity field to configure the General Survey parity to match that of the conventional instrument.

When you change the instrument type, the baud rate and parity settings automatically change to the default settings for the selected instrument.

HA VA status rate

Use the HA VA status rate field to set how often the General Survey software updates the horizontal and vertical angle display in the status line with information from the conventional instrument.

Note - Some instruments beep when communicating with the General Survey software. You can turn off the beep in the instrument or set the HA VA status rate to Never.

Measurement mode

The Measurement mode field appears if the selected instrument type has more than one measurement mode that can be set by General Survey. Use this mode to specify how the EDM measures distances. Options vary according to the instrument type. Select the Instr. default option to always use the setting on the instrument.

Tip - Tap Instrument functions to quickly change the measurement mode when using Trimble instruments and some Leica TPS instruments.

Trimble terminology matches the measurement modes on the Leica TPS1100 instruments as follows:

Trimble terminology

STD

FSTD

TRK

Leica terminology

Standard

Fast

Rapid tracking

336

DR Reflectorless

Averaged Observations

Use the Averaged observations method to:

• increase the measurement precision with a predefined number of observations

• view the associated measurement standard deviations

While the instrument is carrying out the measurements, standard deviations are displayed for the horizontal

(HA) and vertical (VA) angles, and the slope distance (SD).

Auto F1 / F2

When using a servo or robotic instrument, select the Auto F1 / F2 check box to automatically measure a point or stakeout a position on face 2 after the face 1 observation.

Notes

•

The Auto F1 / F2 functionality is not suitable for use when staking with a 5600 instrument using

•

Autolock as it is not able to operate the EDM in tracking mode on face 2.

No MTA record is created when staking out. Only the individual face 1 and face 2 as staked positions are created.

When Auto F1 / F2 is selected, once the face 1 measurement is completed, the instrument automatically turns to face 2. The point name does not increment, which allows a face 2 observation to be measured with the same point name as the face 1 observation. Once the face 2 measurement is completed, the instrument returns to face 1.

Auto F1 / F2 does not work when starting on face 2, or when the measurement method is set to:

•

Angle offset

•

H. Angle offset

•

V. Angle offset

•

Single dist. offset

•

Dual-prism offset

•

Circular object

•

Remote object

Measure distance on face 2

The Measure distance on face 2 option is used in:

•

Measure topo, when Auto F1 / F2 is selected

•

Measure rounds, Station setup plus, and Resection, when a distance observation is not required on face 2

337

When the Measure distance on face 2 option is selected, if the face 1 measurement method included a distance measurement, then the measurement method for face 2 is automatically set to Angles only after the face 1 measurement. After the face 2 measurement, the instrument returns to the method used on face 1.

Set backsight

The Set backsight field appears if you can set the horizontal circle reading on the instrument when the backsight is observed. The options are No , Zero, and Azimuth . If you select the Azimuth option, when you observe the backsight the horizontal circle reading is set to the computed azimuth between the instrument point and the backsight point.

Servo auto turn

When using a servo instrument, the Servo auto turn field in the survey style can be set to HA & VA, HA only, or Off. If you select HA & VA, or HA only, the instrument automatically turns to the point during stakeout, and when a known point is entered into a point name field.

Centering error

A centering error can be specified for the instrument and backsight.

The centering error is used to compute the observation weights as part of the Standard resection and Station

Setup Plus computations. Set a value appropriate to the estimated accuracy of your instrument/backsight setup.

Instrument precision

Use the Instrument precision fields to record the precisions of the instrument. Do one of the following:

•

Leave them as null.

•

Enter the manufacturer's values.

•

Accept the default instrument values.

•

Enter your own values based on your observing techniques.

If you leave the fields as null, the statistics are computed using Trimble Business Center default values. If you enter values, they are used to weight observations in the calculation of the Mean orientation and Scale factor for Multiple backsights and Resections, as well as the Resected position. They are also used in Trimble

Business Center to compute the standard error statistics for an observation.

When you use a Trimble VX/S Series, 5600, or 3600 instrument, the instrument precisions are not configured in the survey style. General Survey reads the instrument precisions from the instrument. These precisions are then used to weight and calculate the standard error statistics for an observation.

Observation standard error statistics are stored with each observation. The standard errors can be used in the office software to weight the observations during a network adjustment.

338

Conventional Instrument - Type

In a conventional survey style, you need to specify the type of instrument being used.

Choose a model made by one of the following manufacturers:

•

Trimble

•

Leica

•

Nikon

•

Pentax

•

Sokkia

•

Spectra Precision

•

Topcon

•

Zeiss

Choose Manual when you want to key in the measurements.

Choose one of the following SET types:

•

SET (Basic), when using a Nikon instrument (if your instrument does not support a Nikon survey style). Make sure that the units on the instrument are the same as the units in General Survey.

•

SET (Extended), when using any Sokkia instrument.

Tip - When using non-Trimble instruments, disable auto-connect. Some commands used by auto-connect can interfere with the communication of non-Trimble instruments.

Tip - Set the baud rate to 38400 to connect to the Nikon NPL-352 (or similar models).

Creating a survey style for the Leica TPS1100 and TPS1200 instruments for a Servo or Robotic Survey

The survey style configuration for a Leica TPS1100 and for a TPS1200 instrument are very similar except for the baud rates.

To create a survey style for a Leica 1100/1200 instrument:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles.

2. Tap New.

3. Enter a name in the Style name field.

4. In the Style type field, select Conventional and then tap Accept.

5. Tap Instrument.

6. In the Manufacturer field, select Leica.

7. In the Model field, select either TC1100 Servo (GeoCom) or TC1100 Robotic (GeoCom), depending on whether you will perform a servo or a robotic survey.

8. Set the Baud rate and Parity to match the settings on the instrument.

♦

For the TPS1100 instrument, use a Baud rate of 19200 and Parity of None.

♦

For the TPS1200 instrument, use a Baud rate of 115200 and Parity of None.

339

Trimble recommends an HA VA status rate of 2 seconds or slower. Faster rates can interfere with communication to the instrument.

For more information on Send record acknowledgement, see below.

Most of the other settings depend on how you want to use the software - configure them as required.

9. Tap Accept and then tap Store to save the changes.

Configuring a Leica TPS1200 Instrument for a Servo or Robotic Survey

In both servo and robotic surveys, General Survey communicates with a Leica TPS1200 instrument using the

RCS (Remote Control Surveying) communication protocol through the GeoCOM mode interface.

To communicate with the TPS1200 instrument with a non-Leica controller, you must have the Leica

GeoCOM Robotics License Key. You can make a connection to the instrument without the key, but many functions such as Lock, Search, Change face, and Turn to point will not work.

To configure the instrument:

1. From the Main menu on the Leica TPS1200, press 5 [Config...] and then press 4 [Interfaces...].

2. Use the keyboard arrow key to highlight these three devices; [GSI Output], [RCS Mode], and [Export

Job], one-by-one and then press F5 [USE] to clear the currently selected devices, if required.

3. Use the keyboard arrow key to highlight [GeoCOM Mode] and then press F5 [USE] to set a [Device].

You need to set the device to [TCPS27] and configure the port settings. The device currently displayed may not be [TCPS27] but you will configure that in the next step.

4. To set the correct [Device], press F3 [EDIT] and then press F5 [DEVCE]. Press F6 [PAGE] until the

[Radios] tab is highlighted and then use the arrow key to highlight [TPCS27].

5. Press F3 [EDIT] to configure the comms settings for the [TCPS27], as follows:

♦

[Baud Rate] = 115200

♦

[Parity] = None

♦

[Data Bits] = 8

♦

[Stop Bits] = 1

These are the default settings used with Leica 1200 TCPS27 radios, and these parameters will be set in the base radio connected to the Leica 1200 instrument. Make sure that the rover radio is configured to the same parameters.

Also make sure that the rover radio is set up as a [Remote] radio, the base radio is set up as a [Base] radio, and that they are both on the same [Link] frequency. You are using default settings so these parameters are probably already configured correctly, but if you have communication problems between the radios, check these settings.

To test if the radios are communicating, you can use the Microsoft HyperTerminal application, with each radio connected to a computer.

For more information, refer to your Leica manual or contact your Leica dealer.

6. To save the correct comms settings, press F1 [STORE] and then press F1 [CONT] to continue. The

[GeoCOM Mode] screen now shows:

♦

[Use Interface] = [Yes]

♦

[Port] = [Port 1]

♦

[Device] = [TCPS27]

340

♦

[Protocol] = [RS232 GeoCOM]

7. To exit from the main menu, press F1 [CONT] two times.

The instrument is now configured for communication through the TCPS27 radios.

Note - You can communicate with the TPS1200 instrument regardless of the current screen displayed on the instrument - provided that the comms settings on the instrument, the radios, and the General Survey software are correct. This is different from the TPS1100 instrument.

Configuring a Leica TPS1100 Instrument for a Servo or Robotic Survey

In both a servo and robotic survey, General Survey communicates with a Leica TPS1100 model instrument using the RCS (Remote Control Surveying) protocol.

To configure the instrument:

1. From the Main menu on the Leica TPS1100, press 5 [Configuration] and then press 2

[Communication mode].

2. Press 1 [GSI parameters] and then set the [Baudrate] to 19200, [Protocol] to None, [Parity] to None,

[Terminator] to CR/LF, and [Data Bits] to 8.

3. Press [Cont] to continue.

4. Press 5 [RCS (Remote) On/Off]. Make sure that [Remote control mode] is off.

5. To put the instrument in the [Measure and Record] screen, press F1 [Back] twice and then press F6

[Meas].

Note - You do not need to configure 2 [GeoCOM parameters], 4 [RCS parameters], and you do not need to put the instrument in [GeoCOM On-Line mode] or switch on RCS mode.

Tip - General Survey can only communicate with the instrument when the instrument is in the

[Measure and Record] screen. To configure the instrument to start in the [Measure and Record] screen, select 5, 1, 04 from the main menu on the Leica instrument. Set the [Autoexec] to [Measure and record].

The General Survey software does not support the use of [ATR] mode during automated rounds. The [ATR] state is not updated during the round. Use [Lock] rather than [ATR] mode during automated rounds.

Tip - To use the Reflectorless technology of your instrument, configure the instrument to reflectorless. In

General Survey, set the Measurement mode to Instr. Default.

Alternatively, tap the Target icon in the status bar and select Target DR to switch to Target DR and automatically configure the instrument for reflectorless (DR) mode.

Note - Search does not work when the instrument is in reflectorless (DR) mode.

Note - The Leica TC/TPS1100 survey styles have been designed to operate specifically with the TPS1100 instruments. However, the TC/TPS1100 style may also be used to operate other Leica TPS instruments, for example the Leica TPS1200, using the same protocol.

Configuring a Leica TPS1100 instrument to record data to the General Survey software

341

You can configure a Leica TPS1100 instrument to trigger a measurement and then record the data to the

General Survey software.

Note - Record mode is supported in the General Survey software only when using Measure topo.

To enable this function on the Leica instrument, you must configure the format of the data and then configure where to send the data.

Configuring the format of the data

To configure the Rec-Mask so that the correct information is sent to the General Survey software:

1. From the Main menu on the Leica TPS1100, press 5 [Configuration] and then press 1 [Instrument config].

2. Press 05 [Display and Record].

3. Press F4 [RMask].

4. In the [Define] field, select an appropriate [Rec-Mask] to configure.

5. Set the [Mask name] to something appropriate.

6. Set the [REC format] to [GSI16 (16 char)].

7. The [1st word] is set to [Point Id (11)]. You can not change this.

8. Set the [2nd word] to [Hz (21)].

9. Set the [3rd word] to [V (22)].

10. Set the [4th word] to [Slope Dist (31)].

11. Set the [5th word] to [/(empty)].

12. Set the [6th word] to [Point Code (71)]. This step is optional.

When a point code is output from the instrument, it replaces the code in the code field in the Measure

topo form.

To enter a Point code on the Leica instrument, you may need to configure the

Display mask.

13. Press [CONT] to continue.

On the [Main Display and Record] form the [REC-Mask] now appears with the name you gave the recording mask in step 5 above.

14. To return to the Main menu, press [CONT] / [BACK] / [BACK].

Configuring where to send the data

To configure the instrument to send the REC-Mask data to the RS232 port:

1. From the Main menu on the Leica TPS1100, press F5 [SETUP].

2. Set the [Meas job] field to [RS232 RS].

The [REC-Mask] field appears with the name you gave the recording mask in step 5 above.

3. To return to the [Measure &Record] screen, ready to start measuring points, press F6 [MEAS].

342

The Leica TPS1100 instrument is now configured to measure and send the point name, code, and measurement details to the General Survey Measure topo screen when you use F1 [All] on the Leica TPS1100 instrument.

Measure topo is the only place in the General Survey software where you can trigger a measurement on the

Leica instruments and have the data stored to the controller.

Depending on the model (and possibly the firmware) of your instrument, you may need to configure the

General Survey software. Some models require an acknowledgement from the controller that they have received the data.

If the instrument reports a comms error [Comm. error : wrong response.], and fails to increment the point name on the instrument, then you need to send an acknowledgement to the instrument.

To send an acknowledgement, select the Send record acknowledgement option in the Leica style, or in

Measure topo / Options.

Note - If you selected the Send record acknowledgement check box, the status line in the General Survey software is disabled and the target icon is not updated with Lock status information from the instrument. View the Lock status through the instrument panel.

In the General Survey software, configure the View before storage field as required:

•

When View before storage is on, the measurement details appear, and you can change the code field

• before storing the observation.

When View before storage off, the measurement details appear briefly on the large button before the observation is stored.

Notes

•

Records, 11, 21, 22, 31, and 71 (as described above) are the only records read by the General Survey

• software. All other records are ignored.

The code field in the Leica software annotated [Point code] can be sent to the General Survey

• software.

The code field in the Leica software annotated [Code] cannot be sent to the General Survey software.

•

The point name must be defined in the Leica software and will always replace the point name in the

Measure topo form. If View before storage is on, you do get the opportunity to change the point

• name.

If the [Point code] has been defined in the Leica software it will always replace the Code in the

•

Measure topo form.

If the [Point code] is null in the Leica software it does not replace the code on the Measure topo form.

•

If View before storage is on in the General Survey software, you can change the code before the

• observation is stored.

When using Auto F1/F2 the General Survey software does not increment the point name for the face 2 observation. This feature does not work if the point names are sent from the Leica instrument. For

Auto F1/F2 to work you must set the correct point names in the Leica instrument.

Configuring the display mask

343

To configure the Display mask so that the [Point code] field is available on the instrument:

1. From the Main menu on the Leica TPS1100, press 5 [Configuration] and then press 1 [Instrument config].

2. Press 05 [Display and Record].

3. Press F3 [DMask].

4. In the [Define] field, select an appropriate [Displ.Mask] to configure.

5. Set the [Mask name] to something appropriate.

6. Set the [word] corresponding to the position that you want the point code field displayed to [Point code].

7. Set the other [word] values as required.

8. Press [CONT] to continue.

On the [Main Display and Record] form the [Displ.Mask] now appears with the name you gave the display mask in step 5 above.

9. To return to the Main menu, press [CONT] / [BACK] / [BACK].

Laser Rangefinder

To measure points or distances using a laser rangefinder connected to the controller, first configure the laser rangefinder in your Survey Style.

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles.

2. Highlight a survey style and tap Edit.

3. Select Laser rangefinder.

4. Select one of the instruments in the Type field.

5. If necessary, configure the Controller port and Baud rate fields.

The default value in the Baud rate field is the manufacturer's recommended setting. If the laser is a model with which the General Survey software can automatically take a measurement when you tap

Measure, edit the Auto measure field.

6. If required, select the Auto store point check box.

7. Tap Enter. The precision fields contain the manufacturer's precision values for the laser. They are for information only.

Trimble controllers support Bluetooth wireless connection to some laser rangefinders. If you use a

Bluetooth wireless connection to a laser rangefinder, configure the Bluetooth wireless connection settings. For more information, see

To configure General Survey software to connect to a Bluetooth laser rangefinder.

Laser measurements can be displayed as vertical angles measured from the zenith or inclinations measured from horizontal. Select a display option in the Laser VA display field of the Units screen.

For more information, see System units.

If you are using the LTI TruPulse 200B or 360B, you can select the Low quality targets check box.

When the check box is not selected, measurements that are flagged by the laser rangefinder as low

344

quality are rejected and you will need to take another measurement.

Before using the laser with the controller, configure the laser options. The following table shows the configuration for each laser that is supported by General Survey.

Trimble LaserAce

1000

LTI Criterion 300 or

LTI Criterion 400

LTI TruPulse

200B/360B

Laser Atlanta

Advantage

LaserCraft Contour

XLR

Laser

Bosch DLE 150

LTI Impulse

Laser setting

Bluetooth model connection details:

There is no Bluetooth configuration on the LaserAce 1000, it is always enabled.

When the LaserAce 1000 is detected during the scan for Bluetooth devices, an authentication request dialog appears. You must enter the PIN number set in the laser rangefinder (default PIN = 1234).

When the Bosch DLE 150 is detected, an authentication request dialog appears. You must enter the PIN number set in the laser rangefinder.

From the main menu, press the down arrow or up arrow key until the Survey menu appears and then tap Enter. Select Basic measurements and tap Enter. A screen showing the fields HD and AZ appears.

Set up the laser to operate in CR 400D format. Make sure that a small "d" is displayed on the screen. (If necessary, press the Fire2 button on the laser).

Set the TruPulse mode to either [Slope Distance], [Vertical Distance], or [Horizontal

Distance].

Set the Range/Mode option to Standard (Averaged) and the Serial/Format option to

Trimble Pro XL.

Set the LaserCraft mode in the laser. If you connect through Bluetooth wireless technology, you also need to change the baud rate setting on the laser rangefinder to

4800.

Leica Disto memo/pro

Set the unit to meters or feet, not feet and inches.

Leica Disto Plus

MDL LaserAce

You must enable Bluetooth wireless technology on the Leica Disto Plus before you run a Bluetooth scan.

If automeasure is switched off:

1. To take the measurement, press the [Dist] key on the laser rangefinder.

2. Press the [2nd] key.

3. To transfer the measurement to the controller, press one of the eight direction arrow keys.

MDL Generation II No special settings are required.

Set the Data record format to Mode 1. When you use the angle encoder, set the magnetic declination to zero in the General Survey software. The angle encoder in the

LaserAce laser corrects for the magnetic declination.

Set the baud rate to 4800.

Bluetooth model connection details:

There is no Bluetooth wireless technology configuration on the MDL LaserAce, it is always enabled.

When the MDL LaserAce is detected during the scan for Bluetooth devices, an authentication request dialog appears. You must enter the PIN number set in the laser rangefinder (default PIN = 1234).

345

Note - You must configure the laser rangefinder to update the inclinometer and slope distance readings after each measurement.

For more information, see:

•

Configuring General Survey software to connect to a Bluetooth laser rangefinder

•

Measuring points with a laser rangefinder

Echo Sounder Instruments

General Survey software supports the following models of Bathymetric Echo Sounders:

Echo sounder

CeeStar Basic

High Freq

CeeStar Basic

Low Freq

Echo sounder settings

CeeStar Dual Frequency echosounders, BASIC output format, when the High Frequency depth is to be stored. The unit must be set to output 'prefixes' and not 'commas' in the output data [Menu / Advanced / Prefix / Comma outfm] set to [Use prefix].

CeeStar Dual Frequency echosounders, BASIC output format, when the Low Frequency depth is to be stored. The unit must be set to output 'prefixes' and not 'commas' in the output data [Menu / Advanced / Prefix / Comma outfm] set to [Use prefix].

NMEA

SDDBT device

SonarMite

Any generic Echosounder device that can output the NMEA DBT (Depth Below Transducer) sentence. The "talker ID" must send the standard "SD" identifier (so that output lines all begin with "$SDDBT,..". General Survey will accept the data in Feet, Meters, or Fathoms and will convert values as appropriate.

Any SonarMITE device. the unit will be switched into 'Engineering mode' (output format 0) and other settings may be adjusted by General Survey.

Note - General Survey software uses XML Echosounder protocol description (*.esd) files and so may support other Bathymetric Echo Sounders provided that their communications protocols are relatively straightforward.

For more information, contact your local Trimble dealer.

For more information, see:

Using an Echo sounder to store depths.

Duplicate Point Tolerance

In a GNSS survey, when you attempt to add a point name, the General Survey software warns you if a point of the same name already exists.

In a conventional survey, when you attempt to add a point name that already exists, no message appears to warn you that the point already exists. This is because you may want to regularly measure points on both faces.

In a real-time GNSS survey, or a conventional survey, you can set the tolerance for a duplicate point warning.

•

Specify the maximum distance that a new point can be from an existing point.

346

•

A duplicate point warning appears when you try to store a new point only if it is a duplicate point

• outside the tolerance set.

If the new point has the same name as an existing point, and is closer to the existing point than the

• tolerance specified, the point is stored as a new point, and does not overwrite the existing point.

When you select the Auto average option in the survey style, the point is stored as a new point and an

• average of all previous positions (of the same name) is also stored.

An averaged position has a

higher search class than a normal observation.

If the new point is further from the original point than the tolerance specified, you can choose what to do with the new point when you store it.

The options are:

•

Discard

•

Rename

•

Overwrite - Overwrite and delete the original point, and all other points of the same name and the

• same (or lower) search class.

Store as check - Store with a lower classification.

•

Store another - Store the point, which can then be averaged in the office software. The original point

• is used in preference to this point.

Average - Store the point and then compute and store the averaged position.

Averaging methods

Two averaging methods are supported:

•

Weighted

•

Unweighted

You can select the averaging method in the Cogo settings screen.

Note - When you select Average, the current observation is stored and the computed average position appears, along with the computed standard deviations for the north, east, and elevation ordinates. If there are more than two positions for the point, a Details softkey appears. Tap Details to view the residuals from the average position to each individual position. You can use the Residuals form to include or exclude specific positions from the average computation.

To configure the Duplicate point tolerance:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name>.

2. Select Duplicate point tolerance.

3. Specify the horizontal and vertical tolerances. If you set these distances to zero, a warning is always given.

4. To automatically compute and store the average position, select the Auto average within tolerance option.

Note - When the Auto average option is checked, and an observation to a duplicate point is within the specified duplicate point tolerances, the observation and the computed average position (using all the available point positions) are automatically stored.

347

Note - The General Survey software computes an averaged coordinate by averaging the grid coordinates computed from the underlying coordinates or observations. Observations that do not allow a grid coordinate to be resolved (for example, angles only observations) are not included in the average coordinate.

For more information, see:

•

Cogo / Compute average

Face 1 and Face 2 observations

When you carry out two-face observations in a conventional survey during Station setup, Station Setup Plus,

Resection, or when measuring Rounds, the General Survey software checks that the Face 1 and the Face 2 observations to a point are within a preset tolerance.

If the observations are out of tolerance, the Observation: Out of tolerance screen appears.

The screen displays the following options:

•

Discard - discard the observation without storing.

•

Rename - rename to a different point name.

•

Store as check - store with a classification of Check.

•

Store another - store the observation.

•

Store and reorient - (This option only appears if you are observing a backsight point.) Store another observation that will provide a new orientation for subsequent points measured in the current station setup. Previous observations are not changed.

Once you have completed the Station Setup Plus, Resection, or Round measurements, the General Survey software saves the Mean Turned Angles to each of the observed points. The software does not check for duplicate points at this stage. Therefore, to use any of the observations to compute an average position for an observed point, you must select the

Compute average option from the Cogo menu.

Feature Libraries

You can create a feature library by using office software and then transferring the library to the controller, or you can create a feature code list directly in the controller.

Note - Feature codes created using the General Survey software do not have attributes associated with them.

Use the following office software to create and transfer feature libraries:

To create the library, use ...

Feature and Attribute Editor

Feature Definition Manager

To transfer the library, use ..

Trimble Geomatics Office

Trimble Business Center

.fal

.fxl

File saved on controller as...

Notes

348

•

Trimble Business Center version 1.0 Feature Definition Manager creates and reads version 1 fxl files.

•

Trimble Business Center version 2.0 Feature Definition Manager creates and reads version 1 and 2 fxl

• files.

Trimble Business Center version 2.1 Feature Definition Manager creates and reads version 1, 2 and 3

• fxl files.

General Survey does not upgrade a fxl v2 file to a fxl v3 file

•

General Survey version 1.90 and later can read version 1, 2 and 3 fxl files, but only create a version 3

• file.

General Survey versions 1.00 through to 1.80 can read .fxl version 1 and version 2 files, but can only

• create a version 2 file.

General Survey versions 1.00 and later can read .fal files

•

Trimble Survey Controller version 11.40 and earlier created .fal files.

•

Trimble Survey Controller versions 12.00 through to 12.22 creates and reads .fxl version 1 files. They do not support version 2 or 3 files.

There are up to five fields to configure when adding or editing feature codes.

The options available depend on the type of file:

•

All feature libraries have a Feature code and Description.

•

All feature libraries have a Feature type. You can edit the Feature type in a .fal file, and you can set the Feature type when you create a new .fxl file, but you cannot edit the Feature type in a .fxl file

• once it has been set.

All feature libraries have a Line style. There are only two line styles supported by the General Survey

• software, Solid lines and Dashed lines.

Only .fxl feature libraries can have a Line color.

•

Only version 3 fxl feature libraries can have a polygon feature type.

To create a new feature code list:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Feature Libraries.

2. Tap New.

3. Enter the name of the list.

4. Tap the name of the new Feature library file you just created and then tap Edit to add, delete, or edit codes.

Note - An individual Feature code cannot contain more than 20 characters. But the maximum number of characters in a code field is 60.

Tip - The Code and Description are both displayed when you use Feature libraries.

Most recently used codes are displayed indented at the top of the list.

Feature code names that contain spaces appear in the General Survey software with a small dot between the words, for example, Fire·Hydrant. These dots do not appear in the office software.

Some symbols are not supported in feature libraries, for example ! and [ ]. If you use unsupported symbols when creating a library in the office software, the General Survey software converts them to the underscore symbol "_" when they are transferred.

349

Line codes

When it is operating with a feature code library, the General Survey software can process the feature codes so that points with their Feature type set to Line or Polygon will be joined by lines. Polygons are automatically closed.

To configure a feature library for real time feature code processing:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Feature Libraries.

2. Select a Line color for the line.

3. Tap Accept and then tap Store to save the changes.

If the Display coded features option is selected in the map options, the General Survey software draws lines between points, based on the specified display properties.

Notes

•

There are 15 basic colors available when configuring the line color in the General Survey software.

•

Colors can be defined in the office using the Feature Manager software and transferred via an .fxl file to the controller. The colors defined in the .fxl file by the Feature Manager software may not be

• identical to the colors used by the General Survey software.

Colors can be defined in the Feature Manager as 'By layer' or 'Custom'.

♦

When 'By layer' has been defined the General Survey software uses black.

♦

When 'Custom' has been defined the General Survey software uses the closest color match to

♦ the General Survey palette.

You cannot define the color as 'By layer' or 'Custom' in the General Survey software. If set in the office software, these options are displayed in the General Survey software, and can be changed to a General Survey software color, but if this is done you cannot change them back.

•

General Survey does not fill feature coded polygons.

Control codes

With line codes set up in a feature library (as described above), points that have the same code can be joined by lines.

Example - In a topographical survey, set up the CL code as a Line code . Survey the center line of a road and assign the code CL to each point. If you have the Display coded features option selected, all points to which the code CL has been assigned are joined.

However, you will need extra line joining control to start new line sequences, close figures, and join specific points. To achieve this extra control, define Control codes. These are assigned to points in addition to the Line

code of the point. A Control code follows the Line code it applies to and is separated from the Line code by a space character.

To create a Control code, set the Feature type for a code you are editing to Control code. When you have done this, a new Control code action is available.

350

The following control code actions are supported:

Control code

Join to first (same code)

Join to named point

Start join sequence

End join sequence

Skip join

Start tangential arc

End tangential arc

Start non-tangential arc

End non-tangential arc

Action

Joins the point to the first point that has the same code. Use this action in the definition of a control code that is used to close a figure. For polygons Join to

first (same code) and End join sequence are equivalent.

Creates a line join from a point with this control code to the point named after this control code in the code field. The control code and name should be separated by a space. A line join created by this control code will be displayed in addition to the line join created by a line code that the control code may apply to.

Starts a new join sequence. The current point is set as the first point in the sequence. As a result. the point that it will be joined to uses a control code with the action Join to first (same code). This action also skips the join to the previous point with the same code that its associated line code would have created.

Instructs the system that the current point is the last point in the join sequence.

This means that the next point that has the same line code will not join to it. For polygons Join to first (same code) and End join sequence are equivalent.

Operates in a similar fashion to the Start join sequence action, but it only stops the join action of the line code it is associated with. It does not make the current point the first point in a new join sequence. Skip join is ignored for polygons.

Use the Start tangential arc control code to start an arc tangentially (with points defining the entry tangent direction). The azimuth between the previous point with the same feature code, and the point that has the start arc control code, defines the entry tangent direction.

Use the End tangential arc control code to end an arc tangentially (with points defining the exit tangent direction). The azimuth between the point with the end arc control code, and the next point with the same feature code, defines the exit tangent direction.

Use the Start non-tangential arc control code to start an arc non-tangentially.

You do not need a previous point with the same feature code to start an arc this way.

Use the End non-tangential arc control code to end an arc non-tangentially. No next point with the same feature code is required to end an arc this way.

Notes

When processing the arc feature codes and if an arc cannot be computed, the segment is drawn as a dashed red line to indicate that something is wrong with the coding. Situations where this will occur are:

•

An arc is defined by two points and no tangency information is defined for at least one of the two

• points.

A two point arc is defined as being tangential at both the start and end but these tangents do not work.

•

A best fit arc from three or more points cannot be determined, for example when the points are all on a straight line.

351

Radios - for GNSS

Radios are used for real-time surveys.

To connect a data link radio or cellular modem to the General Survey software, select the Route through

controller check box. Real-time data between the receiver and the radio or cellular modem then passes through the General Survey software.

Specify the controller port that the radio or cellular modem is connected to, and the baud rate for communications.

A radio icon appears in the status bar when a survey is started. If there is a problem with the radio link between the base and rover receivers, a red cross is drawn over the radio icon.

•

Tap on the radio or radio link down icon to:

♦

View the radio type

♦

View the Station index

♦

View the Base data age

♦

View the Reliability

♦

Check the settings or reconfigure the rover radio when it is connected to a receiver with an

♦ internal radio

Redial a modem connection or re-establish the streaming of corrections data

♦

Hang up a modem connection

Note - The Station index and Reliability are available only in a CMR and CMR+ survey.

Configuring a radio for a real-time GNSS Survey

From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Base radio or Rover radio to:

• change the frequency of a radio.

• change the mode of a radio from a broadcasting/receiving radio to a repeater radio.

• change the wireless data rate.

To configure a radio:

Connect the controller, receiver, power, and radio. For more information, see the diagram on setting

up the base receiver.

Alternatively, use a Y-cable to connect the power and the controller directly to the radio.

2. On the controller, highlight your survey style and tap Edit.

3. Select Base radio or Rover radio depending on which radio you are configuring.

4. Set the Type field to the radio type you are using.

5. If the radio is connected directly to the receiver, clear the Route through controller check box. Specify the receiver port number that the radio or cellular modem is connected to, and the baud rate for communications.

6. If the radio is connected to the controller, select the Route through controller check box. This enables real-time data between the receiver and the radio or cellular modem to pass through the controller.

352

Specify the controller port number that the radio or cellular modem is connected to, and the baud rate for communications.

7. Tap Connect.

Notes

♦

If the softkey is not displayed, you cannot configure the type of radio you have selected.

♦

If the softkey displays >Rover or >Base tap to switch to the appropriate mode and then tap

Connect.

If you are configuring a radio other than the internal radio of a Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver, the following message appears:

Please confirm. Disconnect power from radio.

8. Disconnect the power from the radio and then tap OK.

The following message appears: Please confirm. Connect power to radio.

9. Reconnect the power to the radio and tap OK (there is no need to tap OK for a Pacific Crest radio).

The second Base radio / Rover radio screen appears.

10. If the details are correct, tap Enter.

Tip - You can also access the radio configuration by tapping the radio button in

GNSS functions.

Note - In some countries it is illegal to change the frequency of a radio. The General Survey software uses the latest GNSS position to see if you are in one of these countries. If you are, only the available frequencies are displayed in the Frequency field.

If your radio does not appear on the list, select Custom radio and then define the receiver port, baud rate, and parity.

If you select Base radio and set the Type field to Custom radio, you can also enable Clear To Send (CTS).

Warning - Do not enable CTS unless the receiver is connected to a radio that supports CTS.

The Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receivers support RTS/CTS flow control when you enable CTS.

For more information on CTS support, refer to the documentation supplied with your receiver.

Radio Solutions

Trimble provides a comprehensive range of tested and proven radio solutions.

Trimble radios are powered by the receiver's power supply, using a common data/power cable. This configuration simplifies battery setup, as the receiver and the radio use the same power source.

353

You can use a cellular modem

at both the base and rover receivers. At the base, the cellular modem is connected to the receiver. At the rover, the cellular modem can be connected to the receiver or the controller.

Note - Cellular modems used with the General Survey software must support Hayes compatible AT commands.

Base receivers used with modems must support CTS flow control.

You can use the General Survey software to configure the radios. For more information, see

Configuring a radio using the General Survey software.

Note - The internal radio in a Trimble integrated GNSS receiver can also operate as a base radio if it is configured as a transceiver, and if the UHF Transmit option is on. This avoids having to use an external radio solution at the base receiver to broadcast base data.

Radio considerations

Real-time survey methods rely on trouble-free radio transmission.

Note - The precision of measured points is not affected by radio performance.

To reduce the effects of interference from other base stations operating on the same frequency, use a transmission delay for your base station that does not coincide with others on the same frequency. For more

information, see Operating Several Base Stations on One Radio Frequency.

Sometimes the conditions or topography of a site adversely affect radio transmission, resulting in limited coverage.

To increase site coverage:

•

Move the base stations to prominent points around the site.

•

Erect the base radio antenna as high as possible.

•

Use radio repeaters.

Tip - Double the height of the broadcast antenna to increase the coverage by approximately 40 %. To achieve the same effect, it would be necessary to quadruple the radio broadcast power.

Radio Repeaters

Radio repeaters increase the broadcast range of a base radio by receiving the base transmission and then rebroadcasting it on the same frequency.

Trimble provides five radio solutions for use with the General Survey system.

You can use one repeater with a radio that has a 12.5 kHz channel spacing, and one or two repeaters with a radio that has a 25 kHz channel spacing. For details of the Trimble and Pacific Crest radios, please refer to the specific product documentation.

354

You can configure the Trimble R series internal radio to repeat base data to other rovers while performing a rover survey. This is known as a roving repeater setup. The internal radio can repeat the base signal over its

UHF communication link to other rovers while simultaneously performing a rover survey. This option is available in Trimble GNSS receivers with internal radios that have the UHF Transmit option enabled. Select this repeater mode when you connect to the internal radio from the Rover radio options screen in the Survey

Style.

Note - To use any of these radios as repeaters, they must be configured as repeaters. To do this, follow the steps above to connect to the radio and then choose a repeater mode, which appears if the radio you are connected to supports being a repeater. Alternatively, if the radio has a front panel, use that to set the repeater mode.

Cellular Modem - Overview

In a real-time survey, you can use an external cellular modem or Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module as the corrections data link between the base and the rover receivers, and to connect to the Internet to exchange data and email.

To perform an Internet real-time survey, use one of the following methods:

•

Receive base data from a service provider, using a system such as GPSNet or GPSBase

•

Use your own remote base station that is also connected to the Internet by a cellular modem or

Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module. If you use the external cellular modem method, you must have a General Survey data collector connected at all times at the base.

If you use your own base station connected to the Internet, you can set up the base station to operate as a server that the rover will connect to, or to transfer the data to a distribution server. When the base operates as a server, the number of rover connections to that base is limited by the capacity of the base Internet connection. In some cases, only one rover connection may be possible. When the base transfers data to a distribution server, the distribution server can send the base data to many rovers.

To use a cellular modem or Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module to connect the controller to the

Internet, see

Connecting to the Internet.

To use a cellular modem or Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module in an Internet real-time survey,

configure

the base and rover radio as an Internet connection when you create or edit a survey style. The cellular modem must support an Internet connection.

You can use a cellular modem in dial-in mode to receive base data from a service provider that uses a modem as the service data link, or from a remote base station that is also equipped with a cellular modem. When you use your own base station, the rover cellular modem dials directly to the base cellular modem. The cellular modem can be connected to the receiver or to the controller.

To use a cellular modem or Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module in a dial-in real-time survey,

configure

the base and rover radio for a dial-in connection when you create or edit a survey style. The modem must support Hayes compatible AT commands.

355

Configuring the Survey Style Base or Rover Radio as a Cellular

Modem

You can select a GNSS contact when you configure the rover or base radio for your survey style:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Survey styles / <Style name> / Base radio or Rover radio.

2. Choose one of the following base or rover radio types:

♦

If using an external modem dial-in connection, select

Cellular modem.

♦

If using an external modem Internet connection, select Internet connection.

♦

If using a Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module, select Trimble receiver internal and then select the appropriate method.

◊

Select Mobile Internet for a Internet survey.

◊

Select GSM dial-in for a dial-in survey.

3. In a Cellular modem rover survey, if you are connecting the cellular modem directly to the controller

using a cable or Bluetooth, select the Route through controller check box.

From the GNSS contact field, tap the field menu (right arrow) button to access the GNSS contacts

form. Select a GNSS contact from the list or create a new contact.

You can also enter the GNSS contact name for a contact that you have already configured.

Note - The GNSS Contact list is filtered according to the modem type.

5. To display the GNSS contact that is configured in the survey style, or change the GNSS contact when you start the survey, select the Prompt for GNSS contact check box.

Note – To use the Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module for Internet real-time rover surveys, use Bluetooth technology to connect the controller to the receiver.

For Internet base surveys, you can use Bluetooth technology if you are using Route through controller in the GNSS contact, or use a cable if you are not using Route through controller.

When you start a survey using the Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module, General Survey software dials the base station's modem and then begins the survey. For more information, see

Starting a Real time survey using a dial-in GSM connection.

Note - You can also create and edit profiles by editing the [GNSSContacts.xml] file that is stored in the

[System files] folder. To do this, copy the file to your computer, edit the file and then load it back into the

[System files] folder.

Before you start a survey using a Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module:

1. Connect the controller to the Trimble GNSS receiver that has an Internal GSM/mobile Internet module with Bluetooth technology installed.

2. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth. In the Connect to GNSS receiver /

VX/S Series field, select the receiver.

356

Tip - Tap the auto-connect icon before a connection is made, or tap the receiver icon after a connection is made, to access a shortcut to the Bluetooth configuration screen.

GNSS Contacts

To add, edit, or delete entries in GNSS contacts, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts from the Trimble

Access menu.

If you use a cellular modem as the corrections data link for a real-time survey, you can create and configure the Internet or dial-in connection. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

Setting up a Bluetooth connection for an external cellular modem dial-in or Internet survey

Before you start a survey using a cellular modem connected to the controller with Bluetooth, make sure that the phone is paired with the controller.

Bluetooth pairing must establish that both the controller and the modem have permission to communicate with each other.

To start the pairing process with a Bluetooth modem:

1. Make sure that the phone is turned on and that it is in discoverable mode.

2. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth and then tap Config to bring up the

Bluetooth configuration screen for the controller.

Tip - Tap the auto-connect icon before a connection is made, or tap the receiver icon after a connection is made, to access a shortcut to the Bluetooth configuration screen.

Note - If you are using a Trimble GNSS receiver with an Internal GSM/mobile Internet module, you do not need to scan for the module separately from the receiver.

The Trimble GNSS receiver and the Internal GSM/mobile Internet module are recognized by a Bluetooth scan as being the same device but with serial port and dial-up networking capabilities.

Creating and configuring cellular modem GNSS contacts

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Tap New or select a GNSS contact to configure.

3. Enter the contact Name.

4. Select a Contact type.

♦

If you are configuring the contact type of a rover that is obtaining corrections from the

♦

Internet, select Internet rover.

If you are configuring the contact type of a rover that will dial in to a modem to obtain

♦

corrections, select Dial-in rover.

If you are configuring the contact type of a base that is sending corrections to the Internet,

♦ select

Internet base.

If you are configuring the contact type of a base that you will dial in to, using a modem to

357

obtain corrections, select

Dial-in base.

To delete a GNSS contact:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Highlight the entry that is to be deleted.

3. Tap Delete.

4. When asked if you want to permanently delete the contact, tap Yes.

Cellular Modem Dial-in Survey Configuration

To create a new GSM Dial-in GNSS contact:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Tap New or select a GNSS contact to configure.

3. Enter the contact Name.

4. Select a Contact type.

♦

If you are configuring the profile of a rover that will dial in to a modem to obtain corrections,

♦ select Dial-in rover.

If you are configuring the profile of a base that you will dial in to, using a modem to obtain corrections, select Dial-in base.

5. If you are using a Bluetooth modem, select one from the drop-down list or tap Config to perform a

Bluetooth scan.

6. Enter all of the GNSS contact details.

7. Tap Store.

The following table shows cellular modem commands and information that may be useful when completing a new GNSS contact.

Field

Modem PIN

(optional)

Number (4-8 digits).

Information required Functions of command

Unlocks the cellular modem.

Init string

(optional)

Command

Note - For the base modem, the command must leave the modem in auto-answer mode. Alternatively, set the auto-answer mode separately, using a Terminal program.

Command

Starts communication and sets up modem options.

Hang up

Dial prefix

Number to dial

Dial suffix

(optional)

Command

Phone number of the base station modem.

Note - Use a comma (,) to send a short delay, for example, to separate the area code from the number.

Command

Ends communication.

Command used to initiate dialing number.

Software sends to the modem after it has dialed the number.

358

Post connect

(optional)

Note - The Dial prefix, Number to dial, and Dial suffix values are concatenated to send to the modem.

Once the connection is established between the base and rover modems, information is sent from the rover to the base. This is usually the log-in name and password.

Note - Use a caret (^) to send a carriage return and a

3-second delay to the base system. For example, use this to separate a log-in name from a password.

When you start a survey using the Trimble Internal GSM/mobile Internet module, General Survey software dials the base station's modem and then begins the survey. For more information, see

Starting a Real time survey using a dial-in GSM connection.

For information on starting a Real-time survey using a cellular modem, see:

Starting the Base Receiver

Starting a Real-time Survey using a Cellular Modem

Starting a Wide-Area RTK Survey

Cellular Modem Internet Survey Configuration

To configure a new GNSS contact to use an external or Trimble internal Internet connection for a rover survey:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Tap New or select a GNSS contact to configure.

3. Enter the contact Name.

4. Set the Contact type to Internet rover.

5. In the Network connection field, key in a network connection or select one from the pop-up directory.

To create a network connection, see Connecting to the Internet.

Note - For the Trimble Tablet, tap Add to create a new Internet connection. See

Create new network connection.

6. If the network connection you selected specifies a Bluetooth modem, the Bluetooth modem field will be automatically completed and greyed out.

If the network connection does not specify a Bluetooth modem but one is required, select one from

359

the drop-down list or tap Config to perform a Bluetooth scan.

If your Internet connection specifies a serial port modem, the Bluetooth modem field is set to None.

7. If required, enter the Modem PIN.

The modem PIN may be required to unlock the cellular modem.

8. Specify an Access Point Name (APN) for the external modem.

To select a preset APN, tap the field menu (right arrow) button and select Select Access Point Name

(APN) to select a Location and Provider and plan.

Note - You can also create and edit a preset APN list by editing the [ServiceProviders.xml] file that is stored in the [System files] folder. To do this, copy the file to your computer, edit the file and then load it back into the [System files] folder.

The APN is provided by your internet service provider when you set up an account.

9. On a Trimble CU, if your mobile Internet provider requires a user name and password for a network connection, select the Show 'Connect' dialogue check box in your GNSS contacts list. The system prompts you to enter a user name and password before it establishes a network connection.

Note - The operating system on the Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller does not support the Show

'Connect' dialogue check box. This is because you can now specify a username and password when you create the network connection. These settings are saved on the controller so that you do not need to enter them each time you connect.

10. If the rover is to connect to the base through

NTRIP, select the Use NTRIP check box.

Otherwise go to step 14.

11. If the rover is to connect to the proxy server, select the Use proxy server check box and then enter the proxy server address and port. The proxy server check box appears when you select the NTRIP check box.

Obtain the proxy server address and port from the Internet service provider.

12. To connect to a Mountpoint on starting a survey, without being prompted for the Mountpoint name, select Connect directly to Mountpoint and enter a Mountpoint name.

If a Mountpoint name is not specified, the system will prompt you when you start a survey. Your selection will then be stored in GNSS contacts.

If the specified mountpoint cannot be accessed when you start the survey, a list with available

Mountpoints appears.

13. If required, enter an NTRIP username and NTRIP password.

14. If you are configuring a rover connection, enter the IP Address and IP Port number of the server you are connecting to as a source for base data into the Edit GNSS contact form.

360

Obtain the IP address of the base from the Internet GNSS correction data provider, or, if you are using a controller at the Internet base, use the IP Address and IP port values displayed in the IP Settings of

this base field on the Base screen displayed on the controller at the base.

Note - If the IP address of the base controller appears to be invalid, Trimble recommends that you perform a soft reset of the device before you connect to the Internet and start the base.

15. In the Connection type field select the method your modem uses to connect to the Internet:

♦

If your modem uses mobile Internet, select Mobile internet.

♦

If your device is a CDPD modem, select CDPD.

♦

If you are using a dial-up Internet connection where a phone number is used to dial your ISP, then select Dial-up.

16. If the rover must supply identification information through regular NMEA messages to the base data server, select the Send user identity info check box. At the start of the survey, the software asks you to enter this information.

17. Tap Store.

Note - If you are using the Receiver Internal modem for an Internet connection and you are connected to the receiver through Bluetooth wireless technology, you must select the receiver in the Bluetooth modem field of the Edit GNSS contact form.

When you start the survey, the General Survey software establishes a network connection with the Trimble

Internal GSM/mobile Internet module or an external modem and then begins the survey. For more

information, see Starting a Real time survey using a mobile internet connection.

To configure a new GNSS contact to use an Internet connection for a base survey:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Tap New or select a GNSS contact to configure.

3. Enter the contact Name.

4. Set the Contact type to Internet base.

5. In the Network connection field, key in a network connection or select one from the pop-up directory.

To create a network connection, see Connecting to the Internet.

Note - For the Trimble Tablet, tap Add to create a new Internet connection. See

Create new network connection.

6. If required, enter the Modem PIN.

The modem PIN may be required to unlock the cellular modem.

7. Specify an Access Point Name (APN) for the external modem.

To select a preset APN, tap the field menu (right arrow) button and select Select Access Point Name

(APN) to select a Location and Provider and plan.

361

load it back into the [System files] folder.

The APN is provided by your internet service provider when you set up an account.

8. If you want the controller connected to the internet at the base, which requires leaving the controller connected to the base receiver while the base survey is running, select the Route through controller check box.

If you clear the Route through controller check box, the base receiver uploads base data to a server, and the controller does not need to remain connected to the base receiver after the base survey is started. This requires receiver firmware version 3.70 or later.

Note - Connecting the receiver directly to the server is only available when using a Trimble R8

GNSS at the base.

If you are not using Route through controller, go to step 12.

9. In the Network connection field, key in a network connection or select one from the pop-up directory.

To create a network connection, see Connecting to the Internet.

10. If the network connection you selected specifies a Bluetooth modem, the Bluetooth modem field will be automatically completed and greyed out.

If the network connection does not specify a Bluetooth modem but one is required, select one from the drop-down list or tap Config to perform a Bluetooth scan.

If your Internet connection specifies a serial port modem, the Bluetooth modem field is set to None.

11. On a Trimble CU, if your mobile Internet provider requires a user name and password for a network connection, select the Show 'Connect' dialogue check box in your GNSS contacts. The system prompts you to enter a user name and password before it establishes a network connection.

Note - The operating system on the Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller does not support the Show

12. Set the Base operation mode to Upload data to remote server when the data should be uploaded to a server, or to Operate as a server.

13.

If uploading data to a remote NTRIP server, select the Use NTRIP check box.

◊

Specify a Mountpoint name.

◊

If required, enter the NTRIP username and NTRIP password.

14. Do one of the following:

♦

If you are configuring your GNSS contacts to Operate as a server , enter the IP Port.

The IP Address and IP port values will be displayed in the IP Settings of this base field on the

Base screen displayed on the controller at the base once the base is started.

362

♦

If you are configuring a base connection to upload to a remote server, enter the IP Address and IP Port of the remote server.

Note - If the IP address of the base controller appears to be invalid, Trimble recommends that you perform a soft reset of the device before you connect to the Internet and start the base.

Tip - To connect a rover to the base, you must start a mobile Internet base with a public IP address.

15. In the Connection type field select the method your modem uses to connect to the Internet:

♦

If your modem uses mobile Internet, select Mobile internet.

♦

If your device is a CDPD modem, select CDPD.

♦

If you are using a dial-up Internet connection where a phone number is used to dial your ISP, then select Dial-up.

16. Tap Store.

When you start the survey, the General Survey software establishes a network connection with the Trimble

Internal GSM/mobile Internet module or an external modem and then begins the survey. For more

information, see Starting a Real time survey using a mobile internet connection.

Note - If the IP address of the base controller appears to be invalid, Trimble recommends that you perform a soft reset of the device before you connect to the Internet and start the base.

To test a mobile Internet configuration in GNSS contacts:

When there are connection problems or if the GNSS contacts contains incorrect settings, use the Test softkey to troubleshoot:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Highlight the GNSS contact entry that you want to test.

3. Tap Edit and then tap Test.

4. General Survey steps through the connection process using the settings defined in the GNSS contacts file and tests the settings to make sure that they are correct. If the test fails Bluetooth or modem connection settings, or if the APN activation does not succeed, a report is generated detailing the problem and suggesting a solution.

Note - Only mobile Internet GNSS contacts can be tested.

To create an Internet connection using GNSS contacts:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / GNSS contacts.

2. Highlight a GNSS contact that is configured for an Internet connection.

363

3. Tap the Connect button at the bottom of the GNSS contacts form. An Internet connection is established and a check mark appears next to the contact to show that it is in use.

4. To end the Internet connection, highlight the GNSS contact and then tap Hang up.

If you start a mobile Internet survey after you establish an Internet connection in GNSS contacts, then the

General Survey software uses this connection for the mobile Internet survey.

Note - The Access Point Name (APN) that you enter provides network routing and connection information for the service being requested. You can obtain this information from your mobile Internet service provider.

Networked Transport of RTCM via Internet Protocol (NTRIP)

NTRIP uses the Internet to distribute real-time GNSS base station data.

When GNSS contacts is correctly configured and you start the survey, a connection is established to the

NTRIP server. In addition, a table appears showing the available sources of corrections from the server. These can be single station sources, or network sources (for example, VRS). The type of base station data that this

"mount point" provides is shown in the source table. Select the source that you want to use. When you do this, a connection is made to that source, and base station data begins to stream through General Survey to the connected GNSS receiver.

Note - To determine the closest source, tap the Distance from here heading to sort that column.

If authentication is required to connect to a particular mount point, and this was not configured in GNSS contacts, the General Survey software displays a screen where you can enter your user name and password.

When the General Survey software connects to the NTRIP caster, it checks if the caster supports NTRIP version 2.0.

•

If the caster acknowledges that it supports version 2.0, the General Survey software communicates

• using version 2.0 protocols.

If the caster does not support version 2.0, the General Survey automatically uses NTRIP version 1.0.

To force the General Survey software to always use NTRIP version 1.0, select the Use NTRIP v1.0 check box when you configure the NTRIP settings.

NTRIP version 2 includes improvements to the original standard. The General Survey software now supports the following NTRIP version 2 features:

NTRIP 2.0 feature

Full HTTP compatibility

Advantages over 1.0

Addresses proxy server issues.

Supports virtual hosts using the "Host directive".

Chunked transfer encoding Reduces data processing time.

364

More robust data checking.

Connecting to the Internet

To connect to the Internet, you need a cellular modem (typically, a cell phone). The cellular modem can be connected to the controller by:

•

a Cable

•

Bluetooth wireless technology

To connect to the Internet using a cable

To connect by cable, use the cellular modem data cable connected to the serial port on the controller. Once connected you can:

•

Create a new dialing location

(if required)

•

Create a Dial-up connection

•

Start the Internet connection

•

Browse the Internet

To connect to the Internet using a Bluetooth cellular modem:

A Bluetooth cellular modem can connect to a Slate, GeoXR, CU, TSC2, or TSC3 controller.

1. Make sure that Bluetooth is enabled, and that the cellular modem is paired and connected. For more

information, see Bluetooth.

2. On the controller, run the application [Bluetooth2Mobile] to associate your phone with Dial-up networking.

♦

On the Trimble CU, double-tap [My computer] and browse to \Program Files\General

♦

Survey\, then double-tap Bluetooth2Mobile.exe.

On the Slate, GeoXR, TSC2, or TSC3 controller, skip this step and go straight to creating a

new dial-up connection.

3. Select your cellular modem from the drop down list. Tap [Hide] to minimize the application to the toolbar. Then follow the remaining steps below.

Note - You cannot connect to the Internet using the Trimble Internal GSM / mobile internet module unless the controller is running the General Survey software.

Once connected you can:

♦

Create a new dialing location

(if required)

♦

Create a Dial-up connection

♦

Start the Internet connection

♦

Browse the Internet

365

To create a new dialing location on a Trimble CU controller:

1. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Control Panel / Dialing].

2. Tap [New]. Enter an appropriate name for the dialing location and then tap [OK].

3. Edit the [Dial patterns]:

♦

On the Trimble CU, tap [Edit].

4. Set the [Local], [Long distance], and [International calls] fields all to "g". Tap [OK].

This ensures that the controller does not add any automatic long distance or area codes to the number that it dials.

Note - If the Internet Setup window is open and there is an established connection, the controller will not suspend.

Creating a Dial-up connection

For details on creating a new Dial-up Connection for each controller type see:

•

Trimble CU controller

•

Trimble TSC2 controller

•

Trimble TSC3 controller

•

Trimble GeoXR controller

•

To create a new Dial-up Connection on a Trimble CU controller:

1. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Control Panel / Network and Dial-up Connections].

2. Double tap [Make new Connection]. Enter a connection name.

3. Make sure that the connection type is set to [Dial-up Connection]. Tap [Next].

4. Do one of the following:

♦

If you are using Bluetooth wireless technology, select [BluetoothDUN].

♦

If you are using a cable, select either [Com1: Hayes Compatible] or [Com2: Hayes

Compatible].

Note - Do not change the settings on the [Configure], [TC/IP Settings] or [Security Settings] softkeys. The windows defaults are correct.

5. Tap [Next].

6. In the [Phone number] dialog, enter the number to dial:

♦

If you are dialing a GSM provider (pay by the minute), enter the number to dial.

♦

If you are dialing a mobile Internet provider (pay by volume of data transferred), enter

*99***1#. The *99***1# is a standard access code for mobile Internet. If you are unable to connect using *99***1#, contact your mobile Internet provider.

To create a new Dial-up Connection on the Trimble TSC2 controller:

366

1. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Connections].

2. Tap the Connections icon and then select [Add a new modem connection] under [TrimbleNet].

3. Enter a name for the connection.

♦

If you are using Bluetooth wireless technology, select [Bluetooth], and then tap [Next].

♦

If you are using a cable, select [Hayes Compatible on COM1], and then tap [Next].

♦

If you are using a mobile Internet CF card, select [mobile internet modem], and then tap

[Next].

4. If you are using Bluetooth, select the cellular modem that you paired with the TSC2 controller earlier and then tap [Next].

5. Enter the number to dial:

♦

If you are dialing a GSM provider (pay by the minute), enter the number to dial.

♦

If you are dialing a mobile Internet provider (pay by volume of data transferred), enter

*99***1#.

*99***1# is a standard access code for mobile internet.

If you cannot connect using *99***1#, contact your mobile Internet provider.

Note - If you travel or change area codes often, you can configure the dialing location. Select [Use dialing rules] when you enter the phone number:

1. Select the [Use dialing rules] link.

2. Select the [Use dialing rules] check box and then tap [OK] when the warning message appears.

3. To change the General Survey dialing rules, tap [Edit].

4. Select [Dialing Patterns] and then set the [Local], [Long distance], and [International calls] fields all to "g". Tap [OK].

This ensures that the controller does not add any automatic long distance or area codes to the number that it dials.

5. Once the dialing rules are updated tap [OK], to return to the form where you entered the phone number.

6. Tap [Next].

Note - Do not change the settings under the [Advanced] softkey. The defaults are correct.

7. Tap [Finish].

To create a new Dial-up Connection on the Trimble TSC3 controller:

1. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Connections / Connections] and then select [Add a new modem connection] under [TrimbleNet].

2. Enter a name for the connection.

♦

If you are using Bluetooth wireless technology, select [Bluetooth], and then tap [Next].

♦

If you are using the controller's internal modem select one of the following, and then tap

[Next]:

◊

[Cellular Line] using circuit switched technology

◊

[Cellular Line (mobile internet)] using packet switched technology

Tip - Access for the SIM card is under the battery on the TSC3 controller.

♦

If you are using a cable, select [Hayes Compatible on COM1], and then tap [Next].

367

3. If you are using Bluetooth, select the cellular modem that you paired with the controller earlier and then tap [Next].

4. Enter the number to dial:

♦

If you are dialing a GSM provider (pay by the minute), enter the number to dial.

♦

If you are dialing a mobile Internet provider (pay by volume of data transferred), enter

*99***1#.

*99***1# is a standard access code for mobile Internet.

If you cannot connect using *99***1#, contact your mobile Internet provider.

5. Tap [Next].

6. Optionally enter a User name , Password and Domain .

Note - Do not change the settings under the [Advanced] softkey. The defaults are correct.

7. Tap [Finish].

To create a new Dial-up Connection on the Trimble GeoXR controller:

1. On the controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu, select [Settings / Connections /

Connections] and then select [Add a new modem connection] under [TrimbleNet].

2. Enter a name for the connection.

♦

If you are using Bluetooth wireless technology, select [Bluetooth], and then tap [Next].

♦

If you are using the controller's internal modem select one of the following, and then tap

[Next]:

◊

[Cellular Line] using circuit switched technology

◊

[Cellular Line (mobile internet)] using packet switched technology

Tip - Access for the SIM card is through a port on the left side of the Trimble GeoXR controller.

♦

If you are using a cable, select [Hayes Compatible on COM1], and then tap [Next].

3. If you are using Bluetooth, select the cellular modem that you paired with the controller earlier and then tap [Next].

4. Enter the number to dial:

♦

If you are dialing a GSM provider (pay by the minute), enter the number to dial.

♦

If you are dialing a mobile Internet provider (pay by volume of data transferred), enter

*99***1#.

*99***1# is a standard access code for mobile Internet.

If you cannot connect using *99***1#, contact your mobile Internet provider.

5. Tap [Next].

6. Optionally enter a User name , Password and Domain.

Note - Do not change the settings under the [Advanced] softkey. The defaults are correct.

7. Tap [Finish].

To create a new Dial-up Connection on the Trimble Slate Controller:

1. On the controller, press the Windows button, select [Settings / Connections / Connections] and then select [Add a new modem connection] under [TrimbleNet].

368

2. Enter a name for the connection.

♦

If you are using Bluetooth wireless technology, select [Bluetooth], and then tap [Next].

♦

If you are using the controller's internal modem select one of the following, and then tap

[Next]:

◊

[Cellular Line] using circuit switched technology

◊

[Cellular Line (mobile internet)] using packet switched technology

Tip - Access for the SIM card is through a port on the left hand side of the Trimble Slate

Controller.

♦

If you are using a cable, select [Hayes Compatible on COM1], and then tap [Next].

3. If you are using Bluetooth, select the cellular modem that you paired with the controller earlier and then tap [Next].

4. Enter the number to dial:

♦

If you are dialing a GSM provider (pay by the minute), enter the number to dial.

♦

If you are dialing a mobile Internet provider (pay by volume of data transferred), enter

*99***1#.

*99***1# is a standard access code for mobile Internet.

If you cannot connect using *99***1#, contact your mobile Internet provider.

5. Tap [Next].

6. Optionally enter a User name , Password and Domain.

Note - Do not change the settings under the [Advanced] softkey. The defaults are correct.

7. Tap [Finish].

Starting the Internet connection

For details on starting the Internet connection for each controller type see:

•

Trimble CU controller

•

Trimble TSC2 controller

•

Trimble TSC3 controller

•

Trimble GeoXR controller

•

Configuring a Survey Style for an Internet Real-Time

To start the Internet connection on the Trimble CU controller:

1. Make sure that the cellular modem is switched on and connected to the controller.

2. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Network/Dial-up Connections].

3. Double tap the new connection that you created earlier.

4. If necessary, enter the [User Name] and [Password] required by your mobile Internet provider to log onto their network. Many providers do not require a user name or password.

5. Tap [Connect].

6. When you are connected, tap [Hide].

Tip - To check that you are connected to the Internet, tap [Start / Programs / Internet Explorer] and visit a website, for example, www.trimble.com

369

To configure an Internet Real-Time Survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for an Internet Real-Time

To start the Internet connection on the Trimble TSC2 controller:

1. Make sure that the cellular modem is switched on and connected to the controller.

2. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Connections].

3. Tap the [Connections] icon and then select [Manage existing connections] under [TrimbleNet].

4. Tap and hold on the new connection that you created previously and then select [Connect] from the shortcut menu.

5. If necessary, enter the [User Name] and [Password] required by your mobile Internet provider to log onto their network. Many providers do not require a user name or password.

6. Tap [OK].

7. When you are connected, tap [Hide].

Tip - To check that you are connected to the Internet, tap [Start / Internet Explorer] and visit a website, for example, www.trimble.com

To configure an Internet Real-Time Survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for an Internet Real-Time

To start the Internet connection on the Trimble TSC3 controller:

1. Make sure that the cellular modem is switched on and connected to the controller.

2. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Connections].

3. Tap the [Connections] icon and then select [Manage existing connections] under [TrimbleNet].

4. Tap and hold on the new connection that you created previously and then select [Connect] from the shortcut menu.

5. If necessary, enter the [User Name] and [Password] required by your mobile Internet provider to log onto their network. Many providers do not require a user name or password.

6. Tap [OK].

Tip - To check that you are connected to the Internet, tap [Start / Internet Explorer] and visit a website, for example, www.trimble.com

To configure an Internet Real-Time Survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for an Internet Real-Time

To start the Internet connection on the Trimble GeoXR controller:

1. Make sure that the cellular modem is switched on and connected to the controller.

2. On the controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu, select [Settings / Connections /

Connections] and then select [Manage existing connections] under [TrimbleNet].

3. Tap and hold on the new connection that you created previously and then select [Connect] from the shortcut menu.

4. If necessary, enter the [User Name] and [Password] required by your mobile Internet provider to log onto their network. Many providers do not require a user name or password.

5. Tap [OK].

370

6. When you are connected, tap [Hide].

Tip - To check that you are connected to the Internet, tap [Start / Internet Explorer] and visit a website, for example, www.trimble.com

To configure an Internet Real-Time Survey see

Configuring a Survey Style for an Internet Real-Time

To start the Internet connection on the Trimble Slate Controller:

1. Make sure that the cellular modem is switched on and connected to the controller.

2. On the controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu, select [Settings / Connections /

Connections] and then select [Manage existing connections] under [TrimbleNet].

3. Tap and hold on the new connection that you created previously and then select [Connect] from the shortcut menu.

4. If necessary, enter the [User Name] and [Password] required by your mobile Internet provider to log onto their network. Many providers do not require a user name or password.

5. Tap [OK].

6. When you are connected, tap [Hide].

Tip - To check that you are connected to the Internet, tap [Start / Internet Explorer] and visit a website, for example, www.trimble.com

To configure an Internet Real-Time Survey see

Browsing the Internet

For details on browsing the Internet for each controller type see:

•

Trimble TSC2 controller

•

Trimble TSC3 controller

•

Trimble GeoXR controller

•

Another Trimble controller

To browse the Internet with a TSC2 controller during a mobile Internet connection:

1. On the controller, tap [Start / Settings / Connections].

2. Tap the [Connections] icon and then select the[ Advanced] tab.

3. Tap [Select Networks].

4. Set [Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using:] to [TrimbleNet].

5. Tap [OK] to save the changes and exit.

To browse the Internet with a TSC3 controller during a mobile Internet connection:

1. On the controller, press the Trimble button to access the [Start] menu and then select [Settings /

Connections / Connections / Advanced tab].

2. Tap [Select Networks].

371

3. Set [Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using:] to [TrimbleNet].

4. Tap [OK] to save the changes and exit.

To browse the Internet with a Trimble GeoXR controller during a mobile Internet connection:

1. On the controller, press the Trimble button, select Start menu and then select [Settings / Connections /

Connections / Advanced tab].

2. Tap [Select Networks].

3. Set [Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using:] to [TrimbleNet].

4. Tap [OK] to save the changes and exit.

To browse the Internet with a Trimble Slate Controller during a mobile Internet connection:

1. On the controller, press the Trimble button to access the [Start] menu and then select [Settings /

Connections / Connections / Advanced tab].

2. Tap [Select Networks].

3. Set [Programs that automatically connect to a private network should connect using:] to [TrimbleNet].

4. Tap [OK] to save the changes and exit.

To create a new network connection on the Trimble Tablet:

Note - Make sure that you have paired with your Bluetooth modem before creating a network connection.

1. From within GNSS contacts, tap the arrow on the right of the Network connection field.

2. From the Network connection page, tap Add.

3. Enter a Name for the network connection.

4. Select a Bluetooth modem from the list of paired devices.

5. For the APN, either enter a value, select None, or use the Select Access Point Name (APN) wizard. In the wizard, select your country in the Location field, and select your Provider and plan. Tap Accept.

The APN field is updated.

6. In the Number to dial field, enter *99***1#. The *99***1# is a standard access code for mobile

Internet. If you are unable to connect using *99***1#, contact your mobile Internet provider.

7. Enter a Username and Password if required by your network connection.

8. Tap Accept to create the new network connection.

Notes

•

To view the settings of an existing network connection, highlight the connection and then tap the Edit

• softkey.

To create a network connection outside of GNSS contacts, use Internet Setup from Trimble Access menu or select Settings / Connect / Internet Setup. Internet Setup will take you directly to the

Windows Network and Sharing Center.

Bluetooth

You can configure a Trimble controller to connect to other devices using Bluetooth wireless technology.

372

On the controller, you can establish a connection to:

•

•

A Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver

•

A Trimble conventional instrument

•

A Bluetooth-capable cellular modem

•

Supported Bluetooth laser rangefinders

•

Supported Bluetooth echo sounders

Note - Reference to a Trimble CU refers to all versions of the Trimble CU including the Trimble CU (Model

3) controller. When required, the Trimble CU (Model 3) controller is specifically mentioned. A Trimble CU

(Model 3) controller can be identified by the label on the back.

Automatically enable Bluetooth

You can automatically enable Bluetooth technology when General Survey software is started. Also, if you have Bluetooth configured as the connection method to use to connect to a device, it can be used even if

Bluetooth is not currently enabled. To do this, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth from the Trimble Access menu, and then select the Automatically enable Bluetooth check box.

Automatically enable Bluetooth has an advantage over [Enable Bluetooth after reset] because it enables

Bluetooth when required, and not only after a reset.

Tip - Tap the auto-connect icon before a connection is made, or tap the receiver icon after a connection is made, to access a shortcut to the Bluetooth configuration screen.

To configure one controller to connect to another controller:

1. Switch on both controllers.

2. On both controllers, from the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth.

3. On both controllers, tap Config.

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Mode] tab and then make sure that the [Turn on

♦

Bluetooth] and [Make this device visible to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, select the Power tab and then make sure that the

♦

[Enable Bluetooth] and [Discoverable] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU make sure that the [Enable Bluetooth] check box is selected.

4. Start a scan on one controller:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet, tap [Add a device].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [Add new device...].

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [New Partnership...].

♦

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, tap the [Scan Device] tab and then tap [Scan].

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap [Scan Device].

(Do not use [Stop] - wait for the scan to complete.)

The controller searches for other Bluetooth wireless technology devices within range.

373

Do not perform a scan on more than one controller at a time. A Bluetooth device cannot respond if it is scanning.

5. Once the scan is complete, highlight the Bluetooth device to connect to.

♦

On a Trimble Tablet: a. Tap [Next].

b. Select [Create a pairing code for me] to see a pairing code.

c. On the controller you are pairing with: Tap [OK] to accept the pairing with the

Trimble Tablet, enter the code shown on the Trimble Tablet, tap [Next] and then tap

[Finish].

d. On the Trimble Tablet, tap [Close].

Tip - To avoid time-out issues when pairing with a Trimble CU controller, Trimble recommends that you use a short pairing code and enter the code quickly.

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap [Next].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

When connecting one controller to another controller, you do not need to enter a passkey. Tap

[Next].

Enter a display name for the device and then tap [Finish] for a TSC2 controller or tap [Done] for a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller.

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap the --> softkey to make it a Trusted device.

When connecting one controller to another controller, you do not need to Authenticate the device. When the authentication message appears, tap [No].

6. On both controllers, tap [OK].

7. On the controller that is sending the data, select the controller you are sending to in the Send ASCII

data to field. Tap Accept.

The controllers are now configured to

send and receive ASCII data.

Note - You can give your controller a unique name. This makes it easier to identify when searching for it in a

Bluetooth scan. To do this:

•

On a Trimble Tablet, go to [Windows Start \ Control Panel \ System]. Tap [Change settings], enter a new computer name in the [Computer Name] tab and then tap [Change...]. Tap [OK] and then tap

•

[OK] again to confirm restarting the computer. Tap [Close] and then tap [Restart Now].

On a TSC2/TSC3 controller, go to [Start \ Settings \ System \ About]. Tap the [Device ID] tab and change the [Device Name] field, and then tap [Ok]. Press and hold the power key to perform a soft

• reset on the controller.

On a Trimble GeoXR controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu and then select [Settings \

System \ About]. Tap the [Device ID] tab, change the [Device Name] field and then tap [Ok]. Press

• and hold the power key to perform a soft reset on the controller.

On a Trimble Slate Controller, press the Windows button to access the [Start] menu and select

[Settings \ System \ About]. Tap the [Device ID] tab and change the [Device Name] field, and then tap [Ok]. Press and hold the power key to perform a soft reset on the controller.

374

•

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, go to [Start \ Settings \ Control Panel \ System]. Tap the

[Device Name] tab, change the [Device name] field and then tap [Ok]. To reset the controller, hold

• down the Power key and then select [Options / Reset].

On a Trimble CU controller, go to [Start \ Settings \ Control Panel \ System]. Tap the [Device Name] tab and change the [Device name] field, and then tap [Ok]. To reset the controller, go to [Start \

Programs \ Utilities\Reset \ Soft Reset].

To configure General Survey software to connect to a Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver:

Note - Trimble 5700 receivers do not support Bluetooth wireless technology.

1. Switch on the receiver and the controller.

2. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth.

3. Tap Config and ensure that the Bluetooth wireless technology is switched on:

♦

On a Slate/TSC3 controller, tap the [Mode] tab and then make sure that the [Turn on

♦

Bluetooth] and [Make this device visible to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, select the Power tab and then make sure that the

♦

[Enable Bluetooth] and [Discoverable] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU controller, make sure that the [Enable Bluetooth] check box is selected.

4. Start a scan on the controller:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet, tap [Add a device].

♦

On a Slate/TSC3 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [Add new device...].

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [New Partnership...].

♦

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, tap the [Scan Device] tab and then tap [Scan].

♦

On a Trimble CU, tap [Scan Device].

(Do not use [Stop] - wait for the scan to complete.)

The General Survey software searches for other Bluetooth devices within range.

A Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver (excluding the R10) does not respond to a scan if it is already connected through Bluetooth wireless technology.

5. Once the scan is complete, highlight the Bluetooth device to connect to.

♦

On a Trimble Tablet tap [Next].

When connecting a Trimble Tablet to a Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver, select [Pair without using a code]. Once the device driver software is installed (if required), tap [Close].

Note - If the device prompts you for a pairing code, enter 0000.

♦

On a TSC2/Slate/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

When connecting a controller to a Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver, you do not need to enter a passkey. Tap [Next].

Enter a display name for the device and then tap [Finish] for a TSC2 controller or tap [Done] for a Slate/TSC3 controller.

375

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap the --> softkey to make it a Trusted device.

When connecting a controller to a Trimble R / 5000 series GNSS receiver, you do not need to

Authenticate the device. When the authentication message appears, tap [No].

6. Tap [OK].

7. In the Connect to GNSS rover field, select the Bluetooth device to connect to and then tap Accept.

The General Survey software automatically connects to the Trimble GNSS receiver within a few seconds, when in rover mode.

8. In the Connect to GNSS base field, select the Bluetooth device to connect to and then tap Accept.

The General Survey software automatically connects to the Trimble GNSS receiver within a few seconds, when in base mode.

Note - Unless you change the Connect to GNSS rover or Connect to GNSS base fields to None, you do not need to use the scan function again. The controller automatically connects to the receiver when you turn on both devices.

To configure the software to connect to a conventional instrument:

1. Configure the instrument for Bluetooth communication according to the instrument.

Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station

♦

Turn on the instrument and then use the Face 2 display on the instrument to turn on Bluetooth wireless technology.

Note - The menu of the Face 2 display on instrument can only be accessed when the instrument is On and the General Survey software is not connected. From the electronic level screen, select [Set] to access the menu and configure Bluetooth wireless technology.

Trimble M3 total station a. Turn on the instrument and then tap [Start / Programs / TSMode].

b. Tap [Sett.]: From the [Comm.] tab, set the [Port] to Bluetooth. Tap [OK] and then exit.

c. Tap [Start / Settings / Control panel].

d. Tap [Bluetooth Device Properties]: From the [Power] tab, select [Enable Bluetooth] and

[Discoverable]. Tap [OK] and then exit.

2. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth.

3. Tap Config and ensure that the Bluetooth wireless technology is switched on:

♦

On a Slate/TSC3 controller, tap the [Mode] tab and then make sure that the [Turn on

♦

Bluetooth] and [Make this device visible to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, select the Power tab and then make sure that the

♦

[Enable Bluetooth] and [Discoverable] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU controller, make sure that the [Enable Bluetooth] check box is selected.

4. Start a scan on the controller:

376

♦

On a Trimble Tablet, tap [Add a device].

♦

On a Slate/TSC3 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [Add new device...].

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [New Partnership...].

♦

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, tap the [Scan Device] tab and then tap [Scan].

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap [Scan Device].

(Do not use [Stop] - wait for the scan to complete.)

The controller searches for other Bluetooth devices within range.

A Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station does not respond to a scan if it is already connected through Bluetooth wireless technology.

5. Once the scan is complete, highlight the Bluetooth device to connect to.

♦

On a Trimble Tablet tap [Next].

When connecting a Trimble Tablet to an instrument, select [Pair without using a code]. Once the device driver software is installed (if required), tap [Close].

♦

On a TSC2/Slate/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

When connecting a controller to an instrument, you do not need to enter a passkey. Tap

[Next].

Enter a display name for the device and then tap [Finish] for a TSC2 controller or tap [Done] for a Slate/TSC3 controller.

Warning - While you are configuring the Bluetooth connection on a TSC2/Slate/TSC3 controller, if a message says that the instrument wants to connect to the controller and asks if you want to add the instrument to your list of devices, tap [No].

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap the --> softkey to make it a Trusted device.

When you connect a controller to a Trimble VX/S Series instrument, you do not need to authenticate the controller. When the authentication message appears, tap [No].

6. Tap [OK].

7. In the Connect to conventional instrument field, select the Bluetooth device to connect to and then tap

Accept.

The software automatically connects to the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station within a few seconds. For the Trimble M3 total station instrument, you must start a survey to force a connection

Note - Unless you change the Connect to conventional instrument fields to None, you do not need to use the scan function again. The controller automatically connects to the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S

Series total station instrument when you turn on both devices. For the Trimble M3 total station instrument, you must start a survey to force a connection.

To configure the software to connect to a Bluetooth cellular modem:

1. Switch on the cellular modem and the controller.

2. On the cellular modem, select the option to make the cellular modem discoverable.

3. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth.

377

4. Tap Config and make sure that the Bluetooth wireless technology is switched on:

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Mode] tab and then make sure that the [Turn on

♦

Bluetooth] and [Make this device visible to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, select the Power tab and then make sure that the

♦

[Enable Bluetooth] and [Discoverable] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU controller, make sure that the [Enable Bluetooth] check box is selected.

5. Start a scan on the controller:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet, tap [Add a device].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [Add new device...].

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [New Partnership...].

♦

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, tap the [Scan Device] tab and then tap [Scan].

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap [Scan Device].

(Do not use [Stop] - wait for the scan to complete.)

5. The controller searches for other Bluetooth devices within range. Once the scan is complete, highlight the Bluetooth device to connect to:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet tap [Next].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

Enter a passkey of your choice (for example, 1234) to establish a secure connection. Do not tap [Next] until you complete step 7.

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap the --> softkey to make it a Trusted device.

When prompted to authenticate the device, select [Yes].

When the [Enter Pin] dialog appears, enter a PIN of your choice, for example, 1234. Do not tap [OK] until you complete step 7.

6. On the cellular modem, select the appropriate option to accept a pairing request.

For example, on the Sony Ericsson T68i, you need to select [Connect (8) | Bluetooth (4) | Paired

Devices (2) | Add Device | Phone accepts (2)].

Note - The controller must become a paired/trusted device on the phone.

7. To complete pairing the devices:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet: a. Select [Create a pairing code for me] to see a pairing code.

b. On the cellular modem device: Enter the code shown on the Trimble Tablet and then tap [OK].

c. On the Trimble Tablet, tap [Close] once the device driver software is installed (if required).

♦

On the Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

Enter a display name for the device and then tap [Finish] for a TSC2 controller or tap [Done]

♦ for a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller.

On a Trimble CU controller, tap [OK] on the [Enter Pin] dialog.

378

The cellular modem prompts you to add the controller as a paired device and allows you to enter the corresponding PIN you selected in step 8.

The controller is now listed as a paired device on the cellular modem, and the cellular modem is added to the list of trusted devices on the controller.

8. Tap [OK].

Note - If you use the General Survey software to dial a base station directly using a Bluetooth cellular phone, do not run [Bluetooth2Mobile.exe]. If you do, the software cannot connect to the modem; the error message

Connection failed appears.

To connect to the Internet, you must create a dialing location and start a mobile Internet connection. For more

information see Connecting to the Internet.

To use a cellular modem for real-time surveying, see

Using cellular modems.

To configure the General Survey software to connect to a Bluetooth laser rangefinder:

You can connect a Trimble controller to supported Bluetooth laser rangefinders.

1. Switch on the laser rangefinder and the controller.

2. Enable Bluetooth on the laser rangefinder, if required.

3. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth.

4. Tap Config and make sure that Bluetooth is switched on:

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Mode] tab and then make sure that the [Turn on

♦

Bluetooth] and [Make this device visible to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, select the Power tab and then make sure that the

♦

[Enable Bluetooth] and [Discoverable] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU controller, make sure that the [Enable Bluetooth] check box is selected.

4. Start a scan on the controller

♦

On a Trimble Tablet, tap [Add a device].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [Add new device...].

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and tap [New Partnership...].

♦

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, tap the [Scan Device] tab and then tap [Scan].

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap [Scan Device].

(Do not use [Stop] - wait for the scan to complete.)

5. The controller searches for other Bluetooth devices within range. Once the scan is complete, highlight the Bluetooth device to connect to:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet tap [Next].

If the laser rangefinder does not require a passkey, select [Pair without using a code].

Some laser rangefinders (Trimble LaserAce 1000, Bosch DLE 150, MDL LaserAce) require you to you to enter a passkey. Enter the passkey provided with the laser rangefinder (Trimble

379

LaserAce 1000 and MDL LaserAce default = 1234) and then tap [Next]. When connecting a controller to other supported laser rangefinders, just tap [Next].

Once the device driver software is installed (if required), tap [Close].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

Some laser rangefinders (Trimble LaserAce 1000, Bosch DLE 150, MDL LaserAce) require you to you to enter a passkey. Enter the passkey provided with the laser rangefinder (Trimble

LaserAce 1000 and MDL LaserAce default = 1234) and then tap [Next]. When connecting a controller to other supported laser rangefinders, just tap [Next].

Enter a display name for the device and then tap [Finish] for a TSC2 controller or tap [Done] for a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller.

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap the --> softkey to make it a Trusted device.

Some laser rangefinders (Trimble LaserAce 1000, Bosch DLE 150, MDL LaserAce) require you to Authenticate the device. When the authentication request appears, enter the pin provided with the laser rangefinder (Trimble LaserAce 1000, MDL LaserAce default = 1234) and then tap [OK]. When connecting a controller to other supported laser rangefinders, authentication is not required.

6. Tap [OK].

7. In the Connect to laser field, select the Bluetooth device to connect to. Then tap Accept.

The General Survey software connects to the laser rangefinder when you open the Measure laser

points screen or when you use the laser to measure distances for field fill in.

To configure the General Survey software to connect to a Bluetooth echo sounder:

You can connect a Trimble controller to supported Bluetooth echo sounders.

1. Switch on the echo sounder and the controller.

Tip - Some echo sounders are automatically switched on when the transducer cable is connected.

2. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Bluetooth.

3. Tap Config and make sure that Bluetooth is switched on:

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Mode] tab and then make sure that the [Turn on

♦

Bluetooth] and [Make this device visible to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, select the Power tab and then make sure that the

♦

[Enable Bluetooth] and [Discoverable] check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble CU controller, make sure that the [Enable Bluetooth] check box is selected.

4. Start a scan on the controller

380

♦

On a Trimble Tablet, tap [Add a device].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC3 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and then tap [Add new device...].

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap the [Devices] tab and tap [New Partnership...].

♦

On a Trimble CU (Model 3) controller, tap the [Scan Device] tab and then tap [Scan].

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap [Scan Device].

(Do not use [Stop] - wait for the scan to complete.)

5. The controller searches for other Bluetooth devices within range. Once the scan is complete, highlight the Bluetooth device to connect to:

♦

On a Trimble Tablet tap [Next].

If the echo sounder does not require a passkey, select [Pair without using a code].

Note - When connecting the controller to a device that requires a PIN or passkey enter the

PIN/passkey provided.

The Ohmex SonarMite typically uses a PIN/passkey set to '1111'.

Once the device driver software is installed (if required), tap [Close].

♦

On a Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller, tap [Next].

Note - When connecting the controller to a device that requires a PIN or passkey enter the

PIN/passkey provided.

The Ohmex SonarMite typically uses a PIN/passkey set to '1111'.

♦

On a Trimble CU controller, tap the --> softkey to make it a Trusted device.

6. Tap [OK].

7. In the Connect to echo sounder field, select the Bluetooth device to connect to. Then tap Accept.

You now need to configure the Echo sounder settings in the Survey style.

General Survey connects to the echo sounder when you open the GNSS Continuous topo

screen.

Using the Microsoft Windows Mobile Beam program to send files between a Trimble Slate

Controller/Trimble GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller and a Bluetooth Cellular modem

1. Close the all software. Otherwise, the file transfer may fail.

2. Specify the Bluetooth settings:

♦

On a Slate/TSC3 controller, press the Windows button to access the Start menu, tap [Settings

/ Bluetooth] and then make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device

♦ discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected in the [Mode] tab.

On a Trimble GeoXR controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu, select [Settings /

Bluetooth] and then make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected in the [Mode] tab.

381

♦

On a TSC2 controller, tap [Start / Settings / Connections / Bluetooth]. Make sure that the

[Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

3. Select the file to send:

♦

On a Slate/TSC3 controller, press the Windows button to access the Start menu, tap [File

♦

Explorer] and then browse to find the file to send.

On a Trimble GeoXR controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu, select [File

♦

Explorer] and then browse to find the file to send.

On a TSC2 controller, tap [Start / Programs / File Explorer] and then browse to find the file to send.

4. Tap and hold on the file and then tap [Beam File].

The controller scans for devices within range.

5. Tap the device that you want to send the file to.

The status changes from [Tap to send] to [Pending].

6. On the receiving device, accept the file. The file is transferred.

On the controller, the status field shows [Done].

To transfer a file from a Sony Ericsson Z1010 to a Trimble Slate Controller/Trimble GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller:

1. Use the File manager on the Z1010 to locate the file to send to the controller.

2. Press [More], select [Send] and then select [Via Bluetooth].

The cellular modem scans for devices within range.

3. Select the controller that you want to send the file to.

4. If you need to pair and authenticate the devices, follow the prompts on the cellular modem and on the controller, as required.

The devices connect and the file is transferred.

The file is saved to [\My Documents] on the controller.

Compass

The TSC3 and Trimble Slate Controller include an internal compass that can be used when staking out a position or navigating to a point. The compass provides the large navigation arrow with direction in a robotic or GNSS survey when you are stationary and also when you walk backwards.

When the compass is enabled, the following enhanced North arrow is displayed:

To disable the compass when you are near magnetic fields that may cause interference, select Navigate to point / Options

Stakeout / Options.

Note - When the compass is disabled, the orientation arrow states S and points South.

382

Compass calibration

Because the performance of the compass is impacted by magnetic fields, Trimble recommends re-calibrating the compass when the controller is taken into different environments.

To configure the magnetic declination, select

General Survey / Jobs / Properties of job / Cogo Settings.

To calibrate the TSC3 controller compass:

1. Select Settings / Connect / Compass.

2. Tap Calibrate.

3. Hold the controller level and then press Enter.

4. Rotate the controller by 180 degrees (while keeping it horizontal) and press Enter again.

5. Rotate the controller upside down and then press Enter again.

6. When the device has finished calibrating tap OK.

7. Tap OK to exit the calibration process.

To calibrate the Trimble Slate Controller compass:

1. Select Settings / Connect / Compass.

2. Tap Calibrate.

3. Hold the controller level for three seconds.

4. Rotate the controller 360° in the horizontal plane within 10 seconds.

5. When the calibration is complete tap OK and then Exit.

383

Transferring files between controllers

To transfer files between Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controllers use Microsoft Windows Mobile Beam application.

Using the Microsoft Windows Mobile Beam program to send files between controllers

You can use the Beam program on Microsoft Windows Mobile software for Pocket PCs to transfer any type of file between two Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controllers, or from a Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3 controller to an office computer using Bluetooth wireless technology.

Note - You can only transfer one file at a time with Beam.

To transfer files using Beam:

1. Enable Bluetooth wireless technology on the controller/s.

♦

On an Slate and TSC3 controller, press the Windows Start button to open the Start menu and then tap [Settings / Bluetooth]. Select [Mode] and make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and

♦

[Make this device discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

On a TSC2 controller, press the Window button and select [Settings / Connections /

Bluetooth].

Make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device discoverable to other devices]

♦ check boxes are selected.

On a Trimble GeoXR controller, tap the Trimble button, select Start menu and then tap

[Settings / Bluetooth].

Tap the [Mode] tab and make sure that the [Turn on Bluetooth] and [Make this device discoverable to other devices] check boxes are selected.

2. Close the General Survey software. Otherwise, the file transfer may fail.

3. On the controller that is to send the file, select [Start / Programs / File Explorer].

Browse to find the file to send.

4. Set up the device that will receive the file.

♦

If you are sending to a controller, browse to [Start / Settings / Connections / Beam] and make

♦ sure that the Receive all incoming beams check box is selected.

If you are sending to an office computer, you must initiate the computer to receive a file.

5. On the controller sending the file, tap and hold on the file and then tap [Beam File].

6. The controller scans for devices within range. Select the device that you want to send the file to.

7. On the receiving device, accept the file. The file is transferred.

For help with Bluetooth issues, go to Troubleshooting.

You can use Bluetooth wireless technology to establish a connection between a Trimble CU and an office computer, and then you can transfer files using Bluetooth and the Trimble Data Transfer utility or Microsoft

ActiveSync. For more information, see

Using Bluetooth to Connect a Trimble CU to an Office Computer.

384

Language

To change the language of the General Survey software:

1. Transfer the language file to the controller.

2. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Languages.

3. Choose the required language from the list.

4. Restart the General Survey software.

Railroad terminology

Select the Use railroad terminology option to use:

•

Lift for the cut / fill term instead of the default V.Dist

•

Slew left / Slew right for the navigation prompt instead of the default Go left / Go right, when staking a road by any of the following stake options:

♦

Station and offset

♦

Nearest offset

♦

Side slope from alignment

Distance terminology

If you selected English as your language, the Use chainage distance terminology option appears. Select this option to use Chainage for the distance term instead of the default Station.

Sound Events

Sound events are prerecorded messages that notify you of an event or action that has occurred. They correspond with status line messages, and common error and warning messages.

Sound events are stored as .wav files. You can customize your own sound events by replacing or deleting the existing .wav files located in the [Program Files\General Survey\Languages\English\] folder.

Tip - Use the Recorder application provided in the Slate/GeoXR/TSC2/TSC3/Trimble Tablet controller to record your own sound events. Alternatively, transfer .wav files from the office computer to the controller using Data Transfer or the Microsoft ActiveSync technology.

To turn all sound events on or off:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Languages.

2. Select the Play sound events check box to turn on sound events, or clear it to turn them off.

385

Templates

Use Templates to create a template of job properties to be used for a new job. To create a new template:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Templates.

2. Tap New.

(To edit or review a template, highlight the template name and then tap Edit.)

3. Enter a template name.

4. Use the Copy from field to copy the job properties from the Last used job or an existing template.

5. Edit the properites for the template as required.

6. Tap Accept.

To import a template from another job:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Templates.

2. Tap Import.

3. Select the job and then tap OK.

4. Enter the template name and then tap OK.

Tip - Use Rename or Delete to rename or delete a template.

386

Instruments

Instrument Menu

This menu provides information about the instrument connected to the Trimble Controller, and is used to configure the settings.

Available options depend on the instrument that is connected.

For more information on GNSS instrument controls, see the following topics:

Network/Reference Station Status

For more information on conventional instrument controls, see the following topics:

387

FineLock and Long Range FineLock

Satellites

To see information about the satellites currently being tracked by the receiver, tap the satellite icon on the status bar or select Instrument / Satellites from the main menu.

A satellite is identified by the space vehicle (SV) number.

•

GPS satellite numbers are prefixed with a "G".

•

GLONASS satellite numbers are prefixed with an "R".

•

Galileo satellite numbers are prefixed with an "E".

•

QZSS satellite numbers are prefixed with a "J".

•

OmniSTAR satellites are identified as "OS".

•

RTX satellites are identified as "RTX".

The satellite positions can be represented graphically with the sky plot or textually in a list.

Sky Plot

To see a sky plot, tap Plot.

•

Tap Sun to see the plot oriented towards the sun.

•

Tap North to see the plot oriented towards north.

•

The outside circle represents the horizon or 0° elevation.

•

The inner, solid green, circle represents the elevation mask setting.

•

The SV numbers on the diagram are placed in the position of that particular satellite.

•

Satellites that are tracked but not used in the position solution appear in blue.

•

The zenith (90° elevation) is the center of the circle.

Notes

♦

Tap the SV number to view more information about that specific satellite.

♦

An unhealthy satellite is shown in red.

388

Satellite List

To see the list of satellites, tap List.

•

In the list of satellites, each horizontal line of data relates to one satellite.

•

Azimuth ( Az ) and elevation ( Elev ) define a satellite's position in the sky.

•

The arrow displayed next to the elevation indicates whether the elevation is increasing or decreasing.

•

The signal-to-noise ratios (SNR) indicate the strength of the respective satellite signals. The greater

• the number, the better the signal.

If L1 or L2 are not being tracked, then a dashed line (-----) appears in the appropriate column.

•

The check mark on the left of the screen indicates whether that satellite is in the current solution, as shown in the following table.

Situation

No survey is running

What a check mark indicates

Satellite is being used in the current position solution

RTK survey is active Satellite is common to the base and rover receivers

Postprocessed survey is running Satellite for which one or more epochs of data have been collected

•

To see more information about a particular satellite, tap the appropriate line.

You can also select the following options:

•

To stop the receiver tracking a satellite, tap the satellite to display the satellite information and then tap Disable.

Note - If you disable a satellite, it remains disabled until you enable it again. Even when the receiver is switched off, it stores that a satellite is disabled.

•

To change the elevation mask and the PDOP mask for the current survey, tap Options.

•

To enable SBAS outside of a survey, tap Options and then select Enable SBAS.

•

In a real-time survey, tap Base to see which satellites are being tracked by the base receiver. No values appear in the Az and Elev columns, as this information is not included in the correction

• message broadcast by the base.

In a postprocessed survey, the L1 softkey appears in the Satellites dialog. Tap L1 to display a list of cycles tracked on the L1 frequency for each satellite.

The value in the CntL1 column is the number of cycles on the L1 frequency that have been tracked continuously for that satellite. The value in the TotL1 column is the total number of cycles that have been tracked for that satellite since the start of the survey.

•

With a dual-frequency receiver, the L2 softkey appears in the Satellites dialog. Tap L2 to display a list of cycles tracked on the L2 frequency for each satellite.

The SNR softkey appears. Tap SNR to return to the original screen and view information about the signal-to-noise ratio for each satellite.

Enabling and Disabling WAAS and EGNOS satellites

389

When you start a survey configured to use SBAS with Trimble Access, the appropriate satellites are enabled in the receiver so that they can be tracked. To use an alternative SBAS satellite, disable the satellite(s) that you do not want to use, and enable the satellite that you want the receiver to track. To do this:

1. Start the survey with the SBAS enabled style.

2. Tap the satellite icon.

3. Tap Info and then enter the PRN number of the satellite that you want to enable or disable.

4. Tap Enable or Disable.

The SBAS satellites remain enabled or disabled until the next time that you start a new survey.

Receiver Files

If the controller is connected to a receiver that supports this function, you can transfer files to and from the

Trimble controller to the receiver.

The Import from receiver option is available when a Trimble GNSS receiver is in use. Use it to delete files in the connected receiver, or to copy files from the connected receiver to the controller.

Notes

•

To access the External memory of a receiver that supports both Internal and External memory, tap on

• the Parent folder from the Internal directory and then tap on External.

You cannot undelete deleted receiver files.

The Export to receiver option is available when a Trimble GNSS receiver is in use that has a compact flash card inserted. Use it to copy files from the controller to the connected receiver.

You can transfer files only to and from the current

project folder

on the controller. To transfer files to or from

another project folder, open a job in the required project folder (which thereby changes that one to the

current project folder) and then transfer the files. Alternatively, use Windows Explorer to copy the files to another folder.

To transfer files from the receiver to the controller:

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Receiver files / Import from receiver.

The list that appears shows all files stored in the receiver.

2. Tap the file(s) to transfer. A check mark appears next to the selected files.

Note - To see more information about a file, highlight the file name and tap Info. To delete a file, highlight the file name and tap Delete. To select all files within the current directory, tap All.

3. Tap Import. The Copy file to Trimble Controller screen appears.

4. Tap Start.

To transfer files from the controller to the receiver:

390

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Receiver files / Export to receiver.

The list that appears shows all files in the current project folder on the controller.

2. Tap the file(s) to transfer. A check mark appears next to the selected files.

2. Tap Export.

3. Tap Start.

Position

If the controller is connected to a GNSS / GPS receiver, or you are using a controller with internal GPS, you can view your current position.

Tap Store to store the current position in the job database.

Note - When using a controller with internal GPS, a connected GNSS receiver is always used in preference to the internal GPS.

A projection and datum transformation must be defined to view grid coordinates.

If the antenna height is defined, the software calculates the position of the pole tip. To also view the position of the base antenna, tap Base.

Tap Options to find out if the position is shown as WGS-84, local, or grid.

Receiver Status

To view the power and memory status of the connected GNSS receiver, the GPS time, and the GPS week, select Instrument / Receiver status from the main menu.

GSM Status

The GSM status is available only with Receiver Internal modems.

To view the GSM signal strength and available network operators when using the Trimble Internal GSM module, select Instrument / GSM Status from the Instrument menu.

The GSM status screen shows the status reported by the modem at the time you select GSM status, or when you tap Refresh.

If you set a PIN on the SIM card and the modem is in a locked state, you must key in the SIM PIN to be sent to the modem. The PIN is not stored, but the receiver remains unlocked with the correct PIN until you turn off the power and then turn it on again.

Note - After three attempts to unlock the SIM card using an incorrect PIN, the SIM card is blocked, except for emergency calls. You are prompted to enter a PUK (Personal Unblocking Key) code. If you do not know the PUK for your modem, contact the supplier of the modem SIM card. After ten unsuccessful attempts to enter the PUK, the SIM card is invalidated and is no longer operable. When this occurs, you must replace the

391

card.

Network operator shows the current network operator. The home network icon shows that the current network operator is the home network for the active SIM card. The roaming network icon shows that the current network operator is not the home network.

Select network shows a list of network operators obtained from the mobile network.

When you enter the GSM status menu or when you tap Refresh, the modem queries the mobile network for the list of network operators. Poor reception can result in fewer networks being returned by the network when the modem queries it for the list.

Some SIM cards are locked to specific networks. If you select a network operator that is forbidden by the host network, the system shows one of the following messages: Failed to select network operator or Network not allowed - emergency calls only.

Select Automatic to put the modem into 'automatic' network selection mode. The modem then searches for all network operators and tries to connect to the most appropriate network operator, which may or may not be the home network.

If you select any other network operator from Select network, the modem goes into 'manual' selection mode and tries to connect with the selected network operator.

If you select GSM status or tap Refresh while in 'manual' mode, the modem searches only for the last manually-selected network operator.

For a list of network operators that you can connect to, contact your subscribed network operator.

Signal strength shows the GSM signal strength.

Firmware version shows the modem firmware version.

Note - The GSM status is not available when the Receiver Internal modem is connected to the Internet.

Receiver Settings

To view the configuration of the connected GNSS receiver, select Receiver settings from the main menu.

Alternatively, tap and hold briefly on the receiver icon in the status bar and then release to enter Receiver settings.

eBubble options

If your receiver has inbuilt tilt sensors an eBubble (electronic bubble) is available.

•

To configure the eBubble tap eBubble.

•

To calibrate the eBubble tap eBubble and then

Calib.

•

To display the eBubble, tap eBubble and then

For more information, see Radios.

Wi-Fi

392

You can use the Trimble Access software to configure the Wi-Fi settings in a receiver that is Wi-Fi enabled.

To do this:

1. Select Instruments / Receiver settings and tap Wi-Fi .

Note - The Wi-Fi softkey is only displayed when the receiver is connected but not running a survey.

2. Select the Mode. Three modes are supported:

♦

Off

♦

Access point: Use this mode to enable the receiver as an access point so that many clients can

♦ connect to it.

Client: Use this mode to enable the receiver to connect to an existing network.

Notes

♦

The mode will only be updated in the receiver after the receiver has been restarted.

♦

Longer battery life can be achieved by setting the Mode to Off.

3. Configure the settings as required. Refer to the receiver manual for further details.

Tip - Use the arrow buttons to change the display order of the networks.

Note - Client mode supports WPA and WPA2 encryption settings. Access point mode supports Off,

WEP64 and WEP128 encryption settings.

eBubble options

If your receiver has inbuilt tilt sensors an eBubble (electronic bubble) is available. To configure the eBubble tap Instrument / eBubble options from the main menu. You can configure the following settings:

Option Description eBubble sensitivity

Tilt tolerance

The bubble moves 2mm for the specified sensitivity angle. To decrease sensitivity select a large angle.

Defines the maximum radius that the receiver can tilt and be considered in tolerance.

The allowable range is 0.001m to 1.000m.

Tilt calibration status Current tilt sensor calibration status.

Calibration expires in The date of the last calibration.

Calibration age limit eBubble response

Displays the time period between calibrations. At the end of the time period the software will prompt you to recalibrate the eBubble. To edit the default value tap the pop-up arrow.

Controls the eBubble's responsiveness to movement.

Tip - You can also access the eBubble options screen if you tap and hold on the receiver icon in the status bar and then select the eBubble softkey from the Receiver settings screen.

393

eBubble Calibration

To calibrate the eBubble tap the Calib softkey, level the instrument with the calibrated reference and brace against movement. Tap OK.

Warning - If you tap Cancel before the calibration is complete the previous calibration is lost and the eBubble will not be calibrated.

Notes

•

The receiver does not need to be tracking satellites to calibrate the eBubble. However, because the calibration time is stored in the receiver, it is important that the controller has the correct time and

• timezone.

The details of the calibration including the Tilt calibration status is stored in the job and can be reviewed from Jobs / Review job.

A well-calibrated eBubble is of vital importance. The accuracy of tilt information used to display the eBubble, and stored with measured points, is totally dependent on the calibration of the tilt sensors inside the

GNSS receiver. Using a poorly-calibrated eBubble will directly degrade the accuracy of the coordinates measured using the eBubble as a level reference. Great care should be taken when you are calibrating the eBubble to ensure the most accurate tilt information is available at all times.

Bubble reference: Calibrate the eBubble against a properly calibrated physical bubble. The accuracy of the eBubble depends totally on the accuracy of the physical bubble used to calibrate it.

Pole stability: When calibrating the eBubble, the pole the GNSS receiver is on should be as vertical and as stable as possible. In practice this means using at least a bipod to hold the pole as still as possible.

Pole straightness: A bent pole will affect the tilt measured by the sensors in the GNSS receiver. If you calibrate the eBubble using a bent pole and then change poles, the accuracy of points will be affected. Also, if you calibrate using a straight pole and then change to a bent pole, the GNSS will not be plumb even though the eBubble will say it is, again affecting the accuracy of the measured points.

Environment: When a tilt calibration is performed, it aligns the eBubble with local gravity. If you calibrate the eBubble and then move the system to an area with significantly different local gravity conditions, you must recalibrate the eBubble.

Temperature: The tilt sensors are affected by the temperature of the unit. The GNSS receiver will expire the calibration if the current temperature inside the receiver is more than 30 degrees Celsius different to when the current calibration was performed. This forces you to recalibrate the eBubble.

Abuse: If the GNSSS receiver suffers severe abuse such as a pole drop, you should recalibrate the eBubble.

See the receiver manual for further information.

eBubble display

394

To display the eBubble, tap the eBubble softkey.

Bubble color

Green

Red

Meaning

You are within the defined tilt tolerance.

You are outside the defined tilt tolerance.

Note - If the eBubble is red, you can still choose to store the position. To do this, tap .

Tips

•

To move the eBubble window to a new position on the screen, tap and hold on the eBubble and drag

• to a new position.

Press CTRL + L to show or hide the eBubble from any screen.

Navigate to Point

If the controller is connected to a GNSS / GPS receiver, or you are using a controller with internal GPS, you can navigate to a point.

Caution - To ensure that internal GPS is available on a TSC3 or Trimble Slate Controller, the GPS format must be set to NMEA. If set to SiRF Binary, you cannot use the internal GPS. To set the format press the

Windows button to access the [Start] menu and then tap [SatViewer]. In the [GPS] tab, make sure that the

NMEA option is selected.

Note - No configuration is required for the Tablet or Trimble GeoXR controllers.

Using GNSS / GPS, you can navigate to a point without using an RTK radio link, or without a survey running.

When you start the Navigate to point function, it uses the settings in the last GNSS survey style that you used.

If you are using a GNSS receiver that can track WAAS/EGNOS signals, when the radio link is down you can use WAAS/EGNOS positions instead of autonomous positions. To use WAAS/EGNOS positions, set the

Satellite differential field in the survey style to SBAS.

If you are running a conventional survey, you can navigate to a point. During the conventional survey, if the controller is connected to a GNSS / GPS receiver, or you are using a controller with internal GPS, you can continue navigating to a point if you lose lock. Tap the Use GPS button and then navigate to the point.

Note - When using a controller with internal GPS, a connected GNSS receiver is always used in preference to the internal GPS.

To navigate to a point:

395

1. From the map, select the point you want to navigate to.

2. Tap and hold on the map and then select Navigate to point from the shortcut menu. Alternatively, select Instrument / Navigate to point from the main menu.

3. If you want to display cross-track information, set the Navigate field to From fixed point or From start position.

4. Fill in the other fields as required and then tap Start. The graphical display screen appears.

5. Use the arrow to navigate to the point, which is shown as a cross. When you are close to the point, the arrow disappears and a bull's-eye symbol appears.

6. When you are on the point, the bull's-eye symbol covers the cross.

7. Mark the point if required.

Tips

•

Tap Position and then Store to store a point.

•

If navigating with a TSC3 or Trimble Slate Controller, you can use the internal compass to aid navigation. See

Compass

for further details.

Network / Reference Station Status

When you perform a real-time survey and the reference station or network server that you receive base station data from supports status messaging, the Network/Reference Station Status menu option appears. The screen for this menu option shows the reported status of the reference station server, the options the reference station supports (such as RTK on Demand), and also enables you to configure notification and storage of the status messages in the current job.

If you select the Popup new Reference Station messages check box, messages from the reference station or network server pop up on the screen.

If you select the Store Reference Station messages check box, messages from the reference station or network server are stored in the current job database.

GNSS Instrument Functions

To access the GNSS functions screen, do one of the following:

• tap the instrument icon on the controller screen

• select Instrument / GNSS functions from the General Survey main menu

• press and hold the Trimble key

The GNSS functions screen is available for GNSS receivers. Use it to control commonly-used GNSS receiver functions. In Bluetooth Settings, you can configure the base and rover receivers seperately and then use GNSS

functions to switch between them. This makes it very easy to connect to and control your base or rover receiver.

The following buttons are available in GNSS functions:

396

•

•

•

•

•

Start survey

•

End survey

•

Power down Receiver

•

•

•

•

•

If the button is not available to select, the function is not applicable to the current mode, or there is no receiver connected for the currently-selected mode.

The Base mode and Rover mode buttons within GNSS functions have different states. If the button is highlighted in yellow, the mode is enabled.

Base mode

When Base mode is enabled, auto-connect will attempt to connect to the Trimble GNSS receiver configured in the Connect to GNSS base field in the Bluetooth settings screen.

If there is no receiver configured there, it will try to connect to a Trimble GNSS receiver on the controller's serial port.

The receiver found on the serial port will be treated as the base receiver when the software is in Base mode.

In Base mode the Start survey and End survey buttons in GNSS functions start or end a base survey using the

Survey Style that you selected when you tapped either of those buttons.

The auto-connect icon shows if the software is in Base mode.

Rover mode

When Rover Mode is enabled, auto-connect will attempt to connect to the Trimble GNSS receiver configured in the Connect to GNSS rover field in the Bluetooth settings screen.

If there is no receiver configured there, it will try to connect to a Trimble GNSS receiver on the controller's serial port.

The receiver found on the serial port will be treated as the rover receiver when the software is in Rover mode.

In Rover mode the Start survey and End survey buttons in GNSS functions start or end a rover survey using the

Survey Style that you selected when you tapped either of those buttons.

The auto-connect icon shows if the software is in Rover mode.

Radios

When the instrument is in Rover mode, tap the Radio button to go to the Rover radio settings screen.

When the instrument is in Base mode, tap the Radio button to go to the Base radio settings screen.

In this screen, when a survey is not running, you can select the type of RTK radio you are using and then tap

Connect (if it is available) to connect to the radio. You can then review and set the radio frequency, baud rate, and other settings if they are available to change in the radio device that the instrument is connected to.

397

You cannot edit Survey Style settings in this screen. If you start a survey with a different type of radio set in the Survey Style, the system uses that radio - not the radio that you set in GNSS functions.

If there is an RTK survey running, the radio screen shows the radio currently in use, and you may not be able to connect to an external radio.

Station Setup Details

To view the instrument type and current station setup information when the controller is connected to a conventional instrument, select Instrument / Station setup details from the main menu.

Alternatively, if you are using a mechanical instrument (not a servo or robotic instrument), tap the Instrument icon on the status bar.

Laser Pointer

In a Direct Reflex survey, the laser pointer eliminates the need to look through the telescope when measuring

DR points.

Note - When using a 5600 DR200+ instrument, the laser pointer is not coaxial with the telescope.

To turn on the laser:

1. To open the Trimble Functions screen, tap the Instrument icon in the status bar, or tap the Trimble key

(if available) on the controller.

2. Tap the Laser pointer button.

Note - If DR is not yet enabled, turning on the laser pointer enables it. If you turn off the laser pointer, the instrument remains in DR mode. However, if you turn off DR mode, the laser is automatically turned off.

To automatically measure to the laser pointer with a non-coaxial 5600 DR200+ or DR300+, configure the

Laser alignment setting in Instrument / EDM Settings. For more information, see the section on

Laser alignment

in Direct Reflex.

3R High Power Laser Pointer

The Trimble S8 total station can be equipped with a 3R high power laser pointer.

Notes

•

Even though the high-power laser pointer is not coaxial with the telescope, the instrument can automatically turn to measure to the laser pointer location. When you take a distance measurement and the 3R high-power laser pointer is on, a preliminary measurement is taken to determine the vertical angle to turn the instrument so that the distance is measured to where the high-power laser pointer is pointing. The instrument automatically turns to that location and takes the measurement.

398

The instrument then turns so that the high-power laser again points to the measured position. The

• preliminary measurement is not stored. This function does not occur during continuous topo.

The calculation of the vertical angle to turn to assumes the horizontal distance to the preliminary measurement is similar to the distance to the high power laser pointer location.

To measure to the high power laser point when it is near the upper or lower edge of an object, consider using face 1 to take measurements at the lower edge of an object, and face 2 to take measurements at the upper edge of an object so that the preliminary measurement does not overshoot

• the object you are measuring to.

When using a Trimble S8 total station with the high power laser pointer in tunnel set out, after setting out the point, tap 3R Laser to enable the high power laser pointer and reposition the instrument to indicate the mark on the tunnel surface.

WARNING - The high power laser is a class 3R laser that emits laser radiation - do not stare into the beam or view directly with optical instruments.

To enable or disable the 3R high power laser pointer:

1. To open the Instrument functions screen, tap the Instrument icon in the status bar.

If the controller is connected to a Trimble S8 total station equipped with the high power laser pointer option, the second button on the first row in Instrument functions shows a 3R high power laser pointer icon.

If the button shows a Tracklight, Video, or LR FineLock icon, the controller is not connected to a

Trimble S8 total station with the high power laser pointer.

2. Do one of the following:

♦

If Instrument functions shows 3R HP Laser On, the high power laser pointer is off. Tap the

♦ button to enable the high power laser pointer.

If Instrument functions shows 3R HP Laser Off, the high power laser pointer is already enabled. Tap the button to disable the high power laser pointer.

Electronic Level

The electronic level is available when connected to Trimble instruments.

To level a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station electronically from startup:

1. Plumb the instrument.

2. Use the tripod legs and the tribrach bubble to roughly level the instrument.

3. Establish a connection between the controller and the instrument. The Electronic level screen appears as part of the connection process.

If the instrument is not level enough, you will get a tilt error. Roughly level the instrument with the tribrach circular bubble to bring the electronic level into range.

4. Turn the foot screws to center the bubbles for the sighting and trunnion axis.

399

5. To complete the leveling process, tap Accept.

To level a Trimble M3 total station electronically from startup:

1. Plumb the instrument.

2. Use the tripod legs and the tribrach bubble to roughly level the instrument.

3. The Electronic level screen appears as part of the instrument start up process.

4. Turn the footscrews to center the bubbles for the sighting and trunnion axis.

5. To complete the leveling process, tap Accept.

The instrument initializes the compensator (unless the Disable compensator check box is selected).

To level a Trimble 5600 instrument electronically from startup:

1. Plumb the instrument.

2. Use the tripod legs and the tribrach bubble to roughly level the instrument.

3. Establish a connection between the controller and the instrument. The Electronic level screen appears as part of the connection process.

4. Turn the foot screws to center the bubbles for the sighting and trunnion axis.

5. To complete the leveling process, tap Accept.

The instrument initializes the compensator (unless the Disable compensator check box is selected).

When General Survey connects to a Trimble 5600 instrument, the compensator is not reinitialized if it was initialized within the last 2 hours and if the instrument level has not changed by more than 30 seconds.

To level an instrument electronically during a survey:

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Electronic level.

2. Turn the foot screws to center the bubbles for the sighting and trunnion axis.

For the Trimble 3600 instrument only, the laser plummet is also activated while the Electronic level screen is open.

On the Trimble M3 total station, the laser plummet is also activated while the Electronic level screen is open.

Warning - If accuracy is important, do not disable the compensator. If you do disable the compensator, horizontal and vertical angles in the instrument are not corrected for mis-levelment errors.

EDM settings

When connected to an instrument with Direct Reflex (DR), select Instrument / EDM settings to configure the

DR settings.

Tip- For fast access to configure the EDM settings, tap the instrument icon in the status bar and then tap and hold on the DR icon.

400

The following settings are available if supported by the instrument:

•

To enable or disable direct reflex measurement, select Direct Reflex.

•

To enable or disable the laser, select Laser Pointer.

•

To enable or disable the high power laser pointer when using a Trimble S8 total station with the High

•

power laser pointer option, select 3R HP Laser Pointer.

To take a measurement to where the laser is pointing, set the Laser alignment to Horizontal or

•

Vertical (depending on the surface you are measuring to). For more information see, Laser alignment.

To accept measurements at a lower accuracy (that is, below the normal instrument specification),

• enable weak signal.

To define the acceptable accuracy of a measurement, enter a DR standard deviation and Prism

standard deviation value. When measuring to diffuse targets the standard deviation is displayed on the status line until the standard deviation satisfies the defined value. Once the standard deviation is satisfied, the measurement is accepted. To accept the measurement before the standard deviation is

• satisfied, tap Enter while the standard deviation is displayed on the status line.

Enter a suitable DR minimum and maximum distance for your survey. Increasing the maximum distance will increase the time that it takes for a measurement to complete, even if the distance being measured is less than the specified maximum. The default maximum distance provides a balance between measurement time and range. Increase the maximum distance if you are working at longer ranges. To restrict the DR measurement range, enter a minimum and maximum distance to avoid a

• result from a distant or intermittent object.

To enable or disable long range mode, select Long range.

•

To enable or disable 10Hz tracking select 10Hz tracking.

When using DR with a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, Trimble M3 total station,

5600, or 3600 instrument, Target DR is dedicated for DR use. You must configure the prism constant and target height appropriately.

When you turn on DR, the software automatically switches to Target DR.

When you turn off DR, the software returns to the last used non-DR target. If the last used target has been deleted, the software uses Target 1.

Alternatively, select Target DR to enable DR. Select Target 1 to disable DR and return the instrument to its previous state.

The software supports up to six preconfigured targets, but only one DR target. For more information see,

Target details.

Laser alignment

The laser pointer on a Trimble 5600 DR 200+ or DR 300+ instrument is not coaxial with the EDM. As a result, the location where the DR measurement is observed will not correspond to the location of the laser dot.

To configure the software to measure to the laser dot, do the following:

1. Enable the laser pointer.

2. Select a laser alignment:

•

None – DR measurement is observed below the laser dot.

401

•

Horizontal – DR measurement is observed at the location of the laser dot provided that the

• measurement is on a horizontal surface.

Vertical – DR measurement is observed at the location of the laser dot provided that the measurement is on a vertical surface.

The instrument will turn to the location of the laser dot and perform the measurement. Once the observation is completed, the instrument will turn the laser dot back to the observed point.

Long range (Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station and 5600 DR Standard, and 3600 only)

Use the long range mode when a strong instrument signal is required for measuring to targets more than one kilometer (about 0.6 miles) away.

Note - This feature is not available with the Trimble M3 total station and Trimble S3 total station.

10Hz Tracking

Use 10Hz tracking when a faster update rate is required when using the TRK measuring method.

Notes

•

Available for an Trimble S8 total station only.

•

This option is only available if you are in both Autolock and Tracking mode. If you select DR or turn

•

Autolock off when tracking, the software will default to normal tracking mode.

Although tracking is faster the precisions will be null for the stored point.

For more information, see:

Scanning

Surface Scan

Remote Object

Turn to

If using a servo or robotic instrument, you can use the Turn to options to control how the instrument moves.

To do this:

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Turn to. Alternatively, tap the Instrument icon on the status bar and then tap the Turn to button on the Instrument functions screen.

2. Select an instrument control method to turn the instrument to a specified angle or point:

♦ to a horizontal or vertical angle only, enter the angle in the Turn to field.

402

♦ to a horizontal and vertical angle, enter the horizontal angle in the Turn to HA field, and the

♦ vertical angle in the Turn to VA field.

to a specified point, enter a point name in the Point name field.

♦ by distance, enter the distance from your current position to the point where the instrument lost lock.

3. Tap Turn. The instrument turns to the angle(s) or point you entered.

To turn the instrument horizontally 90° to the right or left, or 180° use the appropriate softkey at the bottom of the screen.

To make the instrument locate and lock on to the target, tap Search.

The message "Searching..." appears and the instrument starts searching for the target.

For information on other methods, see:

•

Joystick

•

Robotic instrument

•

Map

Joystick

If you are operating a robotic instrument at the remote end (target), use the Joystick softkey to turn the instrument towards the target when lock has been lost.

To turn the instrument towards the target:

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Joystick. Alternatively, tap the Instrument icon on the status bar and then tap Joystick button on the Instrument functions screen.

2. Tap an arrow on the screen or press the up, down, left, or right arrow keys to turn the instrument. The instrument turns in the direction indicated by the solid/filled arrow.

Note - When the instrument is on Face 2, the up and down arrows are reversed. For example, if you press down the instrument turns upwards. If you press up it turns downwards.

3. When using a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, turn the instrument as shown in the following table.

Tap and hold this arrow to turn the instrument

or horizontally (left or right)

or vertically (up or down)

, , , or horizontally and vertically

Notes

403

♦

To stop the instrument turning, release the arrow.

♦

To change the direction tap the change direction button ( , ).

◊

When the instrument icon is to the left of the prism icon, the instrument turns as if

◊ you are standing behind the instrument.

When the instrument icon is to the right of the prism icon, the instrument turns as if you are standing at the pole.

♦

To increase or decrease the turning speed, tap the left (decrease) or right (increase) speed arrows.

4. When using a Trimble 5600, turn the instrument as shown in the following table.

Tap this arrow to turn the instrument first left or right horizontally 12

0 second left or right horizontally 120

0 first up or down vertically 1

0 second up or down vertically 5

Tap Esc or another arrow to stop the instrument from turning. The directional arrow becomes hollow.

The instrument now points towards the target.

5. When using a Leica TPS1100 series instrument, select the same direction to increase the instrument turning speed. The second directional arrow becomes solid. Select the same arrow again to decrease the speed.

Tap Esc or another arrow to stop the instrument from turning. The directional arrow becomes hollow.

The instrument now points towards the target.

To make the instrument locate and lock on to the target, tap Search.

The message "Searching..." appears and the instrument starts searching for the target.

When GPS Search is ready, a

softkey is available. To perform a GPS-aided search, tap .

The search results appear in the status line as messages:

•

Target Locked - indicates that the target has been located and tracking locked.

•

No Target - indicates that the target was not located.

For information on other methods, see:

•

Turn to

•

Robotic instrument

•

Map

404

Video

Instruments with Trimble VISION technology are equipped with a built-in camera. This enables you to:

•

See the telescope's field of view on the controller screen, eliminating the need to look through the

• telescope

Control the instrument movement by Tap-and-move

•

Capture images

•

View features from multiple sources in 3D, overlaid on the video screen

•

Measure with DR more easily

•

Verify that all required measurements have been taken

•

Document important visual information, for example site conditions

The camera is not coaxial with the telescope. Therefore:

•

The General Survey software corrects for this offset when a distance is received from the instrument.

•

When there is no distance returned from the instrument (for example, in Standard mode, or in

Tracking mode with no target), there could be a vertical offset of up to 38 mm between the crosshair shown on the video screen and the crosshair viewed through the telescope. This offset is most noticeable at close range. The General Survey software uses the last measured distance to calculate the offset correction. If no measurement has been taken, a distance of infinity is assumed.

When connected to an instrument with a camera, do one of the following to access the video screen:

•

From the main menu, tap Instrument / Video.

•

Tap the Instrument functions icon and then tap Video in the Instrument functions screen.

Notes

•

The video option is available only when connected to an instrument with Trimble VISION

• technology.

Video is not available when the General Survey software is connected through a serial cable

• connection.

Video is not available when the General Survey software is connected through Bluetooth wireless

• technology.

Video is not available when the scanning form is open. If you open the scanning form while the video

• form is open, the video form automatically closes.

Because of the resolution of the video image, there may be a difference of up to one pixel between the crosshair in the video image and the crosshair viewed through the telescope. This difference can be

• seen with all overlaid data.

Snapshots taken between 3°36' (4 gon) and the zenith will not be directly matched to the point data in the RealWorks Survey software.

For more details, see:

•

Data Overlay

•

Tap-and-Move

405

•

Capturing images

•

Video softkeys

•

White balance

Data Overlay

Features from the job are overlaid onto the video image to show a graphical representation of features in 3D.

Overlaid features can come from multiple sources:

• points, lines, and arcs from the current job database

•

points from linked jobs, linked CSV files, and from map files

(for example, DXF and SHP files)

• coded features from feature libraries

Notes

•

Features can be displayed only if they are defined in 3D. This requires that a full 3D station setup has

• been completed, with a station elevation and instrument height defined.

Features displayed in the video screen cannot be selected.

•

Only grid coordinates are displayed. If you have not defined a projection, only points stored as grid

• coordinates appear.

If there is a point with the same name as another point in the database, the point with the higher search class is displayed. For more information about how the General Survey software uses search

classes, see Database search rules.

Tap-and-Move

Tap-and-move allows you to control the instrument. Tap in the video screen to turn the instrument to that location.

Notes

•

When you are working in the video screen, the up, down, left, and right arrow keys are in

Joystick

• mode and can be used to turn the instrument.

Tap-and-move is affected by the offset from the non-coaxial camera.

Capturing images

You can capture the image displayed in the video frame of the scanning window.

•

Captured images are stored as JPEG files in the current project folder.

•

Captured images can be viewed in Review job.

•

Image options are controlled by

photo properties.

Images can be automatically captured when a measurement from the video window is taken. Review job overlays the measured point onto the associated video image, along with information about the target height.

This data is not stored in the JPEG file.

406

To easily attach images from an instrument to a point using the attribute field, see Using instruments with

Trimble VISION technology to capture images.

Tip - Use the

Panorama function to automatically capture multiple images for a defined scan frame.

To ensure that images can be correctly matched to point data in the RealWorks Survey software, always complete a station setup before you capture any images. Otherwise, there is no orientation information stored with the image.

Note - If tracking is turned on and the instrument is locked to a prism, do not move the prism while the image is being captured. Otherwise, you could capture the wrong image, and the wrong orientation information will be stored with that image.

To transfer JPEG files from the Trimble CU in the docking station to the office computer, use the

USB-to-Hirose cable.

You cannot use the DB9-to-Hirose serial cable to transfer JPEG files.

Video softkeys

Use the video softkeys to:

• zoom in and out

• capture images

• view and control the brightness and contrast

• view and control photo properties and snap shot options

• change the display options

The softkey functions are as follows.

Softkey Function

Zoom in. There are four levels of zoom available in the video window.

Zoom out. There are four levels of zoom available in the video window.

Captures an extra large (XL) image (2048x1536). XL is available only when zoomed to extents 1:1.

Captures a large (L) image (1024x768). L is available only when zoomed out to extents 1:1 and 2:1.

Captures a medium (M) image (512x384). M is not available when zoomed in to 4:1.

Captures a small (S) image (256x192). S is available regardless of the zoom level.

Controls the brightness of the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Controls the contrast of the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

Controls the level of white balance in the video image on the controller screen and consequent captured images.

White balance

There are three settings of white balance available. Select the white balance setting most suitable to the lighting conditions at your setup:

407

White Balance setting

Daylight

Use...

outdoors, in bright settings

Incandescent

Fluorescent under artificial light under fluorescent lighting

Click the up arrow to access more softkey functions. The additional functions are as follows.

Filter

Options

Set the file name. File names are automatically incremented from the start file name.

Set the image size. The image captured is always the same as the video display on screen.

Not all image sizes are available at all zoom levels.

Set the compression of the image. The higher the quality of the image, the larger the file size of the captured image.

Shows a legend for the feature symbols and lets you choose which features are displayed.

Display labels controls how name or code labels appear next to points in the map.

Display elevations controls the option to display elevations in the video screen.

Enable Auto measure to automatically start a measurement when you press the measure key.

Enable Snapshot on measure to automatically capture a snapshot after a measurement is taken from the video screen.

Enable Autostore snapshot to automatically store captured images.

Tracklight

Operate the Tracklight as follows.

To set the speed of the guide-light:

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Tracklight.

2. Select the Enable tracklight check box.

3. From the drop down list in the Speed field, select:

♦

Slow, Fast, or Auto for a Trimble S Series total station

♦

Slow, Medium, or Fast for a Trimble M3 total station

Tip - When Auto is selected, the Tracklight flashes fast when the target is locked and slow if there is no target.

To switch on the tracklight or switch it off:

1. Tap the Instrument icon on the status bar.

2. Tap Tracklight in the Instrument functions screen.

Note - The Tracklight is not available when connected an instrument equipped with a camera, a high power laser pointer or long range FineLock technology.

When connected to a Trimble 3600 or 5600 instrument, operate the Tracklight as follows.

408

To set the intensity of the guide-light:

1. From the main menu, select Instrument / Tracklight.

2. Select the Enable tracklight check box.

3. From the drop down list in the Intensity field, select Normal or High.

To switch on the tracklight or switch it off:

1. Tap the Instrument icon on the status bar.

2. Tap Tracklight in the Instrument functions screen.

Tip - For fast access to configure the Tracklight, tap the instrument icon in the status bar or press the Trimble key, and tap and hold on the Tracklight icon.

Note - When EDM power save is enabled on a Trimble 5600 DR Standard instrument, the Tracklight is not available.

Autolock, FineLock, and Long Range FineLock Technology

If Autolock is available on the instrument, use it to lock on to and track a remote target.

FineLock and Long Range FineLock technology provide better performance when measuring to static targets when there are two prisms close together. You can use FineLock and Long Range FineLock technology to lock to a target, but not to track or search for a target.

With a Trimble S8 total station with FineLock technology, you can use FineLock mode when measuring to a

prism that is 20 m - 700 m away.

To measure to a prism that is 5 m to 60 m away, enable

Using FineLock lens aperture

and then fit the lens aperture accessory to the instrument.

With a Trimble S8 total station with Long Range FineLock technology, you can use

Long Range FineLock

mode when measuring to a prism that is 250 m - 2500 m away.

Note - The separation between targets should not be less than 13' 45" (4 mrad).

When using a Trimble S8 total station with FineLock technology, you can configure the Autolock button in

Instrument functions to enable and disable Autolock, or to enable and disable FineLock technology.

To enable or disable Autolock:

1. To open the Instrument functions screen, tap the Instrument icon in the status bar.

2. You can configure the second button on the third row in Instrument functions to be either an Autolock or a FineLock button.

♦

If the button shows FineLock, it is configured as a FineLock button. To change it to

Autolock, tap and hold briefly on the button. Once you release the button, the Target controls

♦ dialog appears. Set the Target lock to Autolock and then tap Accept.

If the button shows Autolock, it is already configured as an Autolock button.

409

3. Do one of the following:

♦

If the button is not highlighted yellow, tap Autolock to enable Autolock.

♦

If the button is highlighted yellow, tap Autolock to disable Autolock.

A search is automatically performed if a measurement is initiated when Autolock is enabled but the instrument is not locked to the target.

When GPS Search is ready, a GPS-aided search is performed instead of a standard search.

To perform a standard search, pause GPS Search, or select Search available from the Joystick screen.

Select Interrupted target measurement

and then enter an Interrupt timeout value if the measurement is likely to be interrupted, for example, when measuring in traffic.

Tip- For fast access to configure the Autolock and search settings, tap the instrument icon in the status bar or press the Trimble key, and tap and hold on the Search icon.

Note - Do not use Autolock during the collimation or Trunnion axis tilt tests. For more information, see

Instrument Adjustment.

Snap to target, Autosearch, and Predictive tracking time provide additional Autolock controls, they are not available with FineLock or Long Range FineLock technology.

Snap to target

This function was previously called Advanced lock.

Snap to target automatically locks on to a remote target if one is detected.

If you do not want to automatically lock onto a target, set the Autolock method to Snap disabled.

Note - Snap to target does not check the Target ID.

Autosearch

Select Autosearch to automatically perform a horizontal search when lock is lost to a remote target.

LaserLock

Select LaserLock to enable the laser pointer to aide finding prisms, especially in dark environments, and then automatically enable Autolock to measure to the prism.

Predictive Tracking Time

This feature enables you to pass behind a temporary obstruction and have the instrument continue to turn, based upon the target's horizontal trajectory, when lock to the prism is lost.

If the trajectory is consistent and the prism re-appears from behind the obstruction within the defined time interval, the instrument will be aimed directly at the prism and lock is automatically regained.

410

After the specified time interval, the General Survey software reports that the target is lost and then takes corrective actions based on the current settings.

The instrument turns to where the target was last seen and then acts as follows:

If Autosearch is ...

On and Snap to target is ENABLED, the instrument …

Locks on to any target in the field of view.

If there is no target, a search starts based on your search window settings.

Off

Locks on to any target in the field of view or waits until a target comes into the field of view and then locks onto it.

and Snap to target is DISABLED, the instrument …

Ignores any visible targets and starts a search based on your search window settings

Ignores any targets in the field of view and does not start any search until you prompt it to do so.

Note - The General Survey software defaults are Snap to target ENABLED and Autosearch OFF.

You can configure the Predictive tracking time as follows:

♦

For standard robotic usage, Trimble recommends the default setting (1s).

This enables you to pass behind anything small blocking the line of sight between the instrument and the target (for example, trees, electrical posts, or vehicles) and then automatically regain lock.

♦

In environments with a number of reflective objects, you could set the predictive tracking time to 0s. For optimal performance, use this setting with Snap to target DISABLED.

With these settings, you are immediately informed if the line of sight to the correct target is obstructed. You can then ensure that you regain lock to the correct target.

♦

In environments where your target may be blocked for a few seconds at a time, you can use settings of 2s or 3s.

This enables you to pass behind larger objects blocking the line of sight between the instrument and the target (for example, small buildings) and then automatically regain lock.

If the instrument fails to regain lock onto the moving target, it returns to the location where it first lost lock and the predictive tracking began.

To change the Predictive tracking time:

1. Do one of the following:

◊

From the main menu, select Instrument / Target controls.

◊

From the Instrument functions form, tap and hold briefly on the Autolock or Search icon. When you release, the Target controls dialog appears.

2. Select the required time from the Predictive tracking time list.

To enable or disable FineLock technology:

1. To open the Instrument functions screen, tap the Instrument icon in the status bar.

411

2. You can configure the second button on the third row in Instrument functions to be either an Autolock or a FineLock button.

♦

If the button shows Autolock, it is configured as an Autolock button. To change it to

FineLock, tap and hold briefly on the button. Once you release the button, the Target controls

♦ dialog appears. Set the Target lock to FineLock and then tap Accept.

If the button shows FineLock, it is already configured as a FineLock button.

3. Do one of the following:

♦

If the button is not highlighted yellow, tap FineLock to enable FineLock.

♦

If the button is highlighted yellow, tap FineLock to disable FineLock.

To use the FineLock lens aperture:

Caution - When measuring less than 20 m, you must enable Using FineLock lens aperture and then fit the lens aperture accessory to the instrument.

1. Use the instructions above to configure FineLock technology.

2. Open the Instrument functions screen and then tap and hold briefly on the FineLock button. When you release it, the Target controls dialog appears. Enable the Using FineLock lens aperture check box and then tap Accept.

3. Fit the FineLock lens aperture accessory to the instrument.

You can now perform FineLock measurements to prisms less than 20 m away.

Note - The FineLock lens aperture accessory should only be used on Trimble S8 total station with firmware version R12.2 or later.

To enable/disable Long Range FineLock technology:

1. To open the Instrument functions screen, tap the Instrument icon in the status bar.

If the controller is connected to a Trimble S8 total station equipped with Long Range FineLock technology, the second button on the first row in Instrument functions is the Long Range FineLock button.

If the button shows a Tracklight, Video, or High Power Laser Pointer icon, the controller is not connected to a Trimble S8 total station equipped with Long Range FineLock technology.

2. Do one of the following:

♦

If the LR FineLock button is not highlighted yellow, tap LR FineLock to enable long range

♦

FineLock.

If the LR FineLock button is highlighted yellow, tap LR FineLock to disable long range

FineLock.

Notes on FineLock and Long Range FineLock

•

FineLock technology is available only on a Trimble S8 total station equipped with FineLock

• technology.

Long Range FineLock technology is available only on a Trimble S8 total station equipped with Long

Range FineLock technology.

The Long Range FineLock hardware is not coaxial with the telescope.

412

To eliminate the vertical errors associated with non-coaxial Long Range FineLock hardware,

• you must observe all observations to points on both face 1 and face 2.

You can use FineLock technology only to prisms 20 m - 700 m away.

♦

If you use FineLock technology and you measure a distance of less than 20 m, General

Survey detects that FineLock should not be used, the measurement fails, and the message

Target too close for FineLock appears. You must disable FineLock technology when

♦ measuring less than 20 m.

If you use FineLock technology to a target less than 20 m away, and a distance is not measured, General Survey uses FineLock technology because it cannot detect that it should

♦ not be used.

Measurements taken with FineLock technology under 20 m are unreliable - do not use them.

•

You can use Long Range FineLock technology only to prisms 250 m - 2500 m away.

♦

If you use Long Range FineLock technology to measure a distance of less than 250 m,

General Survey detects that Long Range FineLock technology should not be used, the measurement fails, and the message Target too close for Long Range FineLock appears. Use

♦

FineLock technology when measuring less than 250 m.

If you use Long Range FineLock technology to a target less than 250 m away, and a distance is not measured, General Survey uses Long Range FineLock technology because it cannot

♦ detect that it should not be used.

Measurements taken with Long Range FineLock technology under 250 m are unreliable - do not use them.

•

FineLock and Long Range FineLock technology always take precedence over TRK, DR, or Autolock modes - you cannot use them at the same time.

♦

If you enable FineLock or Long Range FineLock technology along with TRK, the

♦ observation is measured with STD mode.

If you enable FineLock or Long Range FineLock technology along with DR, the observation

♦ is measured with STD mode.

If you enable FineLock or Long Range FineLock technology when Autolock is already enabled, Autolock is automatically disabled.

If there are two prisms close together, and Autolock was enabled before setting FineLock or

Long Range FineLock technology, check the pointing to the prism because Autolock may lock to the other prism before FineLock or Long Range FineLock is enabled.

•

You can use FineLock and Long Range FineLock technology with Averaged observations with a

Trimble S8 total station equipped with FineLock technology with firmware version R11 or later.

Tiltable RMT (Trimble 5600 only)

Enable Tiltable RMT when you use a remote target tilted towards the instrument. Disable Tiltable RMT when you use a fixed vertical target. When disabled, the vertical angle measurement will be corrected for the small offset distance between the RMT and the prism center.

Autocentered Search Window and Search Window Size

When performing a search with the Autocentered search window selected, General Survey uses the current horizontal and vertical angle of the instrument to set the center of the search window, and the horizontal and vertical range to calculate the extents of the window. These extents are sent to the instrument each time it performs a search.

413

If you do not select the Autocentered search window, the search extents are not reset in the instrument.

To configure the top left and bottom right extents of the search window, point and measure with the

instrument before starting the robotic survey. For more information, see Prepare for a robotic survey.

FineLock Tolerance Window

FineLock technology locks onto targets only when they are within the FineLock sensor area. If the intended target cannot be found, FineLock 'auto-gain' increases slightly to attempt to find other nearby targets.

However, this may not always be desirable.

The FineLock tolerance window limits the range that FineLock technology moves when trying to lock onto nearby targets. Targets outside this range are not locked to. Instead, a message shows that a target outside the defined tolerance was found.

The FineLock tolerance window you can configure is defined as a half window, where the maximum half window size is 4 mrad (13' 45"), which is the smallest separation allowed between targets when using

FineLock technology.

To configure the FineLock tolerance window:

1. To open the Instrument functions screen, tap the Instrument icon in the status bar.

2. Tap and hold briefly on the FineLock (or Autolock) button. When you release it, the Target

controls dialog appears.

3. Tap Adv, and then configure the FineLock tolerance window Horizontal range and Vertical range.

4. Tap Accept.

Note - The FineLock tolerance window is available only on Trimble S8 total station with firmware R12.2 or later.

Target tracking with the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station

If you use a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station with search capabilities and a

Trimble VX/S Series 360° prism, custom prism, or a Trimble MultiTrack target, you can configure the software to use an Active Target ID.

When using the

Trimble MultiTrack target, the Tracking mode can be set to:

•

Passive

•

Active

•

Semi-active

Tracking mode - Passive

•

If you do not operate in a reflective environment, set the Tracking mode to Passive.

414

Tracking mode - Active

•

If you operate in a highly reflective environment, or on a site with many prisms, set the Tracking

mode to Active to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

Tracking mode - Semi-active

•

If you operate in a reflective environment, and require precise elevations, set the Tracking mode to

•

Semi-active to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

When the Tracking mode is set to Semi-active, the Target ID is used to track the prism, and then automatically switches to passive tracking mode when taking a standard measurement. This results in

• more precise vertical angle measurements.

When passive tracking is used when measuring, you must be aware that there is a risk of nearby reflective surfaces interfering with the measurement.

When using the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station 360° prism or custom prism, the

Target ID can be set to:

•

Off - the ID is not checked.

•

Search - check the ID when a search is initiated.

•

Search and measure - check the ID when a search is initiated, and when a measurement is initiated.

•

Always

- the ID is constantly being checked by the instrument.

Check the target ID - Search

•

If you operate in an environment with few reflective surfaces, but you want to ensure that if you do a

• search you will lock to the correct target, set Check target ID to Search.

When the Check target ID is set to Search, the Target ID is checked after a search is made to ensure that you are locked onto the correct target. If not, the General Survey software warns you and you can

• perform a new search for the correct target ID.

If you enable Snap to target and the instrument automatically detects the target, the instrument does

• not perform a search or check the Target ID.

The target ID must be carefully aimed towards the instrument when performing a search.

Check the target ID - Search and measure

•

Search and measure.

When the Check target ID is set to Search and measure, the Target is checked again before a measurement is made to ensure that the instrument is still locked onto the correct target. If not, the

•

General Survey software warns you and you can then perform a new search for the correct target ID.

The target ID must be carefully aimed towards the instrument when taking a measurement.

Check the target ID - Always

•

If you operate in a reflective environment, and require precise elevations set Check target ID to

Always to ensure that you maintain constant lock to the correct target.

415

•

When the Check target ID is set to Always, the Target ID is used to actively maintain horizontal lock.

•

The prism is used to maintain the vertical lock.

When passive tracking is used to maintain vertical lock to the prism, you must be aware that there is a risk of nearby reflective surfaces interfering with the vertical tracking.

The Target ID has two "on" modes; on for 60 seconds, and on continuously. When Check target ID is set to

Always, you must set the Target ID on the pole to "on continuously".

The target ID must be carefully aimed towards the instrument at all times.

For more information on how to configure the target ID in the General Survey software, see

Target details.

For more information on how to configure the target ID on the Trimble pole, refer to the documentation for your instrument.

Note - Target ID can be used for rounds observations. When you do this, make sure that each target in the rounds list can have a different target ID. These settings are retained for each individual target until the rounds observations are completed.

Trimble MultiTrack Target

The Trimble MultiTrack target, together with the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, combines the advantages of both passive and active target tracking and the flexibility to instantly choose which method best fits the current task.

To obtain the most accurate measurements with the MultiTrack target ensure that:

•

Line of site to the target is maintained during a measurement. When using a Trimble receiver in an

• integrated survey, ensure that the radio antenna from the receiver does not obstruct the target.

Ensure that the correct prism type and mode is selected in the target form. This will ensure that the appropriate correction values are applied to the slope distance and vertical angle for geocentric offset

• and prism constant.

The MultiTrack target should be used within the vertical angle tolerances shown in the following table:

Tracking mode

Active

Vertical range

+/- 15° from horizontal

Passive +/- 30° from horizontal

Using the MultiTrack target outside these tolerances may degrade the accuracy of the measurement.

Leica Search method

If you operate a Leica TPS1100 or TPS1200 instrument that supports Power search, you can configure the search method to use for performing a search.

The search methods available are:

416

•

Spiral

•

Power search

Use the method that best suits the environment you work in. For more information, refer to the instrument manufacturer's documentation.

Leica ATR mode

If you operate a Leica TPS1200 instrument that supports Low visibility and S-Range ATR modes, you can configure the ATR method used.

The available ATR modes are:

•

Normal

•

Low visibility on

•

Low visibility always on

•

S-Range on

•

S-Range always on

Use the method that best suits the environment you work in. For more information, refer to the instrument manufacturer's documentation.

GPS Search

During a robotic survey, if the instrument loses lock to the target, you can use a GPS/GNSS receiver to help point the instrument.

You can enable GPS Search through any of the following:

• a Trimble survey grade GNSS receiver

• a Trimble Tablet or TSC3 with internal GPS

• a Trimble GPS/GNSS card

• any GNSS receiver capable of outputting NMEA (GGA) through a serial or Bluetooth port to the controller:

♦

The receiver must be able to output GGA messages through the NMEA protocol at 1 Hz.

♦

For information on how to manually configure and connect to the receiver, refer to the receiver documentation.

GPS search is automatically enabled when you are:

• running an Integrated Survey

• using a Trimble Tablet or TSC3 with internal GPS

Note - When using a TSC3 with internal GPS, a connected GNSS receiver is always used in preference to the internal GPS.

417

To enable GPS Search using a Trimble Survey Grade GNSS Receiver:

1. Start the General Survey software and then establish a robotic connection between the Trimble controller and a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station or Trimble 5600 total station.

2. From the main menu, select Instrument / Target controls.

3. Set the 3D check box as required.

♦

If 3D is enabled, a 3D GPS Search position is computed, and the instrument can turn to the

♦ point both horizontally and vertically.

If 3D is disabled, the instrument can only turn horizontally to the GPS Search position.

♦

If the GNSS receiver is initialized in an RTK survey, or if WAAS or EGNOS are available, you can enable 3D because the GNSS heights from a GNSS receiver should be accurate

♦ enough to turn the instrument's vertical angle.

If the GNSS receiver is producing autonomous positions, or if WAAS or EGNOS are not available, Trimble recommends that you disable 3D to prevent incorrect GNSS heights from a

GNSS receiver causing inaccurate turning of the vertical angle. It may be preferable to turn horizontally only.

In an integrated survey, the Receiver type is automatically set to Trimble.

When connecting the controller to the receiver through Bluetooth wireless technology, you must enable Bluetooth communications on the controller, scan for the Bluetooth device and then set the

Bluetooth device in the Connect to GNSS rover field at Settings/Connect/Bluetooth.

If you use a cable to connect the Trimble CU to a GNSS receiver, connect the USB-to-serial cable to the Trimble CU robotic holder before you start the General Survey software. Otherwise, the COM port is not available.

GPS Search is now configured. The relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions must now be

resolved before you can use GPS Search.

To enable GPS Search using a Trimble Tablet controller with internal GPS:

By default GPS search is preconfigured for the Trimble Tablet (that is, GPS Search is on, Enable 3D is off, and the Receiver type is set to Internal GPS ). To change these settings:

1. Start the General Survey software and then establish a robotic connection between the Trimble Tablet controller and a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station total station.

2. From the main menu, select Instrument / Target controls.

3. Set the 3D check box as required.

♦

If 3D is enabled, a 3D GPS Search position is computed, and the instrument can turn to the

♦ point both horizontally and vertically.

If 3D is disabled, the instrument can only turn horizontally to the GPS Search position.

Trimble recommends that you disable 3D to prevent inaccurate GPS heights from internal GPS causing inaccurate turning of the vertical angle. It may be preferable to turn horizontally only.

418

When using a Trimble Tablet controller with internal GPS, the Receiver type is automatically set to

Internal GPS.

When connecting the controller to the receiver through Bluetooth wireless technology, you must enable Bluetooth communications on the controller, scan for the Bluetooth device and then set the

Bluetooth device in the Connect to GNSS rover field at Settings/Connect/Bluetooth.

GPS Search is now configured. The relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions must now be

resolved before you can use GPS Search.

To enable GPS Search using a TSC3 with internal GPS:

By default GPS search is preconfigured for the TSC3 (that is, GPS Search is on, Enable 3D is off, and the

Receiver type is set to Internal GPS ). To change these settings:

1. Start the General Survey software and then establish a robotic connection between the TSC3 and a

Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station total station.

2. From the main menu, select Instrument / Target controls.

3. Set the 3D check box as required.

♦

If 3D is enabled, a 3D GPS Search position is computed, and the instrument can turn to the

♦ point both horizontally and vertically.

If 3D is disabled, the instrument can only turn horizontally to the GPS Search position.

Trimble recommends that you disable 3D to prevent inaccurate GPS heights from internal GPS causing inaccurate turning of the vertical angle. It may be preferable to turn horizontally only.

When using a TSC3 with internal GPS, the Receiver type is automatically set to Internal GPS.

When connecting the controller to the receiver through Bluetooth wireless technology, you must enable Bluetooth communications on the controller, scan for the Bluetooth device and then set the

Bluetooth device in the Connect to GNSS rover field at Settings/Connect/Bluetooth.

GPS Search is now configured. The relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions must now be

resolved before you can use GPS Search.

To enable GPS Search using a Trimble GPS/GNSS Compact Flash card:

Note - A Trimble GNSS card can be used only in a TSC2 controller.

1. Make sure that the General Survey software is turned off and then insert the Trimble GNSS card into the port on the TSC2 controller.

♦

If you insert the card after you start the General Survey software, select Instrument / Target

controls / GPS and then tap Reset to reinitialize the card and GPS Search.

Note - The GPS softkey is available only when GPS Search is enabled.

2. Start the General Survey software and then establish a robotic connection between the TSC2 controller and a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station or Trimble 5600 total

419

station.

3. From the main menu, select Instrument / Target controls.

4. Select the GPS Search On check box.

5. Set the 3D check box as required.

♦

If 3D is enabled, a 3D GPS Search position is computed, and the instrument can turn to the

♦ point both horizontally and vertically.

If 3D is disabled, the instrument can only turn horizontally to the GPS Search position.

♦

If WAAS or EGNOS are available, you can enable 3D because the GPS heights from a GNSS

♦

Compact Flash card should be accurate enough to turn the instrument's vertical angle.

If WAAS or EGNOS are not available, Trimble recommends that you disable 3D to prevent incorrect GPS heights from a GNSS Compact Flash card causing inaccurate turning of the vertical angle. It may be preferable to turn horizontally only.

6. Set the Receiver type to Trimble GNSS card.

GPS Search is now configured. The relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions must now be

resolved before you can use GPS Search.

To enable GPS Search using a generic GNSS receiver:

1. Start the General Survey software and then establish a robotic connection between the Trimble CU or

TSC2/TSC3 controller and a Trimble VX Spatial Station, Trimble S Series total station, or Trimble

5600 total station.

2. From the main menu, select Instrument / Target controls.

3. Set the 3D check box as required.

♦

If 3D is enabled, a 3D GPS Search position is computed, and the instrument can turn to the

♦ point both horizontally and vertically.

If 3D is disabled, the instrument can only turn horizontally to the GPS Search position.

4. Set Receiver type to Custom and then set the controller port as appropriate.

When connecting the controller to the receiver through Bluetooth wireless technology, you must enable Bluetooth communications on the controller, scan for the Bluetooth device and then set the

Bluetooth device in the Connect to GNSS rover field at Settings/Connect/Bluetooth.

Resolving the relationship between GNSS positions and local positions

Before you can use GPS Search, you must have a GPS Search solution. With a job that has a projection and datum defined, an accurate relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions already exists using the Coordinate system definition, and GPS search is ready as soon as the Station setup is complete.

If a projection and datum are not available, this relationship must be determined:

Once a station setup is complete, the General Survey software uses the NMEA positions from the GNSS receiver and the angles tracked by the robotic instrument to determine the relationship between the two positioning systems. GPS Search computes the relationship independently of the job's coordinate system settings.

420

Make sure that the GNSS receiver has a clear view of the sky and then, with the instrument locked to the prism, move the rod around the instrument until the relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions is resolved.

To determine the relationship between the GNSS positions and the local positions, GPS Search requires a minimum of five positions at least five meters apart. If the geometry and GNSS position accuracy is poor, you need more than five positions to resolve the relationship.

When GPS Search is ready, the message GPS Search ready appears in the status line, and the target icon displays a satellite icon above the prism .

Note - If you perform a calibration or change the coordinate system settings, the existing relationship between the GNSS positions and local positions is lost and must be recomputed.

Using GPS Search

GPS Search is used automatically when you perform a search for the target. If GPS Search is ready, the instrument turns to the GPS Search position. With a good GNSS position, for example from a Trimble R8 receiver with an RTK fixed solution, and when snap is enabled, the instrument should snap to the target immediately. If the instrument does not snap immediately, it performs a search before locking to the target.

When using GPS Search with a Trimble Survey Grade receiver, a cross indicates the position of the GNSS receiver. When using any other receiver and a GNSS position is available, a satellite icon appears in the map.

If a GPS Search solution is available, a black satellite icon appears . If a GPS Search solution is not available, a red satellite icon appears . To turn to the GNSS position in a conventional survey, make sure that there is nothing selected in the map and then tap and hold briefly in the map. From the menu that appears, select Turn to GNSS to turn the instrument horizontally to the GNSS position.

Tap Search in the Joystick screen to perform a normal search even when GPS Search is ready. Use this when you need to search for a target without using the GPS Search position, such as searching for a backsight target.

To perform a GPS-aided search from the Joystick screen, tap .

Note - As soon as the instrument locks on to the target, the Joystick screen closes.

To view the GNSS status, tap GPS on the Target controls screen. Alternatively, tap and hold on the target icon.

If you are going into a bad GNSS environment for an extended period of time, tap pause to stop new positions being added into the GPS Search solution. Tap to start adding points into the GPS Search solution again.

To perform a standard search throughout the General Survey software, pause GPS Search at any time.

When GPS Search has good data, it can detect bad data and exclude it from its computations. However, if there are more bad positions than good positions, it is difficult for GPS Search to detect and exclude bad positions. Too much bad data in the computations may prevent GPS Search from becoming ready. If this occurs, move to a better GNSS environment and then tap Reset to restart the GPS Search.

421

Note - The Pause and Reset buttons are available only if you do not have a fully defined coordinate system.

Interrupted Target Measurement

Select this option if the measurement is likely to be interrupted, for example, when measuring in traffic. The instrument continues to measure to the target, even if there are prism obstructions, up to the Interrupt timeout value.

During an automated measurement, if the instrument fails within the Interrupt timeout period the instrument will move back to the target and attempt the measurement again.

Use this option when:

• performing a station setup plus

• performing a resection

• measuring rounds

Notes

•

Interrupted target measurement is available only when using instrument firmware version R12.3.39 or

• later.

Target interrupted measurement is optimized for instruments with a DR Plus EDM.

Instrument Settings

When connected to a Trimble instrument, select Instruments / Instrument settings from the main menu to access the Instrument settings dialog. Alternatively, tap and hold briefly on the instrument icon in the status bar and then release to enter Instrument settings.

Use this dialog to view and set specific controls on the instrument. Depending on the instrument that the controller is connected to, the following functions may be available:

• instrument name

• instrument type

• instrument firmware version

• reticle illumination

• target test

• face 2 backlight

•

auto focus

•

service information

• signal volume

•

EDM power save mode

Instrument Name, Instrument Type, and Firmware Version

422

In Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, tap Name to enter the instrument name. The instrument name is stored in the General Survey job file, and can be output to

Export custom format files

The instrument type and firmware version details are also stored in the General Survey job file and output to

DC files and Custom ASCII files.

Target test

The target test is used primarily in Survey Basic when measuring a distance that is to be displayed as a dead record.

If the instrument is moved more than 30 cm from where the last measurement was observed, the HA and VA are updated but the SD reverts to "?" to avoid mistaking the next target's distance for the previously measured target's distance.

Face 2 Backlight

To enable the face 2 backlight when General Survey is running, select Face 2 backlight.

To enable the face 2 backlight when the Trimble CU is not attached to the instrument, press and hold (long press) the key.

Note - This feature is not available with the Trimble S3 total station.

Auto focus

To enable Auto focus, select the Auto focus check box from Instruments / Instrument settings.

When Auto focus is enabled, the instrument automatically focuses whenever it turns to a point during Station setup, Station setup plus, Resection, Station elevation, Measure rounds, Measure topo, Stakeout, and Turn to.

Notes

♦

Auto focus is available only on an Auto focus-calibrated Trimble VX Spatial Station and

Trimble S8 total station with instrument firmware R11.0.76 or later, and on the Trimble S6

♦ total station produced after April 2006, with instrument firmware R12 or later.

New instruments are shipped with Auto focus calibrated in the factory. When upgrading from an older version of the instrument firmware, you must first calibrate Auto focus using the

♦

Adjustment / Autofocus calib. function on the instrument face 2 display.

If heights are not known, the computed slope distance cannot be determined and the

♦ instrument will be focused based on the horizontal distance instead.

This feature is not available with the Trimble S3 total station.

Servicing the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station

The Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station should be serviced every 3000 hours or 13 months (whichever comes first). When the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station is due for service, the following message appears:

423

Service warning

Your Trimble Total Station is due for service. Please contact your local Trimble dealer.

When this message appears, you can still use the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, but please contact your local Trimble dealer at your earliest convenience to organize servicing.

To check when the instrument is due for the next service, tap Instrument / Instrument settings / Service.

Note - Service information is available only when using firmware version R10.0.58 or later. Customers upgrading to R10.0.58 will not have service information available until after the instrument has been serviced at an authorized Trimble Service provider. For more information, contact your local Trimble dealer.

Signal volume (Trimble 5600 only)

A returned signal sounds if a prism is detected. However, if you have activated EDM power save, you will not hear a signal.

EDM power save (Trimble 5600 DR Standard, and 3600 only)

The power save mode turns off the EDM when the instrument is not measuring a distance. The instrument icon appears without the EDM indicator (*).

When the power save mode is off, the EDM is always turned on to receive a signal.

Note - If EDM power save is enabled on a Trimble 5600 DR Standard instrument, the tracklight is not available.

Radio Settings

These settings are used with a conventional instrument in robotic mode.

The internal radio settings are set when General Survey connects to the instrument. The remote radio settings are set later when you start the rover survey.

You must configure the radio settings to the same values on the instrument and on the rover radios.

Note - General Survey cannot communicate with the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station when the instruments onboard programs are being used. After using the onboard programs, select Exit from the Setup menu to return to the Waiting for connection menu.

Tip - For fast access to configure the Radio settings, tap the instrument icon in the status bar, and then tap and hold on the Start Robotic icon.

Radio Channel

To avoid conflicting with another user on the same Radio channel, give your instrument radio and rover radio a unique radio channel.

424

Network ID

To avoid conflicting with another user on the same Network ID, give your instrument radio and rover radio a unique ID number.

Station and Remote Address

To avoid conflicting with another user on the same radio channel, give your instrument and radio a unique address. Enter a station and a remote address between 0 and 99.

To configure the radio settings on the controller to communicate with a Trimble VX Spatial Station or

Trimble S Series total station:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Radio settings.

2. Configure the Radio channel and Network ID to the same values as those set on the instrument.

3. Tap Accept.

When the controller connects to the instrument using either a cable or Bluetooth technology, the radio settings in the instrument are automatically synchronized to match the controller settings.

Tip - To configure the instrument Radio channel and Network ID without General Survey, select Radio

settings on the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station through the Face 2 menu display.

For more information, refer to the documentation for your instrument.

Using a TSC2/TSC3 with an external radio

You can connect a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station or Trimble 5600 external radio to the TSC2/TSC3 controller through the serial port.

To obtain a robotic connection to the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station through an external radio you must reconfigure the radio port setting on the TSC2/TSC3 controller.

To do this:

1. From the Trimble Access menu, tap Settings / Connect / Radio settings.

2. Tap Options, tap External radio, and then tap Accept.

3. Configure the Radio channel and Network ID to the same values as those set on the instrument.

4. Tap Accept.

Note - You cannot interchange the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station system radios with Trimble 5600 system radios because the radio technology is incompatible.

Note - In some countries, you must obtain a radio license before using your system on a working site. Make sure that you check the regulations for your country.

425

Instrument Adjustment

Select Instrument / Adjust from the main menu to complete the following tests:

HA VA Collimation

Trunnion axis tilt

Autolock collimation

Compensator calibration

EDM constant

On a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, you must perform the HA VA Collimation and the Trunnion axis tilt adjustments together. To start the adjustment wizard, select Instrument / Adjust /

Collimation & Trunnion axis tilt.

On a Trimble M3 total station start the adjustment wizard, select Instrument / Adjust.

Note - Instrument / Adjust is not available during a survey. End the current survey to perform an instrument adjustment.

The HA VA collimation, Trunnion axis tilt, and Autolock collimation instrument adjustments can be performed using General Survey, or on the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station through the Face 2 menu display. For more information, refer to the documentation for your instrument.

HA VA Collimation and Trunnion axis tilt adjustments for the 5600, 3600 and Trimble VX Spatial

Station or Trimble S Series total station

1. Set up the instrument on a stable surface and follow the prompts to complete the test.

Current adjustment values appear for each test (Horizontal collimation, Vertical collimation, and

Trunnion axis tilt). Press the keys lightly to avoid bumping the instrument.

2. Aim at the target and take the first measurement.

3. Turn the instrument away and then re-aim.

4. Take the second measurement.

Note - Do not use Autolock during Collimation or Trunnion axis tilt tests.

Position the instrument as follows:

1. Collimation - at least 100 m from the target.

2. Collimation - less than 4°30’ (5 gon) from the horizontal plane.

3. Trunnion axis tilt - at least 13°30’ (15 gon) from the horizontal plane (for the 5600) or from the VA measured during collimation (for the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station).

426

You must take a minimum of one observation on each face.

Tip - The standard deviations of the measured observations are displayed and updated during the measurement process. These values provide an indication of the consistency of your observations.

Final collimation values must be within tolerance of standard values. If not, the instrument needs to be adjusted mechanically.

For more information, contact your local Trimble dealer.

HA VA Collimation and Trunnion axis tilt adjustments for the Trimble M3 total station

Set up the instrument on a stable surface and follow the prompts to complete the test.

Current adjustment values appear for each test (Horizontal collimation, Vertical collimation, and Trunnion axis tilt). Press the keys lightly to avoid bumping the instrument.

Position the instrument as follows:

1. Collimation - at least 100 m from the target.

2. Collimation - less than 3° (3.33 gon) from the horizontal plane.

Carry out the following steps to complete the Collimation and Trunnion axis tilt adjustments:

1. Observe the collimation target on face 1 - a target less than 3° (3.33 gon) from the horizontal plane.

2. Observe the collimation target on face 2.

3. The collimation results are displayed.

♦

Tap Store to save the new horizontal and vertical collimation settings, or

♦

Tap Trun. to continue on to the trunnion axis tilt adjustment. If carrying out the trunnion axis adjustment continue with the following steps.

4. Observe the trunnion axis target on face 2 - a target at least 30° (33.33 gon) from the horizontal plane.

5. Observe the trunnion axis target on face 1.

6. At least three sets of observations are required to complete the trunnion axis adjustment. Repeat the observations to the collimation and trunnion axis targets two more times. Note that the observations made must agree within a 10" (0.003 gon) range.

7. Tap Store to save the collimation and trunnion axis adjsutments and exit the adjustment process.

Final collimation values must be within tolerance of standard values. If not, the instrument needs to be adjusted mechanically.

For more information, contact your local Trimble dealer.

Autolock collimation

This option is available only for instruments with Autolock, and should be performed after the HA VA

Collimation adjustment has been completed.

Set up the instrument on a stable surface and follow the prompts. Press the keys lightly to avoid bumping the instrument. Ensure that there are no obstructions between the instrument and the target, which should be at

427

least 100 m apart.

Compensator calibration

The dual axis compensator in the Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station and 3600 instruments does not require initialization every time the instrument is leveled. However, Trimble recommends that you calibrate the compensator periodically, especially before you take precise measurements.

On a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station, calibrate the compensator through the instrument face 2 display or on the controller through Instruments / Adjust / Compensator calibration. The instrument handle must be attached and the Trimble CU controller must be unattached.

For information on calibrating through the Face 2 menu, refer to the documentation for your instrument.

To calibrate the compensator in a Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station through the controller:

1. Make sure that the instrument is accurately leveled and that the compensator is enabled.

2. Select Instruments / Adjust / Compensator calibration.

3. Follow the prompts to begin the calibration.

4. The message Balancing instrument appears followed by the message Calibrating compensator. The instrument then slowly rotates through 360°. If the calibration is successful, the message Calibration

complete appears.

5. Tap OK to accept the calibration.

If the calibration is unsuccessful, the message Calibration failed appears. If the calibration fails, check the the instrument setup, and re-level the instrument. Repeat the calibration. If it still fails, contact your Trimble service provider.

To calibrate the compensator in a Trimble 3600 instrument:

1. Select Instruments / Adjust / Compensator calibration.

2. When prompted, turn the instrument 180° to 0°.

3. Tap Accept.

Note - This option is not available for the 5600 because the compensator is calibrated when the instrument is leveled.

EDM constant

To specify an EDM constant:

1. Select Instruments / Adjust / EDM constant.

2. Tap Next and then enter an appropriate EDM constant. The available range is -9.99mm to +9.99mm.

3. Tap Store.

Note - This option is available only for compatible Trimble VX Spatial Station or Trimble S Series total station. It is not available for the Trimble S3 total station.

428

Survey Basic

Survey Basic is available when you connect a controller to a Trimble instrument.

You can use it as follows:

•

If a General Survey job was created with a station setup, then Survey Basic can display raw data, and

• coordinates based on the station setup in the job.

If a current station setup does not exist, you can:

♦

Make simple distance or angular checks.

♦

Define the Northing and Easting coordinates for the instrument point in Survey Basic, set the

♦ horizontal circle and then display coordinates for points observed using Survey Basic.

Key in the elevation for the instrument point and then display the elevation for points

♦ observed using Survey Basic.

Observe to a point with a known reference elevation to compute the instrument elevation and then display the elevation for points observed using Survey Basic.

To compute the instrument point elevation from a known reference point using Survey Basic:

1. Ensure that a current station setup does not exist and then start Survey Basic.

2. Tap Set and then enter the Target height, Reference elevation, and Instrument height.

3. If required, enter the Horizontal angle and instrument point Northing and Easting.

4. To measure the reference point, tap Measure. The instrument point Elevation is computed.

5. To return to Survey Basic, tap Accept.

To change the view on the data displayed, tap the arrow button.

Notes

•

If the target height or instrument height is null, the General Survey software cannot calculate a VD.

•

If target height and instrument height are both null, the General Survey software assumes zero for

• both and can compute the VD, but cannot compute the Elevation.

If a station setup is computed using Survey Basic, a scale only projection of 1.0 is used to calculate coordinates.

Tip - To quickly access Survey Basic, from the Trimble functions screen, press 0.

Note - You cannot store measurements in Survey Basic.

The following table shows Survey Basic functions.

Tap the ...

to ...

Instrument icon on the status bar access the Instrument functions screen

Target icon set or modify the target height

Zero softkey set the instrument horizontal circle to 0 set the horizontal circle

Set softkey

429

Options softkey

Clear softkey

Display view button

Press the ...

Enter key set the target height set the reference elevation, and compute the instrument elevation set the instrument point coordinates, and instrument elevation set the instrument height modify the correction values used in Survey Basic reset the angles back to live and clear the slope distance after a measurement switch the display between HA, VA, SD and HA, HD, VD to ...

measure a distance and fix the horizontal and vertical angles

Note - When a survey is running you cannot change:

• the instrument's horizontal circle

• the instrument point coordinates

•

correction values

Inverse

Inverse provides the ability to display inverse calculations between two measurements. You can configure inverse to compute Radial inverses from a single measurement to one or more other measurements, or

Sequential inverses between successive measurements.

To use Survey Basic to compute the inverse distance between two measurements:

1. From the Survey Basic front screen tap the up arrow and then select Inverse.

2. Set the Method to either Radial or Sequential.

3. Enter a target height, if required.

4. Tap Meas 1 to measure to the first point.

5. Enter a target height, if required.

6. Tap Meas 2 to measure to the next point.

7. The inverse results are displayed.

♦

Tap Continue to measure subsequent points. The process then continues from step 4.

♦

Tap Reset to return to step 1.

8. Tap Esc to return to Survey Basic.

Notes

•

If there is a survey running, the azimuth for each computed inverse will be displayed, and you will be able to select whether to display Grid, Ground or Ellipsoidal distances using the Options softkey, with

• the computations based on the settings in the current job.

Without a survey running, and therefore no orientation, the azimuth is not available for computed

• inverses and all computations are based on simple cartesian computations with a scale factor of 1.0.

Tap Options to configure the format of the grade display.

430

Instrument Functions

To access the Instrument functions screen, do one of the following:

• tap the instrument icon on the controller screen

• select Instrument / Instrument functions from the General Survey main menu

• press and hold the Trimble key

The Instrument functions screen is available for conventional total stations. Use it to control commonly used instrument functions, and to change instrument settings. Depending on the instrument that the controller is connected to, the following functions may be available:

•

STD (EDM Standard mode)

•

FSTD (EDM Fast Standard mode)

•

TRK (EDM Tracking mode)

•

Tracklight

•